JP2012230409A - Liquid crystal display device, display module, electronic apparatus and transport machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a liquid crystal display device capable of improving viewing angle characteristics and to provide a method for driving the liquid crystal display device and an electronic apparatus having the liquid crystal display device.SOLUTION: A liquid crystal display device performs display by tilt-aligning or radially tilt-aligning liquid crystal molecules. In the liquid crystal display device, one pixel is divided into a plurality of regions (sub-pixels) and a signal to be applied to each sub-pixel is varied by an optional period. Otherwise, the signal to be applied to each sub-pixel is varied by adjacent pixels. Then, Viewing angle characteristics for a viewer are improved by increasing tilt-aligning directions of the liquid crystal molecules, as well as the viewing angle characteristics are improved by varying transmission coefficient in the liquid crystal molecules by the optional period.

Description

The present invention relates to an object, a method, or a method for producing an object. In particular, the present invention relates to a display device or a semiconductor device. Further, the present invention relates to a liquid crystal display device. Alternatively, the present invention relates to a driving method of a liquid crystal display device. Alternatively, the present invention relates to an electronic device including a display device.

Liquid crystal display devices are used in various electric products such as cellular phones and television receivers. Liquid crystal display devices have room for improvement in terms of contrast ratio, response of liquid crystal molecules to input signals (hereinafter referred to as high-speed response), and viewing angle characteristics. Be active.

Therefore, in the liquid crystal display device, VA (Vertical) is designed so that the liquid crystal molecules are aligned vertically with respect to the substrate sandwiching the liquid crystal molecules in order to increase the response of the liquid crystal molecules to the input signal (hereinafter referred to as high-speed response). Research on display technology of Alignment (vertical alignment method) type liquid crystal (hereinafter simply referred to as VA method) is underway. In the VA method, there is room for improvement in viewing angle characteristics, and in recent years, an MVA (Multi-domain) is designed in which protrusions are provided in electrode portions sandwiching liquid crystal molecules so that the liquid crystal molecules are inclined or radially inclined.
Vertical alignment (liquid crystal) type liquid crystal, PVA (patterned ver)
Tical alignment) type liquid crystal, ASV (Advanced Super V)
Research on a display technology called “iew” type liquid crystal (hereinafter, simply referred to as MVA method, PVA method, ASV method) has been advanced.

In the MVA method, the PVA method, and the ASV method, the liquid crystal molecules are tilted or radially tilted to improve the viewing angle characteristics when displaying an image. However, there are many places where the liquid crystal molecules are oriented differently. . For this reason, it is difficult to control the alignment of the liquid crystal, and there is a problem in that image quality deteriorates due to variations in visibility on the front and side of the liquid crystal display device. Therefore, one pixel (pixel) is divided into a plurality of regions (subpixel, subpixel, or subpixel: hereinafter referred to as subpixel), and liquid crystal molecules are tilted in different directions to increase the orientation direction. Research on display technology for improving the viewing angle characteristics of a person is underway (see, for example, Patent Document 1 and Non-Patent Document 1).

JP 2006-209135 A

SID'05 DIGEST, 66.1, pp1842, (2005)

Unlike a display device using a cathode ray tube or a self-luminous display element, a liquid crystal display device transmits light from a backlight or the like through a polarizing layer and a liquid crystal layer, and changes the voltage applied to the liquid crystal layer. Display by controlling the amount of transmission. Therefore, the viewing angle characteristics of the liquid crystal element do not reach the viewing angle characteristics of a display device using a cathode ray tube or a self-luminous display element that directly controls the amount of light emitted by applying a voltage to the display element, and there is room for improvement. There is. In the liquid crystal display devices of Patent Document 1 and Non-Patent Document 1, viewing angle characteristics can be improved. However, simply as described in Patent Document 1, increasing the orientation of liquid crystal molecules and improving the viewing angle characteristics by increasing the number of sub-pixels results in a decrease in pixel aperture ratio and a decrease in aperture ratio. This leads to an increase in power consumption.

Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a liquid crystal display device that can improve viewing angle characteristics, a driving method of the liquid crystal display device, and an electronic device including the liquid crystal display device. An object of the present invention is to provide a liquid crystal display device capable of improving image quality, a driving method of the liquid crystal display device, and an electronic device including the liquid crystal display device. In addition, according to the present invention, the density of arrangement of wirings and electrodes constituting the pixel can be reduced without increasing the number of sub-pixels, and the aperture ratio of the pixel can be improved, and the liquid crystal It is an object to provide a method for driving a display device and an electronic device including the liquid crystal display device. A liquid crystal display device capable of reducing a decrease in aperture ratio due to an increase in the number of subpixels and reducing power consumption, a driving method of the liquid crystal display device, and an electronic apparatus including the liquid crystal display device are provided. The issue is to provide.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the present inventors have come up with the idea that in a liquid crystal display device, one pixel is divided into sub-pixels, and a signal applied to each sub-pixel is made different every arbitrary period. The present inventors have also come up with the idea that in a liquid crystal display device, one pixel is divided into sub-pixels, and a signal applied to each sub-pixel is different for each adjacent pixel. Alternatively, in the liquid crystal display device, the inventors divide one pixel into sub-pixels, make a signal applied to each sub-pixel different for each arbitrary period, and apply a signal applied to each sub-pixel to an adjacent pixel. I came up with the idea of making it different every time. As a result, in addition to improving the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer by increasing the orientation of the liquid crystal molecules, it is possible to improve the viewing angle characteristics by changing the transmittance of the liquid crystal molecules every arbitrary period And

Note that the number of sub-pixels included in one pixel is desirably 1 or more. More desirably, 2 or 3 is desirable. When the number of subpixels included in one pixel is 1, that is, when one pixel is not divided into subpixels, an arbitrary period (for example, one frame period) is divided into a plurality of periods (for example, a plurality of subframe periods). It is desirable that the added signal be different for each divided period. However, it is not limited to this.

Note that various types of switches can be used. Examples include electrical switches and mechanical switches. That is, it is only necessary to be able to control the current flow, and is not limited to a specific one. For example, as a switch, a transistor (for example, a bipolar transistor, a MOS transistor, etc.), a diode (for example, a PN diode,
PIN diode, Schottky diode, MIM (Metal Insulator)
Metal diode, MIS (Metal Insulator Semiconductor)
a diode, a diode-connected transistor, or the like), a thyristor, or the like can be used. Alternatively, a logic circuit combining these can be used as a switch.

In the case where a transistor is used as a switch, the transistor operates as a mere switch, and thus the polarity (conductivity type) of the transistor is not particularly limited. However, when it is desired to suppress off-state current, it is desirable to use a transistor having a polarity with smaller off-state current. As a transistor with low off-state current, a transistor having an LDD region, a transistor having a multi-gate structure, and the like can be given. Alternatively, an N-channel transistor is preferably used in the case where the transistor operates as a switch when the potential of the source terminal of the transistor is close to the potential of the low potential power supply (Vss, GND, 0 V, or the like). On the other hand, it is desirable to use a P-channel transistor when operating in a state where the potential of the source terminal is close to the potential of the high potential side power supply (Vdd or the like). This is because an N-channel transistor operates when the source terminal is close to the potential of the low-potential side power supply, and a P-channel transistor operates when the source terminal is close to the potential of the high-potential side power supply. This is because the absolute value of the voltage between them can be increased, so that the switch can be easily operated. Moreover, since the source follower operation is rarely performed, the output voltage is rarely reduced.

Note that CMO using both N-channel and P-channel transistors
An S-type switch may be used as the switch. When a CMOS switch is used, a current flows when one of the P-channel transistor and the N-channel transistor is turned on, so that the switch can easily function as a switch. For example, the voltage can be appropriately output regardless of whether the voltage of the input signal to the switch is high or low. Further, since the voltage amplitude value of the signal for turning on or off the switch can be reduced, the power consumption can be reduced.

Note that when a transistor is used as the switch, the switch includes an input terminal (one of a source terminal or a drain terminal), an output terminal (the other of the source terminal or the drain terminal),
And a terminal for controlling conduction (gate terminal). On the other hand, when a diode is used as the switch, the switch may not have a terminal for controlling conduction. Therefore, the use of a diode as a switch rather than a transistor can reduce the wiring for controlling the terminal.

In addition, when it is explicitly described that A and B are connected, A and B are electrically connected, and A and B are functionally connected. , A and B are directly connected. Here, A and B are objects (for example, devices, elements, circuits, wirings, electrodes, terminals, conductive films, layers, etc.). Therefore, it is not limited to a predetermined connection relationship, for example, the connection relationship shown in the figure or text, and includes things other than the connection relation shown in the figure or text.

For example, when A and B are electrically connected, an element (for example, a switch, a transistor, a capacitor, an inductor, a resistor, a diode, or the like) that enables electrical connection between A and B is provided. 1 or more may be arranged between A and B. Alternatively, when A and B are functionally connected, a circuit (for example, a logic circuit (an inverter, a NAND circuit, a NOR circuit, etc.), a signal conversion circuit that enables functional connection between A and B (DA conversion circuit, AD conversion circuit, gamma correction circuit, etc.), potential level conversion circuit (power supply circuit (boost circuit, step-down circuit, etc.), level shifter circuit that changes signal potential level), voltage source, current source, switching circuit , Amplifier circuits (circuits that can increase signal amplitude or current amount, operational amplifiers, differential amplifier circuits, source follower circuits, buffer circuits, etc.), signal generation circuits, memory circuits,
One or more control circuits and the like may be arranged between A and B. Alternatively, when A and B are directly connected, A and B may be directly connected without sandwiching other elements or other circuits between A and B.

Note that in the case where it is explicitly described that A and B are directly connected, when A and B are directly connected (that is, another element or other circuit between A and B). ) And A and B are electrically connected (that is, A and B are connected with another element or another circuit sandwiched between them). ).

Note that in the case where it is explicitly described that A and B are electrically connected, another element is connected between A and B (that is, between A and B). Or when A and B are functionally connected (that is, they are functionally connected with another circuit between A and B). And A and B are directly connected (
That is, it is assumed that A and B are connected without interposing another element or another circuit). That is, when it is explicitly described that it is electrically connected, it is the same as when it is explicitly only described that it is connected.

Note that a display element, a display device that includes a display element, a light-emitting element, and a light-emitting device that includes a light-emitting element can have various modes or have various elements. For example, as a display element, a display device, a light-emitting element, or a light-emitting device, an EL element (an EL element including an organic substance and an inorganic substance, an organic EL element, an inorganic EL element), an electron-emitting element, a liquid crystal element, electronic ink, an electrophoretic element, Grating light valve (GLV), plasma display (P
DP, a digital micromirror device (DMD), a piezoelectric ceramic display, a carbon nanotube, and other display media whose contrast, luminance, reflectance, transmittance, and the like change due to an electromagnetic action can be used. An EL display is used as a display device using an EL element, and a field emission display (FED) or a SED type flat display (SED: Surface-c) is used as a display device using an electron-emitting device.
As a display device using a liquid crystal element, such as an induction electron-emitter display, a liquid crystal display (transmissive liquid crystal display, transflective liquid crystal display, reflective liquid crystal display, direct view liquid crystal display, projection liquid crystal display), electronic ink, There is electronic paper as a display device using an electrophoretic element.

Note that various types of transistors can be used as the transistor. Therefore,
There is no limitation on the type of transistor used. For example, a thin film transistor (TFT) including a non-single-crystal semiconductor film typified by amorphous silicon, polycrystalline silicon, microcrystalline (also referred to as semi-amorphous) silicon, or the like can be used. When using TFT, there are various advantages. For example, since manufacturing can be performed at a lower temperature than that of single crystal silicon, manufacturing cost can be reduced or a manufacturing apparatus can be increased in size. Since the manufacturing apparatus can be enlarged, it can be manufactured on a large substrate. Therefore, since a large number of display devices can be manufactured at the same time, it can be manufactured at low cost. Furthermore, since the manufacturing temperature is low, a substrate with low heat resistance can be used. Therefore, a transistor can be manufactured on a transparent substrate. Then, light transmission through the display element can be controlled using a transistor over a transparent substrate.
Alternatively, since the thickness of the transistor is small, part of the film included in the transistor can transmit light. Therefore, the aperture ratio can be improved.

By using a catalyst (such as nickel) when producing polycrystalline silicon,
It becomes possible to further improve the crystallinity and manufacture a transistor with good electrical characteristics. As a result, a gate driver circuit (scanning line driving circuit), a source driver circuit (signal line driving circuit), and a signal processing circuit (signal generation circuit, gamma correction circuit, DA conversion circuit, etc.) can be integrally formed on the substrate. .

By using a catalyst (such as nickel) when producing microcrystalline silicon,
It becomes possible to further improve the crystallinity and manufacture a transistor with good electrical characteristics. At this time, crystallinity can be improved only by applying heat treatment without laser irradiation. As a result, part of the gate driver circuit (scanning line driving circuit) and the source driver circuit (such as an analog switch) can be formed over the substrate. Furthermore, in the case where laser irradiation is not performed for crystallization, the crystallinity unevenness of silicon can be suppressed. Therefore, a beautiful image can be displayed.

However, it is possible to produce polycrystalline silicon or microcrystalline silicon without using a catalyst (such as nickel).

Note that it is preferable to improve the crystallinity of silicon to be polycrystalline or microcrystalline, but the present invention is not limited to this. The crystallinity of silicon may be improved only in a partial region of the panel. The crystallinity can be selectively improved by selectively irradiating laser light. For example, the laser beam may be irradiated only to the peripheral circuit region that is a region other than the pixel. Alternatively, the laser beam may be irradiated only on a region such as a gate driver circuit or a source driver circuit. Or you may irradiate a laser beam only to the area | region (for example, analog switch) of a source driver circuit. as a result,
Silicon crystallization can be improved only in regions where the circuit needs to operate at high speed. Since it is not necessary to operate the pixel region at high speed, the pixel circuit can be operated without any problem even if the crystallinity is not improved. Therefore, the region for improving crystallinity is small, and the manufacturing process can be shortened. Further, throughput can be improved and manufacturing cost can be reduced. Moreover, since the number of manufacturing apparatuses required can be reduced, manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Alternatively, a transistor can be formed using a semiconductor substrate, an SOI substrate, or the like.
Accordingly, a transistor with small variations in characteristics, size, shape, and the like, high current supply capability, and small size can be manufactured. When these transistors are used, low power consumption of the circuit or high integration of the circuit can be achieved.

Or ZnO, a-InGaZnO, SiGe, GaAs, IZO, ITO, SnO
A transistor having a compound semiconductor or an oxide semiconductor such as a thin film transistor obtained by thinning these compound semiconductors or oxide semiconductors can be used.
Accordingly, the manufacturing temperature can be lowered, and for example, the transistor can be manufactured at room temperature. As a result, the transistor can be formed directly on a substrate having low heat resistance, such as a plastic substrate or a film substrate. Note that these compound semiconductors or oxide semiconductors can be used not only for a channel portion of a transistor but also for other purposes. For example, these compound semiconductors or oxide semiconductors can be used as resistance elements, pixel electrodes, and transparent electrodes. Furthermore, since these can be formed or formed simultaneously with the transistor, cost can be reduced.

Alternatively, a transistor formed using an inkjet method or a printing method can be used. By these, it can manufacture at room temperature, manufacture at a low vacuum degree, or can manufacture on a large sized substrate. Further, since the transistor can be manufactured without using a mask (reticle), the layout of the transistor can be easily changed. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to use a resist, the material cost is reduced and the number of processes can be reduced. Further, since the film is formed only on the necessary portion, the material is not wasted and the cost can be reduced as compared with the manufacturing method in which the film is formed on the entire surface and then etched.

Alternatively, a transistor including an organic semiconductor or a carbon nanotube can be used. Thus, a transistor can be formed over a substrate that can be bent. Therefore, it can be strong against impact.

In addition, transistors with various structures can be used. For example, a MOS transistor, a junction transistor, a bipolar transistor, or the like can be used as the transistor. By using a MOS transistor, the size of the transistor can be reduced. Therefore, a large number of transistors can be mounted. By using a bipolar transistor, a large current can flow. Therefore, the circuit can be operated at high speed.

Note that a MOS transistor, a bipolar transistor, or the like may be formed over one substrate. Thereby, low power consumption, miniaturization, high-speed operation, etc. can be realized.

  In addition, various transistors can be used.

Note that the transistor can be formed using various substrates. The type of substrate is
It is not limited to a specific thing. As the substrate, for example, single crystal substrate, SOI substrate, glass substrate, quartz substrate, plastic substrate, paper substrate, cellophane substrate, stone substrate, wood substrate, cloth substrate (natural fiber (silk, cotton, hemp), synthetic fiber) (Including nylon, polyurethane, polyester) or recycled fibers (including acetate, cupra, rayon, recycled polyester), leather substrates, rubber substrates, stainless steel substrates, substrates with stainless steel foils, etc. can be used. . Or the skin of human animals (skin surface, dermis)
Alternatively, subcutaneous tissue may be used as the substrate. Alternatively, a transistor may be formed using a certain substrate, and then the transistor may be transferred to another substrate, and the transistor may be disposed on another substrate. As a substrate to which the transistor is transferred, a single crystal substrate, an SOI substrate, a glass substrate,
Quartz substrate, plastic substrate, paper substrate, cellophane substrate, stone substrate, wood substrate, cloth substrate (
Natural fiber (silk, cotton, hemp), synthetic fiber (nylon, polyurethane, polyester) or recycled fiber (including acetate, cupra, rayon, recycled polyester), leather substrate, rubber substrate, stainless steel substrate, stainless steel A substrate having a still foil can be used. Alternatively, the skin (skin surface, dermis) or subcutaneous tissue of an animal such as a human may be used as the substrate. Alternatively, a transistor may be formed using a certain substrate, and the substrate may be polished and thinned. As substrates to be polished, single crystal substrates, SOI substrates, glass substrates, quartz substrates, plastic substrates, paper substrates, cellophane substrates, stone substrates, wood substrates, cloth substrates (natural fibers (silk, cotton, hemp), synthetic fibers) (Including nylon, polyurethane, polyester) or recycled fibers (including acetate, cupra, rayon, recycled polyester), leather substrates, rubber substrates, stainless steel substrates, substrates with stainless steel foils, etc. can be used. . Alternatively, the skin (skin surface, dermis) or subcutaneous tissue of an animal such as a human may be used as the substrate. By using these substrates, it is possible to form a transistor with good characteristics, a transistor with low power consumption, manufacture a device that is not easily broken, impart heat resistance, reduce weight, or reduce thickness.

Note that the structure of the transistor can take a variety of forms. It is not limited to a specific configuration. For example, a multi-gate structure having two or more gate electrodes may be used. When the multi-gate structure is employed, the channel regions are connected in series, so that a plurality of transistors are connected in series. With the multi-gate structure, the off-state current can be reduced and the reliability can be improved by improving the withstand voltage of the transistor. Or, when operating in the saturation region, the drain-source current does not change much even when the drain-source voltage changes, and the slope of the voltage / current characteristic is flat due to the multi-gate structure. it can. By utilizing the characteristic that the slope of the voltage / current characteristic is flat, an ideal current source circuit and an active load having a very high resistance value can be realized. As a result, a differential circuit or a current mirror circuit with good characteristics can be realized. Alternatively, a structure in which gate electrodes are arranged above and below the channel may be employed. With the structure in which the gate electrodes are arranged above and below the channel, the channel region increases, so that the current value can be increased or the S value can be reduced because a depletion layer can be easily formed. When gate electrodes are provided above and below a channel, a structure in which a plurality of transistors are connected in parallel is obtained.

Alternatively, a structure in which a gate electrode is disposed over a channel region may be employed, or a structure in which a gate electrode is disposed under a channel region may be employed. Alternatively, a normal stagger structure or an inverted stagger structure may be used, the channel region may be divided into a plurality of regions, the channel regions may be connected in parallel, or the channel regions may be connected in series. Good. In addition, a source electrode or a drain electrode may overlap with the channel region (or a part thereof). With the structure in which the source electrode or the drain electrode overlaps with the channel region (or part thereof), it is possible to prevent electric charges from being accumulated in part of the channel region and unstable operation. Further, an LDD region may be provided. By providing the LDD region, the off-state current can be reduced or the reliability can be improved by improving the withstand voltage of the transistor. Or
By providing the LDD region, when operating in the saturation region, even if the drain-source voltage changes, the drain-source current does not change so much, and the slope of the voltage / current characteristic becomes flat. it can.

Note that various types of transistors can be used, and the transistor can be formed using various substrates. Therefore, all of the circuits necessary for realizing a predetermined function may be formed on the same substrate. For example, all the circuits necessary for realizing a predetermined function may be formed using a glass substrate, a plastic substrate, a single crystal substrate, or an SOI substrate, and are formed using various substrates. Also good. Since all the circuits necessary to realize a given function are formed using the same substrate, the cost can be reduced by reducing the number of components, or the reliability can be improved by reducing the number of connection points with circuit components. Can be planned. Alternatively, a part of a circuit necessary for realizing a predetermined function is formed on a certain substrate, and another part of a circuit necessary for realizing the predetermined function is formed on another substrate. It may be. That is, not all the circuits necessary for realizing a predetermined function may be formed using the same substrate. For example, a part of a circuit necessary for realizing a predetermined function is formed using a transistor over a glass substrate, and another part of a circuit required for realizing a predetermined function is a single crystal substrate. An IC chip formed of a transistor formed using a single crystal substrate may be connected to a glass substrate by COG (Chip On Glass), and the IC chip may be disposed on the glass substrate. Alternatively, the IC chip may be connected to the glass substrate using TAB (Tape Automated Bonding) or a printed board. As described above, since a part of the circuit is formed on the same substrate, the cost can be reduced by reducing the number of components, or the reliability can be improved by reducing the number of connection points with circuit components. In addition, since the power consumption of a circuit having a high driving voltage or a high driving frequency is large, such a circuit is not formed on the same substrate. Instead, for example, on a single crystal substrate. If the circuit of that portion is formed and an IC chip constituted by the circuit is used, an increase in power consumption can be prevented.

One pixel means one element whose brightness can be controlled. Therefore, as an example, one pixel represents one color element, and brightness is expressed by one color element.
Therefore, at that time, in the case of a color display device composed of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) color elements, the minimum unit of an image is an R pixel, a G pixel, and a B pixel. It is assumed to be composed of three pixels. Note that the color elements are not limited to three colors, and three or more colors may be used, or colors other than RGB may be used. For example, RGBW (W is white) may be added by adding white. R
For example, one or more colors such as yellow, cyan, magenta, emerald green, and vermilion may be added to GB. Also, for example, a color similar to at least one of RGB is changed to RGB
May be added to For example, R, G, B1, and B2 may be used. B1 and B2 are both blue, but have slightly different frequencies. Similarly, R1, R2, G, and B may be used. By using such color elements, it is possible to perform display closer to the real thing. Alternatively, power consumption can be reduced by using such color elements. Also,
As another example, when controlling brightness using a plurality of areas for one color element,
One area may be a pixel. Therefore, as an example, when area gradation is performed or when sub-pixels (sub-pixels) are provided, there are a plurality of brightness control areas for one color element, and the gradation is expressed as a whole. However, one pixel for controlling the brightness may be one pixel. Therefore, in that case, one color element is composed of a plurality of pixels. Alternatively, even if there are a plurality of areas for controlling the brightness in one color element, they may be combined into one pixel. Therefore, in that case, one color element is composed of one pixel. In addition, when brightness is controlled using a plurality of regions for one color element, the size of the region contributing to display may be different depending on the pixel. In addition, in a plurality of brightness control areas for one color element, a signal supplied to each may be slightly different to widen the viewing angle. That is, 1
For one color element, the potentials of the pixel electrodes in each of the plurality of regions may be different from each other. As a result, the voltage applied to the liquid crystal molecules is different for each pixel electrode. Therefore, the viewing angle can be widened.

In addition, when it is explicitly described as one pixel (for three colors), it is assumed that three pixels of R, G, and B are considered as one pixel. When it is explicitly described as one pixel (for one color), it is assumed that when there are a plurality of areas for one color element, they are considered as one pixel.

Note that the pixels may be arranged (arranged) in a matrix. Here, the pixel being arranged (arranged) in the matrix includes a case where the pixels are arranged in a straight line or a jagged line in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction. Therefore, for example, when full color display is performed with three color elements (for example, RGB), the case where stripes are arranged and the case where dots of three color elements are arranged in delta are included. Furthermore, the case where a Bayer is arranged is included. Note that the color elements are not limited to three colors, and may be more than that, for example, RGBW (W is white) or RGB in which one or more colors of yellow, cyan, magenta, etc. are added. Further, the size of the display area may be different for each dot of the color element. Thereby, it is possible to reduce power consumption or extend the life of the display element.

Note that an active matrix method in which an active element is included in a pixel or a passive matrix method in which an active element is not included in a pixel can be used.

In the active matrix system, not only transistors but also various active elements (active elements, nonlinear elements) can be used as active elements (active elements, nonlinear elements). For example, MIM (Metal Insulator Metal) or TFD (
It is also possible to use (Thin Film Diode) or the like. Since these elements have few manufacturing steps, manufacturing cost can be reduced or yield can be improved. Further, since the size of the element is small, the aperture ratio can be improved, and low power consumption and high luminance can be achieved.

Note that as a method other than the active matrix method, a passive matrix type that does not use active elements (active elements, nonlinear elements) can be used. Since no active element (active element or nonlinear element) is used, the number of manufacturing steps is small, and manufacturing cost can be reduced or yield can be improved. In addition, since an active element (an active element or a nonlinear element) is not used, the aperture ratio can be improved, and low power consumption and high luminance can be achieved.

Note that a transistor is an element having at least three terminals including a gate, a drain, and a source. The transistor has a channel region between the drain region and the source region, and the drain region, the channel region, and the source region. A current can be passed through. Here, since the source and the drain vary depending on the structure and operating conditions of the transistor, it is difficult to limit which is the source or the drain. Therefore, in this document (the specification, the claims, the drawings, and the like), a region functioning as a source and a drain may not be referred to as a source or a drain. In that case, as an example, there are cases where they are referred to as a first terminal and a second terminal, respectively. Alternatively, they may be referred to as a first electrode and a second electrode, respectively. Alternatively, they may be referred to as a source region and a drain region.

Note that the transistor may be an element having at least three terminals including a base, an emitter, and a collector. Similarly in this case, the emitter and the collector may be referred to as a first terminal and a second terminal.

Note that a gate refers to the whole or part of a gate electrode and a gate wiring (also referred to as a gate line, a gate signal line, a scan line, a scan signal line, or the like). A gate electrode refers to a portion of a conductive film that overlaps with a semiconductor forming a channel region with a gate insulating film interposed therebetween. Note that part of the gate electrode is an LDD (Lightly Dow
In some cases, it may overlap with a ped drain region or a source region (or drain region) through a gate insulating film. A gate wiring is a wiring for connecting the gate electrodes of each transistor, a wiring for connecting the gate electrodes of each pixel, or a wiring for connecting the gate electrode to another wiring. Say.

However, the portion that functions as the gate electrode and also functions as the gate wiring (region,
There are also conductive films, wirings, and the like. Such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) may be called a gate electrode or a gate wiring. That is, there is a region where the gate electrode and the gate wiring cannot be clearly distinguished. For example, when a part of the gate wiring extended and the channel region overlap, the portion (region, conductive film, wiring, etc.) functions as the gate wiring, but also as the gate electrode It is functioning. Therefore, such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) may be called a gate electrode or a gate wiring.

Note that a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) formed using the same material as the gate electrode and connected to form the same island (island) as the gate electrode may be called a gate electrode. Similarly, a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) formed using the same material as the gate wiring and connected by forming the same island (island) as the gate wiring may be referred to as a gate wiring. In a strict sense, such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) may not overlap with the channel region or may not have a function of being connected to another gate electrode. However, due to specifications at the time of manufacture, etc., the part (region, conductive film, wiring, etc.) that is formed of the same material as the gate electrode or gate wiring and forms the same island as the gate electrode or gate wiring ) Therefore, such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) may also be referred to as a gate electrode or a gate wiring.

Note that, for example, in a multi-gate transistor, one gate electrode and another gate electrode are often connected to each other with a conductive film formed using the same material as the gate electrode. Such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) is a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) for connecting the gate electrode to the gate electrode, and may be called a gate wiring. These transistors can be regarded as a single transistor, and thus may be called a gate electrode. That is, a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) that is formed using the same material as the gate electrode or gate wiring and is connected to form the same island (island) as the gate electrode or gate wiring is connected to the gate electrode or gate wiring. You can call it. Further, for example, a conductive film in a portion where the gate electrode and the gate wiring are connected and formed of a material different from the gate electrode or the gate wiring may be referred to as a gate electrode. You may call it.

Note that a gate terminal means a part of a part of a gate electrode (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) or a part electrically connected to the gate electrode (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like). .

Note that in the case of calling a gate wiring, a gate line, a gate signal line, a scanning line, a scanning signal line, or the like, the gate of the transistor may not be connected to the wiring. In this case, the gate wiring, the gate line, the gate signal line, the scanning line, and the scanning signal line are simultaneously formed with the wiring formed in the same layer as the gate of the transistor, the wiring formed of the same material as the gate of the transistor, or the gate of the transistor. It may mean a deposited wiring. Examples include a storage capacitor wiring, a power supply line, a reference potential supply wiring, and the like.

Note that a source refers to a source region, a source electrode, and a source wiring (a source line, a source signal line,
Data line, data signal line, etc.) or a part of them. The source region refers to a semiconductor region containing a large amount of P-type impurities (such as boron and gallium) and N-type impurities (such as phosphorus and arsenic). Therefore, a region containing a little P-type impurity or N-type impurity, that is, a so-called LDD (Lightly Doped Drain) region is not included in the source region. The source electrode is formed of a material different from that of the source region,
This refers to a portion of the conductive layer that is electrically connected to the source region. However, the source electrode may be referred to as a source electrode including the source region. The source wiring is a wiring for connecting the source electrodes of the transistors, a wiring for connecting the source electrodes of each pixel, or a wiring for connecting the source electrode to another wiring. Say.

However, the part that functions as a source electrode and also functions as a source wiring (
Regions, conductive films, wirings, etc.). Such a part (region, conductive film, wiring, etc.)
It may be called a source electrode or a source wiring. That is, there is a region where the source electrode and the source wiring cannot be clearly distinguished. For example, in the case where a part of a source wiring that is extended and the source region overlap with each other, the portion (region, conductive film, wiring, etc.) functions as a source wiring, but as a source electrode Will also work. Thus, such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) may be called a source electrode or a source wiring.

Note that a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) that is formed using the same material as the source electrode and forms the same island (island) as the source electrode, or a portion (region) that connects the source electrode and the source electrode , Conductive film, wiring, etc.) may also be referred to as source electrodes. Further, a portion overlapping with the source region may be called a source electrode. Similarly, a region formed of the same material as the source wiring and connected by forming the same island as the source wiring may be called a source wiring. Such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) may not have a function of connecting to another source electrode in a strict sense. However, there is a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) that is formed using the same material as the source electrode or the source wiring and connected to the source electrode or the source wiring because of specifications in manufacturing. Therefore, such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) may also be called a source electrode or a source wiring.

Note that, for example, a conductive film in a portion where the source electrode and the source wiring are connected and formed using a material different from that of the source electrode or the source wiring may be referred to as a source electrode or a source wiring. You may call it.

Note that a source terminal refers to a part of a source region, a source electrode, or a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) electrically connected to the source electrode.

Note that in the case of calling a source wiring, a source line, a source signal line, a data line, a data signal line, or the like, the source (drain) of the transistor may not be connected to the wiring. in this case,
The source wiring, the source line, the source signal line, the data line, and the data signal line are a wiring formed in the same layer as the source (drain) of the transistor, a wiring formed of the same material as the source (drain) of the transistor, or the transistor It may mean a wiring formed simultaneously with the source (drain). Examples include a storage capacitor wiring, a power supply line, a reference potential supply wiring, and the like.

  The drain is the same as the source.

Note that a semiconductor device refers to a device having a circuit including a semiconductor element (such as a transistor, a diode, or a thyristor). Furthermore, a device that can function by utilizing semiconductor characteristics may be called a semiconductor device. Alternatively, a device including a semiconductor material is referred to as a semiconductor device.

Note that a display element is an optical modulation element, a liquid crystal element, a light emitting element, an EL element (an organic EL element,
An inorganic EL element or an EL element including an organic substance and an inorganic substance), an electron emission element, an electrophoretic element, a discharge element, a light reflection element, a light diffraction element, a digital micromirror device (DMD), and the like. However, it is not limited to this.

Note that a display device refers to a device having a display element. Note that the display device may include a plurality of pixels including a display element. Note that the display device may include a peripheral driver circuit that drives a plurality of pixels. Note that the peripheral driver circuit that drives the plurality of pixels may be formed over the same substrate as the plurality of pixels. The display device is a peripheral drive circuit disposed on the substrate by wire bonding or bumps, so-called chip-on-glass (COG).
IC chips connected by the TAB or IC chips connected by TAB or the like may be included. Note that the display device may include a flexible printed circuit (FPC) to which an IC chip, a resistor element, a capacitor element, an inductor, a transistor, and the like are attached. In addition,
The display device may be connected via a flexible printed circuit (FPC) or the like, and may include a printed wiring board (PWB) to which an IC chip, a resistor element, a capacitor element, an inductor, a transistor, and the like are attached. Note that the display device may include an optical sheet such as a polarizing plate or a retardation plate. The display device includes a lighting device, a housing, a voice input / output device,
An optical sensor or the like may be included. Here, an illumination device such as a backlight unit is
A light guide plate, prism sheet, diffusion sheet, reflection sheet, light source (LED, cold cathode tube, etc.), cooling device (water cooling type, air cooling type) and the like may be included.

Note that the lighting device refers to a device including a backlight unit, a light guide plate, a prism sheet, a diffusion sheet, a reflective sheet, a light source (such as an LED, a cold cathode tube, a hot cathode tube), a cooling device, and the like.

Note that a light-emitting device refers to a device having a light-emitting element or the like. In the case where the display element includes a light-emitting element, the light-emitting device is one example of the display device.

In addition, a reflection apparatus means the apparatus which has a light reflection element, a light diffraction element, a light reflection electrode, etc.

Note that a liquid crystal display device refers to a display device having a liquid crystal element. Liquid crystal display devices include
There are direct view type, projection type, transmission type, reflection type, and transflective type.

Note that a driving device refers to a device having a semiconductor element, an electric circuit, and an electronic circuit. For example, a transistor that controls input of a signal from a source signal line into a pixel (sometimes referred to as a selection transistor or a switching transistor), a transistor that supplies voltage or current to a pixel electrode, or a voltage or current to a light-emitting element A transistor that supplies the voltage is an example of a driving device. Further, a circuit for supplying a signal to the gate signal line (sometimes referred to as a gate driver or a gate line driver circuit) and a circuit for supplying a signal to the source signal line (sometimes referred to as a source driver or source line driver circuit). ) Is an example of a driving device.

Note that a display device, a semiconductor device, a lighting device, a cooling device, a light-emitting device, a reflecting device, a driving device, and the like may overlap with each other. For example, the display device may include a semiconductor device and a light-emitting device. Alternatively, the semiconductor device may include a display device and a driving device.

In addition, when it is explicitly described that B is formed on A or B is formed on A, it is limited that B is formed in direct contact with A. Not. The case where it is not in direct contact, that is, the case where another object is interposed between A and B is also included. Here, A and B are objects (for example, devices, elements, circuits, wirings, electrodes, terminals, conductive films, layers,
Etc.).

Therefore, for example, when it is explicitly described that the layer B is formed on the layer A (or on the layer A), the layer B is formed in direct contact with the layer A. And the case where another layer (for example, layer C or layer D) is formed in direct contact with the layer A, and the layer B is formed in direct contact therewith. Note that another layer (for example, the layer C or the layer D) may be a single layer or a multilayer.

Furthermore, the same applies to the case where B is explicitly described as being formed above A, and is not limited to the direct contact of B on A. This includes the case where another object is interposed in. Therefore, for example, when the layer B is formed above the layer A, the case where the layer B is formed in direct contact with the layer A and the case where another layer is formed in direct contact with the layer A. (For example, the layer C or the layer D) is formed, and the layer B is formed in direct contact therewith. Note that another layer (for example, the layer C or the layer D) may be a single layer or a multilayer.

In addition, when it is explicitly described that B is formed in direct contact with A, it includes a case in which B is formed in direct contact with A. It shall not be included when an object is present.

  The same applies to the case where B is below A or B is below A.

In addition, about what is explicitly described as singular, it is preferable that it is singular.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of them is also possible. Similarly, a plurality that is explicitly described as a plurality is preferably a plurality. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number can be singular.

According to the present invention, in addition to improving the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer by tilting the liquid crystal molecules and increasing the orientation, the viewing angle characteristics can be improved by changing the transmittance of the liquid crystal molecules for each frame. As a result, a liquid crystal display device capable of improving viewing angle characteristics, a driving method of the liquid crystal display device, and an electronic apparatus including the liquid crystal display device can be provided.

Further, according to the present invention, in addition to improving the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer by increasing the orientation direction by tilting the liquid crystal molecules, the viewing angle characteristics utilizing the visual illusion due to the variation in the transmittance of the liquid crystal molecules for each adjacent pixel Can be improved. As a result, a liquid crystal display device capable of improving viewing angle characteristics, a driving method of the liquid crystal display device, and an electronic apparatus including the liquid crystal display device can be provided.

FIG. 6 illustrates a liquid crystal display device of the present invention. The figure for demonstrating a lookup table. The figure for demonstrating the display part of this invention. 3A and 3B illustrate a structure of a pixel in a display portion. The figure for demonstrating the orientation of the liquid crystal molecule in this invention. The figure which shows the timing chart for demonstrating this invention. The figure which shows the relationship between the gradation and the brightness | luminance for demonstrating this invention. The figure which shows the relationship between the gradation and the brightness | luminance for demonstrating this invention. The figure which shows the relationship between the gradation and the brightness | luminance for demonstrating this invention. The figure which shows the relationship between the gradation and the brightness | luminance for demonstrating this invention. The figure which shows the relationship between the gradation and the brightness | luminance for demonstrating this invention. The figure for demonstrating a lookup table. The figure which shows the relationship between the gradation and the brightness | luminance for demonstrating this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating a lookup table. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention. The figure for demonstrating the specific example of this invention.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. However, the present invention can be implemented in many different modes, and those skilled in the art can easily understand that the modes and details can be variously changed without departing from the spirit and scope of the present invention. Is done. Therefore, the present invention is not construed as being limited to the description of this embodiment mode. Note that in the drawings in this specification, the same portions or portions having similar functions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.
(Embodiment 1)

First, the basic principle for explaining the present invention will be described in detail.

In the display portion of the display device, a plurality of pixels are arranged, and as an example, they are arranged in a matrix as shown in FIG. In FIG. 75, the display portion 7501 is provided with a plurality of pixels 7504 connected to the scan line 7502 and the signal line 7503. One pixel (hereinafter 1
The pixel) has one or more regions (also referred to as subpixels, subpixels, and subpixels, hereinafter referred to as subpixels). As an example, as shown in FIG. 75, one pixel has a first sub-pixel (sub-pixel A7504A) and a second sub-pixel (sub-pixel B7504B).

One pixel expresses the gradation of one pixel by the total light transmission amount of each of the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B. That is, if the light transmission amount corresponding to the number of gradations expressed by one pixel is X, the transmission amount X is the light transmission amount XA of the subpixel A and the light transmission amount XB of the subpixel B. Become sum. Then, the transmission amount X is controlled by the sum of the transmission amount XA of the sub-pixel A and the transmission amount XB of the sub-pixel B, and the gradation of one pixel is expressed.

Note that the light transmission amount in the pixel or sub-pixel may be the luminance of the pixel or sub-pixel. Further, it may be the amount of reflected light of the pixel or sub-pixel. Further, it may be the sum of the light transmission amount of the pixel or sub-pixel and the light reflection amount of the pixel or sub-pixel.

FIG. 76 shows specific light transmission amounts of one pixel and light transmission amounts of the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B.
An example will be described in (a). In FIG. 76A, the sub-pixel A with respect to the gradation of one pixel.
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a light transmission amount 7701 of the first pixel, a light transmission amount 7702 of the sub-pixel B, and a combined value 7703 of the light transmission amount of one pixel. For example, as shown in FIG. 76 (a), when the light transmission amount in one pixel is 5, the light transmission amount in the sub-pixel A is 2, and the light transmission amount in the sub-pixel B is 3. Thus, the total value becomes 5, and the light transmission amount in one pixel can be 5.
Further, when the light transmission amount in a certain pixel is 10, the light transmission amount in the sub-pixel A is 4, and the light transmission amount in the sub-pixel B is 6, so that the total value becomes 10. The amount of transmitted light per pixel is 1
It can be set to zero. As described above, by changing the light transmission amount of the plurality of sub-pixels according to the light transmission amount of one pixel, it is possible to appropriately express the gradation.

At this time, the alignment state of the liquid crystal molecules can be different between the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B.
As an example, the liquid crystal molecules of the sub-pixel A are tilted by θA as shown in FIG. 76B, and the liquid crystal molecules of the sub-pixel B are tilted by θB as shown in FIG. 76C. For this reason, when the viewing direction of the viewer changes with respect to a display portion (also referred to as a screen) through which light is transmitted, the amount of change between the gradation recognized by the viewer's eyes and the gradation actually displayed is reduced. Can do. Therefore, the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer can be improved.

As described above, with regard to the gradation expression of one pixel, the viewing angle can be widened by dividing it into sub-pixels. However, when the amount of light transmission in a certain pixel is determined, the light in the sub-pixel A If the transmission amount of light and the transmission amount of light in the sub-pixel B are fixed, the gradation changes when the screen is viewed from a specific direction.

Therefore, in view of the change in gradation described above, the configuration described in this embodiment is configured such that when the amount of light transmitted through a certain pixel is determined, the amount of light transmitted through sub-pixel A and the light transmitted through sub-pixel B. The amount is not fixed. By preventing the light transmission amount at the sub-pixel A and the light transmission amount at the sub-pixel B from being fixed, the gradation changes when the screen is viewed from a specific direction. Further reduction can be achieved.

In the configuration described in the present embodiment, when the light transmission amount X is 1 pixel, the light transmission amount XA of the sub-pixel A and the light transmission amount XB of the sub-pixel B take a plurality of combinations. Focusing on being able to do it, it came to an idea. That is, a plurality of combinations of the light transmission amount in the sub-pixel A and the light transmission amount in the sub-pixel B, which determine the light transmission amount in one pixel, are used. As a result, the change in gradation when the screen is viewed from a specific direction can be reduced without fixing the light transmission amount in each sub-pixel that determines the light transmission amount in one pixel. .

For example, when the light transmission amount X in one pixel is 5, there is a combination in which the light transmission amount XA = 1 in the sub-pixel A and the light transmission amount XB = 4 in the sub-pixel B. Alternatively, there is a combination in which the light transmission amount XA = 0 in the sub-pixel A and the light transmission amount XB = 5 in the sub-pixel B. Alternatively, there is a combination in which the light transmission amount XA = 3 in the sub-pixel A and the light transmission amount XB = 2 in the sub-pixel B. That is, when the light transmission amount of the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B is expressed as (XA, XB), when the light transmission amount X of one pixel is 5, (0, 5), (1, 4) , (2,3
), (3, 2), etc., a plurality of combinations can be taken. Transmission amount XA
And the transmission amount XB is the light transmission amount X.

As a specific configuration, a combination of a plurality of (XA, XB) is used when a light transmission amount X in one pixel is necessary to obtain a desired gradation. For example, (XA1, XB1) is set in a certain period (hereinafter referred to as a first period), and (XA2, XB2) is set in another period (hereinafter referred to as a second period). As a result, in the total period including the first period and the second period, the amount of transmitted light is averaged by the first period and the second period, and the screen is viewed from a specific direction. However, the change in gradation can be reduced.

In the above description, the light transmission amount X of one pixel, the light transmission amount XA of the sub-pixel A, and the sub-pixel B
The relationship of the light transmission amount XB is described as X = XA + XB, but is not limited to this. It is only necessary that the sum of XA and XB substantially coincides with X. Since X, XA, and XB slightly change the amount of transmission depending on the viewing direction, there may be a deviation between the sum of XA and XB and X. However, there is no problem unless a problem such as flickering or normal gradation does not occur with the human eye. The variation of the sum of XA and XB with respect to X may be roughly about 10%, more preferably about 5%.

Next, a configuration using a parameter different from the light transmission amount will be described, and the relationship between the another parameter and the light transmission amount will be described. That is, an example in which the gradation is controlled by controlling the light transmission amount of one pixel using a parameter different from the light transmission amount will be described.

As an example, the area SA of the light transmission region in the sub-pixel A, the area SB of the light transmission region in the sub-pixel B, the light transmission amount TA per unit area and unit time in the sub-pixel A, the sub-pixel B
, The light transmission amount TB per unit area and unit time is PA, the light transmission time in the sub-pixel A is PA, and the light transmission time in the sub-pixel B is PB. The light transmission amount XA of the sub-pixel A and the light transmission amount XB of the sub-pixel B are described using the parameters described above. XA = SA × TA × P
A and XB = SB × TB × PB. Therefore, the area of the light transmission region,
Regarding parameters such as light transmission amount per unit area and unit time, and light transmission time,
The amount of light transmission can be controlled by controlling at least one parameter.

Note that the light transmission region in the pixel or sub-pixel may be a light-emitting region of the pixel or sub-pixel or a light reflection region of the pixel or sub-pixel. Further, the light transmission region in the pixel or sub-pixel may be the sum of the light transmission region of the pixel or sub-pixel and the light reflection region of the pixel or sub-pixel. The amount of light transmitted per unit area and unit time in the pixel or sub-pixel is the light emission luminance per unit time of the pixel or sub-pixel or the amount of light reflection per unit time of the pixel or sub-pixel. Also good. The light transmission amount per unit area and unit time in the pixel or sub-pixel includes the unit area and light transmission amount per unit time in the pixel or sub-pixel, and the unit area and unit in the pixel or sub-pixel. It may be the sum of the amount of reflected light per hour. The light transmission time in the pixel or sub-pixel may be the light emission time of the pixel or sub-pixel or the light reflection time of the pixel or sub-pixel. Also,
The light transmission time of the pixel or sub-pixel may be the sum of the light transmission time of the pixel or sub-pixel and the light reflection time of the pixel or sub-pixel.

The light transmission amounts TA and TB per unit area and unit time in each sub-pixel can be controlled by a gradation signal applied to the sub-pixel. Therefore, when the gradation signal in the sub-pixel A is EA, the light transmission amount TA per unit area and unit time is obtained. Transmission amount TB.

The light transmission amounts TA and TB per unit area and unit time in each sub-pixel can be determined by a signal applied to an actual display element in accordance with a gradation signal. As an example, in the case of the liquid crystal element, in the case of the gradation signal EA in the sub-pixel A, the gradation voltage VA applied to the pixel electrode of the sub-pixel A is a value that has been gamma corrected in accordance with the characteristics of the liquid crystal element. Yes. Further, since the liquid crystal element is AC driven, a positive voltage and a negative voltage are required. Assuming that the potential of the common electrode is 0 V, the gradation voltage VA for positive electrode and the gradation voltage -VA for negative electrode are applied to the pixel electrode. As a result, the transmission amount XA can be controlled by controlling the transmission amount TA per unit area and unit time. The same applies to the sub-pixel B.

Note that the gradation voltage is a value in consideration of the area of the transmission region of the sub-pixel, the light transmission time, the luminance of the backlight, or the like. For example, the area of the light transmission region is sub-pixel A:
When subpixel B = 1: 2, even if the light transmission amount (XA, XB) is (2, 4), the same gradation voltage is applied to subpixel A and subpixel B. Will be supplied. This is because, even with the same gradation voltage, the areas of the transmission regions are different, resulting in different amounts of light transmission.

Although the case where the potential of the common electrode is assumed to be 0 V has been described, the present invention is not limited to this.
When the potential of the common electrode is other than 0V, the gradation voltages for the positive electrode and the negative electrode are also shifted accordingly. Even when the potential of the common electrode is 0 V, the absolute value of the positive gradation voltage and the negative gradation voltage are not necessarily the same. Due to the influence of noise or the like, there may be a difference between the gradation voltage for the positive electrode and the gradation voltage for the negative electrode.

In the case of a display device using a liquid crystal element, light is irradiated from a backlight, a front light, or the like, and the ratio of transmitting light is controlled by the liquid crystal element. That is, it can be said that the light transmittance is controlled by the liquid crystal element. Therefore, the amount of transmission per unit area and per unit time, the amount of transmission, and the like can be controlled using the intensity of light irradiated by a backlight, a front light, and the like and the light transmittance of the liquid crystal element.

As described above, the amount of light transmission can be controlled using various parameters. Of the above parameters, which parameter is used for control can be arbitrarily determined. The parameters are not limited to the parameters such as the area of the light transmission region described above, the light transmission amount per unit area and unit time, and the light transmission time. Various parameters can be used.

When a light transmission amount X in one pixel is required, a plurality of combinations of parameters corresponding to the light transmission amount in each sub-pixel is used. The light transmission amount is controlled by parameters such as the area of the transmission region, the light transmission amount per unit area and unit time, the light transmission time, the gradation signal, the gradation voltage, the transmittance, and the luminance such as the backlight. Therefore, at least one parameter is selected from these parameters. In the parameter, a plurality of combinations of values are used to control the light transmission amount X in one pixel. It is desirable that one parameter is used for controlling the light transmission amount because it is easier to control. However, it is not limited to this,
A combination of these parameters may be used.

For example, when there are sub-pixel A and sub-pixel B, the gradation signal EA of sub-pixel A, transmission time PA of sub-pixel A, gradation signal EB of sub-pixel B, and transmission time PB of sub-pixel B are used as parameters. The light transmission amount X may be controlled by preparing a plurality of sets of values (EA, PA, EB, PB). Alternatively, using the gradation signal EA of the sub-pixel A and the gradation signal EB of the sub-pixel B as parameters and using a plurality of sets of values (EA, EB), the light transmission amount X
May be controlled. The same can be done when the number of sub-pixels constituting one pixel is other than two.

The light transmission amount, the area of the light transmission region, the light transmission amount per unit area and unit time, the light transmission time, the gradation signal, the gradation voltage, the transmittance, the brightness of the backlight, etc. It may be an analog quantity or a digital quantity. When gamma correction is performed in the display device and AC driving of the liquid crystal element is taken into consideration, the gradation voltage is desirably an analog amount. on the other hand,
When the gradation signal does not have information regarding gamma correction or AC drive of the liquid crystal element, the gradation signal is preferably a digital signal (hereinafter referred to as a digital signal). Since a digital signal can easily hold and process a signal, the gradation signal is preferably a digital signal. Therefore, the digital signal is initially converted to an analog signal (hereinafter referred to as an analog signal) immediately before the signal is applied to the liquid crystal element of the display unit. When such digital-analog conversion is performed, information relating to gamma correction and AC drive of the liquid crystal element is added, so that an efficient gradation signal can be input to the display unit.

When a light transmission amount X in one pixel is necessary, for example, when there are subpixel A and subpixel B, the light transmission amount XA of subpixel A and the light transmission amount of subpixel B When the combination of XB (XA, XB) is used, each of the plurality of combinations of (XA, XB) may be prepared in advance as data, or may be created by calculation or the like as needed. A part may be prepared in advance, and a part may be created by calculation.

Note that in the case of using a combination of a plurality of (XA, XB), there is no particular limitation on which order or period the data of the combination is used. For example, multiple (XA, XB
) May be prepared in advance in the storage unit as data, or a plurality of (XA, XB) combinations may be generated by performing arithmetic processing at any time in the arithmetic unit. Alternatively, a part of a plurality of (XA, XB) combinations may be prepared in advance in the storage unit, and a part of the combination may be calculated by the calculation unit.

If a plurality of (XA, XB) combination data is prepared in the storage unit in advance, for example, when the light transmission amount X in one pixel is 5, the combination of (XA, XB) is (
Assuming that a total of four combinations of (0,5), (1,4), (2,3), and (3,2) are used, four pieces of data may be prepared. When data is prepared, the data may be stored in the storage unit as a look-up table (LUT). That is, when the transmission amount is X, (XA, XB) corresponding to the transmission amount X is stored as data as a lookup table, and is read out as needed with reference to the lookup table, thereby combining a plurality of (XA, XB). May be used.

When data is stored in the storage unit as a lookup table, the transmission amount, the area of the transmission region, the transmission amount of light per unit area and unit time, the transmission time of light, the gradation signal, the gradation voltage, Various parameters such as transmittance, brightness of backlight, etc. can be stored. However, in general, the specifications of the lookup table stored in the storage unit are already determined at the stage of designing the display device. Therefore, parameters that do not contribute to actual display need not be stored in the storage unit as a lookup table.

In addition, when data of a plurality of combinations (XA, XB) is stored in the storage unit as the lookup table, it is desirable to use a plurality of combinations (XA, XB) in order. Thereby, data can be used throughout, and the viewing angle can be widened. For example, when the light transmission amount X in one pixel is 5, the total of (0,5), (1,4), (2,3), (3,2) as a combination of (XA, XB) When four combinations of data are stored as a lookup table, (0,5), (1,4), (2
, 3) and (3, 2) in this order. When the combination (3, 2) is completed, the process returns to the combination (0, 5) and is repeated in the same manner.

However, the method of using the combination data for controlling the light transmission amount X in one pixel (hereinafter referred to as combination data) is not particularly limited. Data regarding the order in which the combination data is used may be stored in the storage unit together with the lookup table. Data relating to the order of the combination data can be read from the storage unit and used. The combination data may be used in a random order. When using combination data in a random order, when selecting data from a lookup table, a random number is generated and combination data corresponding to the random number is used.

Next, a gradation signal (hereinafter also referred to as a sub gradation signal) that has a plurality of sub pixels in one pixel and controls the light transmission amount for each sub pixel is stored in a lookup table. A specific configuration example will be described.

FIG. 1 shows a configuration example of a block diagram of a liquid crystal display device. The liquid crystal display device shown in FIG.
A gradation data conversion unit 101, a driving unit 102, a display unit 103, and a gradation data storage unit 104 are provided.

In FIG. 1, a gradation signal 100 is input to the gradation data storage unit 104. The gradation data storage unit 104 is arranged according to the number of gradations of the input gradation signal 100.
The lookup table stored in 04 is referred to. Then, the gradation data storage unit 104 outputs the combination data 106 based on the lookup table to the gradation data conversion unit 101. The gradation data conversion unit 101 is a sub gradation signal 10 based on the combination data 106.
5 is output to the drive unit 102. A control signal 107 for controlling display on the display unit 103 is input to the drive unit 102. The driving unit 102 outputs a signal for performing display on the display unit 103 based on the plurality of sub gradation signals 105 and the control signal 107. The driving unit 102 has a function of performing D / A conversion, gamma correction, and polarity inversion on a signal output to the display unit 103.

The sub gradation signal 105 corresponds to image data (moving image, still image, etc.) supplied to each pixel of the display unit 103. As described above, each pixel of the display unit 103 has a plurality of sub-pixels, and the sub gray level signal 105 is a signal for controlling the gray level of each sub pixel. The control signal 107 is a reference signal such as a clock pulse or a start pulse for driving the driving unit 102.

Note that the gradation signal 100 is preferably a digital signal. Since the gradation signal 100 is a digital signal, the gradation data storage unit 104 can easily perform conversion to the combination data 106 based on the number of gradations of the gradation signal 100. Alternatively, the gradation signal 100 can be easily held. Alternatively, the sub gray level signal 105 output from the gray level data conversion unit 101 to the driving unit 102 is preferably a digital signal. Sub gradation signal 10
Since 5 is a digital signal, it is possible to transfer an accurate signal that is not easily affected by noise. Then, in the driving unit 102, the digital signal is converted into an analog signal that has been subjected to gamma correction, polarity adjustment (selection of a positive signal or a negative signal), and the like. Then, an analog signal is supplied to the pixel of the display unit 103.

Note that the configuration of the block diagram of the liquid crystal display device illustrated in FIG. 1 has been described with respect to an example in which the gradation signal 100 is a digital signal, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the gradation signal 100 is an analog signal, an A / D conversion circuit 5701 is provided on the gradation signal input side of the gradation data converter 101 as shown in FIG. What is necessary is just to convert into the digital signal 5702 of the number of bits. Further, when the analog gray signal is output to the driver 102, as shown in FIG. 58, the D / A converter circuit 5801 is provided on the side where the sub gray signal of the driver 102 is input. May be provided to convert the sub-gradation signal of the digital signal into an analog signal 5802 and output the analog signal 5802 to the driving unit 102. In this case, D
In the / A conversion circuit 5801, gamma correction, polarity adjustment (selection of positive signal or negative signal) and the like are often performed. Therefore, in the drive unit 102, such a function is often omitted. When an analog signal is supplied to the driving unit 102, the configuration of the driving unit 102 can be simplified, so that the display unit 103 and the driving unit 102 can be formed over the same substrate. Thereby, it is possible to realize a narrow frame, an improvement in reliability, a reduction in the number of parts, and the like.

Note that an analog signal is often supplied to the display unit 103 as the sub gradation signal 105, but the present invention is not limited to this. A digital signal may be supplied to the display unit 103 as a gradation signal and displayed using a time gradation method, an area gradation method, or the like.

The combination data 106 corresponding to the gradation signal 100 is read from the gradation data storage unit 104 from the gradation data conversion unit 101. Note that in this embodiment, the number of gradations of the gradation signal is n gradations (n is a natural number including 0). The gradation data storage unit 104 will be described below assuming that the combination data 106 corresponding to the number of gradations is stored as a lookup table. The combination data 106 is output from the gradation data storage unit 104 with reference to a lookup table based on the number of gradations of the gradation signal 100. Note that the look-up table is a data array in which the transmission amount of light expressed by the sub gradation signal 105 output from the gradation data conversion unit 101 corresponding to the number of gradations of the gradation signal 100 is estimated in advance. That is.

The look-up table has combination data corresponding to the number of gradations of the gradation signal 100. Then, in any different period, one of the plurality of combination data is selected, and the combination data 106 corresponding to the number of gradations of the gradation signal 100 is output to the gradation data conversion unit 101.

The lookup table has a plurality of combination data corresponding to the number of gradations of the same gradation signal 100. FIG. 2 schematically shows a lookup table stored in the gradation data storage unit 104. In the present embodiment, the first combination data is output to the gradation data conversion unit 101 as combination data 106 in the first period, and the second combination data is combined with the gradation data conversion unit 101 in the second period. Output as data 106. As described above, even in the combination data corresponding to the number of gradations of the same gradation signal 100, the combination data from the first combination data and the combination data from the second combination data are sub-levels of different voltages. The tone signal 105 is generated by the tone data converter 101.

In addition, a display portion in the display device described in this embodiment includes a plurality of pixels, and each of the plurality of pixels has a single pixel. Each sub-pixel has a liquid crystal element. A sub gradation signal 105 is supplied to the liquid crystal element included in each of the sub pixels. Usually, in order to widen the viewing angle, different gradation voltages are supplied for each sub-pixel,
The light transmittance of the liquid crystal element is controlled. However, it is not limited to this. In some cases, a gradation voltage having the same magnitude is supplied to any of the sub-pixels. Each of the plurality of pixels improves the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer by tilting the liquid crystal molecules in different directions for each sub-pixel, thereby increasing the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer and causing the display device to perform display based on the image data. ing. In this embodiment, a structure in which one pixel includes a first sub-pixel (also referred to as sub-pixel A) and a second sub-pixel (also referred to as sub-pixel B) is described.

The look-up table shown in FIG. 2 includes a sub gray level signal (first sub gray level signal or sub gray level signal A: hereinafter referred to as sub gray level signal A) input to the sub pixel A, and a sub pixel B.
The first combination data 201 corresponding to the sub gradation signal (second sub gradation signal or sub gradation signal B: hereinafter referred to as sub gradation signal B) input to the. Further, the second combination data 202 corresponding to the sub gradation signal A and the sub gradation signal B is included. In FIG. 2, when the number of gradations of the gradation signal 100 is 0, the first combination data 201
The combination data (a0, b0) corresponding to the sub gradation signal A and the sub gradation signal B
, And as the second combination data 202, the sub gradation signal A and the sub gradation signal B
The combination data (c0, d0) corresponding to is referred to. Similarly, when the gradation number of the gradation signal 100 is 1 to (n−1), the first combination data 201 is the combination data (a1,1) corresponding to the sub gradation signal A and the sub gradation signal B. b1) to (a (n
-1) and b (n-1)), and in the second combination data 202, the combination data (c1, d1) to (c (n) corresponding to the sub gradation signal A and the sub gradation signal B are used. -1),
d (n-1)).

In the example of the lookup table shown in FIG. 2, the case where two types of combination data are provided for a certain gradation is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Furthermore, although the case where the number of types of combination data is the same over the entire number of gradations has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. Depending on the number of gradations of the gradation signal 100, the number of types of combination data may be different. For example, in the number of gradations where the gradation change is large when the screen is viewed from a specific direction, more combination data may be included in the lookup table. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce a gradation shift when the screen is viewed from a specific direction and to improve a viewing angle characteristic.

The liquid crystal element included in each of the sub-pixels described above has two electrodes.
When the potential difference between the two electrodes is 0 V (hereinafter also referred to as voltage stop or voltage stop state),
The case where the transmittance is 0% (hereinafter also referred to as normally black) is described. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and an element having a transmittance of 100% (hereinafter also referred to as normally white) when the voltage is stopped may be used as the liquid crystal element.

Here, the operation of each block in FIG. 1 and the combination data of the lookup table will be described using a specific example. Note that the pixels of the display unit 103 are divided into, for example, two sub-pixels, a sub-pixel A and a sub-pixel B, and the area of the light transmission region in each pixel of the display unit 103 is sub-pixel A. It is assumed that the sub-pixel B is equal. First, for example, the display unit 103 is 25.
In the case where display of 6 gradations is performed, the gradation signal 100 is assumed to have the number of gradations (138). Then, the gradation signal 100 having the number of gradations (138) is input to the gradation data conversion unit 101 in an arbitrary period, here, in an arbitrary frame period. In the gradation data storage unit, when the number of gradations is (138), a plurality of combination data corresponding to two sub-pixels are stored as a lookup table. For example, assume that two sets of combination data (50, 88) and (90, 48) are stored. Note that the sum of the combination data of each sub-pixel is
Each combination data is the same. That is, 50 + 88 = 138, 9
0 + 48 = 138. The first set (50, 88) is selected from the look-up table according to the gradation signal 100 input to the gradation data conversion unit 101, and the combination data 106 is input to the gradation data conversion unit 101. Entered. Then, the gradation data conversion unit 101 outputs (50) as the sub gradation signal 105 of the sub pixel A and (88) as the sub gradation signal 105 of the sub pixel B to the driving unit 102. The driving unit 102 appropriately performs D / A conversion processing, gamma correction, signal polarity inversion, and the like on the plurality of sub gradation signals 105 and inputs the signals to the display unit 103. In each sub-pixel of the display unit 103, (5
Light is transmitted with transmission amounts of 0) and (88), and display is performed such that the number of gradations is (138) for one pixel.

Next, in the next frame period, the gradation signal 100 with the number of gradations (138) is input to the gradation data conversion unit 101 again as the gradation signal 100. Here, as an example,
Even if the frame period changes, the same gradation is displayed. Then, the second set (90, 48) is selected from the look-up table according to the gradation signal 100 input to the gradation data conversion unit 101, and the combination data 106 is used as the combination data 106.
Is input. Then, the sub gray level signal 105 of the sub pixel A is output from the gray level data conversion unit 101.
(90) is output to the driving unit 102 as (90), and (48) is output as the sub gradation signal 105 of the sub-pixel B. The drive unit 102 performs D / A conversion processing, gamma correction, signal polarity inversion, and the like on the plurality of sub gradation signals 105 and inputs signals to the display unit 103. Display unit 103
In each of the sub-pixels, light is transmitted with transmission amounts of (90) and (48), and display is performed so that the number of gradations is (138) for one pixel.

As described above, although one pixel displays the same number of gradations as in the previous frame period, the transmission amount in each sub-pixel is different from that in the previous frame. is there. Therefore, the alignment state of the liquid crystal molecules in each sub-pixel can be changed for each frame period. Therefore, when the screen of the display unit 103 is viewed from a specific direction, the amount of transmitted light is averaged, so that the viewing angle can be widened.

In a further next frame period, the first set (50, 88) is selected from the lookup table again in accordance with the gradation signal 100 input to the gradation data conversion unit 101.

Note that when the area of the transmissive region is different between the sub-pixels, here, the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B, it is necessary to consider the difference in the area of the transmissive region between the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B. When considering the difference in the area of the transmission region between the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B, the combination data may be stored in the already-considered combination data when the combination data is stored in the lookup table in advance. When the gradation voltage is generated from the gradation signal, the sub gradation signal may be processed in consideration of the area difference.

The gradation data storage unit 104 includes a RAM (Random Access Mem).
ory) or ROM (Read Only Memory). As the RAM, SRAM (Static RAM), DRAM (Dynamic)
RAM), VRAM (Video RAM), DPRAM (Dual Port RAM)
), NOVRAM (Non Volatile RAM), PRAM (Pseudo R)
AM), FERAM (Ferroelectric Random Access Me)
memory), and the like. As ROM, EPROM (Elec
trily Programmable Read Only Memory),
One-time programmable ROM, EEPROM (Electrically Eras
bable and Programmable Read Only Memory),
A flash memory, a mask ROM, or the like can be used.

In the pixel of the display portion 103, a constant voltage (also referred to as a common electrode) is applied to the first electrode of the liquid crystal element, and the second electrode (also referred to as a pixel electrode) is used based on the sub gradation signal 105. The transmittance of the liquid crystal element is controlled by applying a gradation voltage generated by the driving unit 102 (hereinafter referred to as a sub gradation voltage). In the display device described in this embodiment, a constant voltage is applied to the first electrode of the liquid crystal element, and different sub-gradation voltages are applied to the sub-pixels even when the display is based on the same image data. Thus, an example of controlling the light transmittance of the liquid crystal element is described. Specifically, in the display device described in this embodiment, even if display is based on the same image data, a second pixel is included in each subpixel in the first period and the second period.
By applying different sub-gradation voltages to the electrodes, the light transmission amount (total transmittance of the liquid crystal element) in the first period and the second period is controlled. Further, a gradation voltage generated based on the sub gradation signal A is a sub gradation voltage A (or a first sub gradation voltage) and a sub gradation signal B (
Alternatively, the gradation voltage generated based on the second sub gradation voltage is referred to as sub gradation voltage B.

Note that the sub gradation voltage generated by the driving unit 102 based on the sub gradation signal 105 is used after being converted into a signal applied to an electrode for controlling the liquid crystal molecules of the sub pixel. 1
It has a different notation from 05. However, the sub gradation voltage corresponds to the sub gradation signal because the sub gradation signal 105 is obtained by performing gamma correction and polarity inversion on the sub gradation signal 105 to be input to the sub pixel. Therefore, in this specification, a signal applied to an electrode that controls liquid crystal molecules of a sub pixel is referred to as a sub gradation voltage, and a signal that controls the light transmittance of the sub pixel is referred to as a sub gradation signal. To do.

Next, the configuration and operation of the display unit 103 illustrated in FIG. 1 will be described with reference to FIG. The configuration and operation of the drive unit 102 will also be briefly described.

FIG. 3 shows a configuration of the drive unit 102 and the display unit 103 included in the display device used in the present invention. The drive unit 102 includes a source driver 301, a gate driver 302, and the like. In the display portion 103, a plurality of pixels 305 are arranged in a matrix.

In FIG. 3, the gate driver 302 supplies scanning signals to a plurality of wirings 304, respectively. The scanning signal determines whether the pixel 305 is in a selected state or a non-selected state for each row. The gate driver 302 supplies a scanning signal so that the pixels 305 are sequentially selected from the first row of the plurality of wirings 304. The source driver 301 also supplies a sub gradation signal A input to the sub pixel A in the pixel 305 to the wiring 303 selected by the scanning signal.
The sub gradation signal B input to the sub pixel B in the pixel is supplied to the wiring 313. The sub gradation signal is sequentially supplied to the selected pixel 305.

About an example of the configuration of the source driver 301 and the gate driver 302 shown in FIG.
This will be described with reference to FIGS.

First, the configuration of the source driver 301 will be described with reference to FIG. 22 includes a shift register 2201, a level shifter 2202, a sampling circuit 2203, and the like.

A source driver start pulse (SSP), a source driver clock signal (SCK), an inverted source driver clock signal (SCKB), and the like are supplied to the shift register 2201. Then, the shift register 2201 selects the sampling circuits 2203 one by one via the level shifter 2202.

The level shifter 2202 is a shift register 2201 that supplies the sampling circuit 2203.
The selection signal from is level shifted. Then, the level shifter 2202 outputs the level-shifted selection signal to the sampling circuit 2203.

An input terminal of the sampling circuit 2203 is connected to an output terminal of the shift register 1501, a wiring to which the sub gradation signal A is input, and a wiring to which the sub gradation signal B is input. The output terminals of the sampling circuit 2203 are wirings S (A1) to S (An), S (B1) to S (
Bn) (n is a natural number).

The sampling circuit 2203 sequentially samples the first sub gray level signal and the second sub gray level signal in accordance with the output signal of the shift register 1501. Note that in FIG. 22, the wiring for inputting the first sub-gradation signal and the wiring for inputting the second sub-gradation signal are shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is what FIG. 22 illustrates an example in which a sub-pixel signal is supplied to a pixel in a display portion by dot sequential driving. However, a latch circuit is provided,
Each pixel of the display unit may be driven by line sequential driving.

Although not shown in FIG. 22, the source driver 301 is a D / A conversion circuit for D / A converting the sub gradation signal A and the sub gradation signal B output to the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B. Also, a configuration having a gamma correction circuit for gamma correction and a circuit for polarity inversion may be used.

The configuration of the gate driver will be described with reference to FIG. Gate driver 3 in FIG.
02 includes a shift register 2301, a level shifter 2302, a buffer circuit 2303, and the like.

The shift register 2201 is supplied with a gate driver start pulse (GSP), a gate driver clock signal (GCK), an inverted gate driver clock signal (GCKB), and the like. The shift register 2301 includes a level shifter 2302 and a buffer circuit 2.
Via 303, the wiring connected to the pixel is selected one by one.

The level shifter 2302 shifts the level of the scanning signal from the shift register 2301 supplied to the buffer circuit 2303. Then, the level shifter 2302 outputs the level-shifted scanning signal to the buffer circuit 2303.

The buffer circuit 2303 is a shift register 2 level-shifted by the level shifter 2302
The driving capability of the 301 scanning signal is increased. By increasing the driving capability of the scanning signal by the buffer circuit 2303, it is possible to improve the signal delay time due to the resistance of the wiring for scanning the pixel.

In FIG. 3, the display unit 103 has a plurality of pixels 305 arranged in a matrix as described above. Note that the pixels 305 are not necessarily arranged on the matrix, and the pixels 305 may be arranged in delta or Bayer arrangement. In addition, a wiring 303, a wiring 313, and a wiring 304 are connected to each of the plurality of pixels 505. As a display method in the display unit 103, either a progressive method or an interlace method can be used. Note that by supplying signals to a plurality of pixels and performing display using an interlace method, a driving frequency can be reduced and power consumption can be reduced.

Next, FIG. 4A shows the configuration of the pixel 305 arranged in the display unit 103 in FIG.
This will be described with reference to FIG.

First, FIG. 4A shows the configuration of the pixel 305. The pixel of this embodiment is the first pixel 30.
5 includes a sub-pixel A400 and a sub-pixel B410. Sub-pixel A includes switch 401,
A capacitor element 402 having two electrodes and a liquid crystal element 403 having two electrodes are included.
A first terminal of the switch 401 is connected to the wiring 303, and a second terminal is connected to the capacitor 402 and the liquid crystal element 403. In addition, the switch 401 is controlled to be either on or off by the wiring 304. The sub-pixel B includes a switch 411, a capacitor element 412 having two electrodes, and a liquid crystal element 413 having two electrodes. First of switch 411
The terminal is connected to the wiring 313 and the second terminal is connected to the capacitor 412 and the liquid crystal element 413. Further, the switch 411 is controlled to be either on or off by the wiring 304.

Note that a structure different from the structure of the pixel 305 illustrated in FIG. 4A is illustrated in FIG.
A pixel 305 illustrated in FIG. 4B includes a sub-pixel A400 and a sub-pixel B41 as in FIG.
0. The sub-pixel A includes a switch 401, a capacitive element 402 having two electrodes,
And a liquid crystal element 403 having two electrodes. The first terminal of the switch 401 is the wiring 3
The second terminal is connected to the capacitor element 402 and the liquid crystal element 403. The switch 401 is controlled to be either on or off by the wiring 304A. The sub-pixel B includes a switch 411, a capacitor element 412 having two electrodes, and a liquid crystal element 413 having two electrodes. A first terminal of the switch 411 is connected to the wiring 303, and a second terminal is connected to the capacitor 412 and the liquid crystal element 413. Further, the switch 411 is controlled to be either on or off by the wiring 304B. 4 (a) and 4 (b)
The difference is that there are a plurality of wirings for controlling the switch or a plurality of wirings for supplying the sub gradation voltage, and any configuration can be applied to this embodiment. Therefore,
In this embodiment, FIG. 4A will be described.

Note that as a liquid crystal mode of the liquid crystal elements 403 and 413, a TN mode, an STN mode, an IPS mode, a VA mode, a ferroelectric liquid crystal mode, an antiferroelectric liquid crystal mode, an OCB mode, or the like can be applied.

Note that as the switch 401 and the switch 411, an N-channel transistor or a P-channel transistor can be used. In the case where an N-channel transistor or a P-channel transistor is used as the switch 401, the gate of the transistor is connected to the wiring 304, the first terminal is connected to the wiring 303, and the second terminal is the capacitor 402 and the liquid crystal element 403.
To be connected to. In the case where an N-channel transistor or a P-channel transistor is used as the switch 411, the gate of the transistor is connected to the wiring 304, the first terminal is connected to the wiring 313, and the second terminal is the capacitor element 412 and the liquid crystal element 413. To be connected to.

Next, basic operations related to the first sub-pixel 400 and the second sub-pixel 410 included in the pixel 305 arranged in the display unit 103 in FIG. 3 will be described. When the pixel 305 is in a selected state, the switch 401 is turned on, and the sub gradation voltage A 501 supplied to the liquid crystal element 403 of the first sub pixel 400 is connected to the capacitor element 402 and the liquid crystal element 403 through the wiring 303.
To be supplied. At this time, the capacitor 402 has a sub gradation voltage A5 applied to the liquid crystal element 403.
Holds 01. At the same time, when the pixel 305 is in a selected state, the switch 411 is turned on, and the sub gradation voltage B502 supplied to the liquid crystal element 413 of the second subpixel 410 is supplied to the wiring 3.
13 to the capacitor element 412 and the liquid crystal element 413. At this time, the capacitive element 41
2 holds the sub gradation voltage B502 applied to the liquid crystal element 413.

Further, when the pixel 305 is in a non-selected state, the switch 401 is turned off, and the sub gradation voltage A5 is turned off.
01 and the sub gradation voltage B502 are not supplied to the pixel 305. Here, the capacitive element 40
2 and the capacitor element 412 hold a sub gradation voltage A501 and a sub gradation voltage B502 applied to the liquid crystal element 403 and the liquid crystal element 413, respectively. Accordingly, the liquid crystal element 403
In the liquid crystal element 413, application of the sub gradation voltage A501 and the sub gradation voltage B502 is maintained.

Further, the operation of the sub-pixel A400 and the sub-pixel B410 constituting the pixel 305 arranged in the display portion 103 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. Note that when N-channel transistors are used as the switch 401 and the switch 411, the scanning signal is at an H level when the pixel 305 is in a selected state and at an L level when the pixel 305 is in a non-selected state. Note that in the case where P-channel transistors are used as the switch 401 and the switch 411,
The scanning signal is at L level when the pixel 305 is in the selected state, and at H level when the pixel 305 is in the non-selected state. FIG. 5 illustrates the control of the switch 401 and the switch 411 in the first period and the second period, expressed as switch ON or switch OFF.
FIG. 5 also illustrates the sub gray scale voltage A501 input to the pixel electrode of the first sub pixel and the sub gray scale voltage input to the pixel electrode of the second sub pixel in the first period and the second period. B50
2 shows the change in the potential of 2 and the time change of the gradation of the pixel. Note that the potential with respect to the common potential of the sub gradation voltage A in the first period is An, and the potential with respect to the common potential of the sub gradation voltage B in the first period is Bn. Further, the potential with respect to the common potential of the sub gradation voltage A in the second period is Cn, and the potential with respect to the common potential of the sub gradation voltage B in the second period is Dn.
Thus, the gradation n (n is a natural number including 0) is displayed. In FIG. 5, the common potential is expressed as Vcom. Note that the aforementioned potential An, potential Bn, potential Cn,
And the potential Dn are different potentials.

Note that the light transmission amount of the liquid crystal element is determined in accordance with the potential difference between the sub-gradation voltage and the common potential. Here, the common potential is described as the GND potential, and the potential of the sub gradation voltage and the GN
In the following description, it is assumed that the potential difference of the D potential is the same as the sub gradation voltage.
A description will be given assuming that m is the GND potential. In the example shown in FIG. 5, the first period and the second period
Each period is described as one frame period, and a case where so-called inversion driving is performed in which the polarity of the sub gradation voltage is inverted every frame period will be described.

In FIG. 5, when the switch 401 and the switch 411 are turned on in the first period, the potential An with respect to the GND potential of the sub gradation voltage A501 and the potential Bn with respect to the GND potential of the sub gradation voltage B502 are input to the pixel 305. Thus, the gradation n can be displayed. When the switch 401 and the switch 411 are turned off, the GN of the sub gradation voltage A501 is applied to the capacitor 402 and the capacitor 412 provided in the sub-pixel 400 and the sub-pixel 410 of the pixel 305.
Since the potential An with respect to the D potential and the potential Bn with respect to the GND potential of the sub gradation voltage B502 are retained, the pixel 305 continues to retain the display of the gradation n. Subsequently, when the switch 401 and the switch 411 are turned on in the second period, the potential -Cn and the sub gradation voltage B5 with respect to the GND potential of the sub gradation voltage A501 in which the polarity of the sub gradation voltage is inverted by inversion driving.
The potential −Dn with respect to the GND potential of 02 is input to the pixel 305 so that the gradation n can be displayed. When the switch 401 and the switch 411 are turned off, the pixel 305
A potential −Cn with respect to the GND potential of the sub gradation voltage A501 and a G of the sub gradation voltage A501 are applied to the capacitor 402 and the capacitor 412 provided in each of the subpixel 400 and the subpixel 410.
By holding the potential −Dn with respect to the ND potential, the pixel 305 continues to hold the display of the gradation n.

Note that in the case of performing inversion driving as described with reference to FIG. 5, it is preferable that the sub-gradation voltages input to the sub-pixels constituting one pixel perform the same polarity inversion in the same period. In the example shown in FIG. 5, it is preferable that the potential An and the potential Bn, and the potential −Cn and the potential −Dn have the same polarity.
By making the polarity of the sub gradation voltage inputted to the sub pixel constituting one pixel the same polarity, the amplitude fluctuation width of the sub gradation voltage inputted to the adjacent sub pixel can be reduced, and the adjacent Since the parasitic capacitance between the subpixels and between the wirings for inputting the sub gradation voltage can be reduced, a favorable display can be obtained. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which the polarity of the sub gradation voltage input to each sub pixel is inverted between the sub pixels constituting one pixel.

The potential An and the potential − applied to the electrodes for controlling the liquid crystal molecules of each sub-pixel described with reference to FIG.
An advantage obtained when Cn, the potential Bn, and the potential −Dn are different in the first period and the second period will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 6A to 6D schematically show how the radial tilt alignment of the MVA mode liquid crystal, the PVA mode liquid crystal, or the ASV mode liquid crystal differs depending on the potential applied to the electrode that controls the liquid crystal molecules. It shows. As an example, FIG. 6A to FIG.
In (d), when the potential | An | <potential | −Cn | <potential | −Dn | <potential | Bn |, when the potential An is applied to the electrode for controlling the liquid crystal molecules, the liquid crystal molecules The radial gradient orientation shown in FIG. Similarly, when the potential Bn is applied to the electrode that controls the liquid crystal molecules, the liquid crystal molecules exhibit the radial tilt alignment shown in FIG. 6B, and the potential −Cn is applied to the electrode that controls the liquid crystal molecules. Then, the liquid crystal molecules exhibit the radial tilt alignment shown in FIG. 6C, and when the potential −Dn is applied to the electrode that controls the liquid crystal molecules, the liquid crystal molecules become the radial tilt alignment shown in FIG. It shall be shown. Note that the tilt angle of the liquid crystal molecules shown in FIGS. 6A to 6D is similar to the relationship of potential | An | <potential | −Cn | <potential | −Dn | <potential | Bn |. <Θc <θd <θb.

The radial liquid crystal molecules shown in FIGS. 6A to 6D are different in the potential applied to the electrodes that control the liquid crystal molecules in the first period and the second period, and the liquid crystal molecules in each subpixel. A plurality of directions in which the liquid crystal molecules are tilted can exist due to a difference in potential applied to the electrode for controlling the liquid crystal.

That is, in the sub-pixel A, in the first period, the inclination angle θa shown in FIG.
In the second period, the appearance of liquid crystal molecules can be averaged by aligning at an inclination angle θc shown in FIG. 6C. Similarly, sub-pixel B
In the first period, the orientation of the inclination angle θb shown in FIG.
In the second period, the appearance of the liquid crystal molecules can be averaged by aligning with the tilt angle θd shown in FIG. In the first period, the sub-pixel A
6A, the orientation of the tilt angle θa shown in FIG. 6A is aligned, and in the sub-pixel B, the orientation of the tilt angle θb shown in FIG. 6B is averaged. be able to. Similarly, in the second period, in the sub-pixel A, FIG.
The orientation of the liquid crystal molecules can be averaged by aligning with the tilt angle θc shown in FIG. 6 and by aligning the subpixel B with the tilt angle θd shown in FIG.
Therefore, in the liquid crystal display device of the present invention, the appearance of the liquid crystal molecules can be averaged from any direction while controlling the light transmittance, and the viewing angle characteristics can be improved. Note that the pixel expresses a desired gradation by controlling the light transmittance.

Note that as described above, when a different sub-gradation voltage is supplied to a sub-pixel for an arbitrary period, here, for each frame period, flicker may occur in display on the display portion. Therefore, it is desirable that the frame frequency input to the drive unit is high. Usually, the frame frequency input to the drive unit is 60 Hz (or 50 Hz), but it is desirable to set the frequency twice or more (120 Hz). More desirably, the frequency is three times (180 Hz). When the frame frequency input to the drive unit is increased, the display quality of the moving image can be improved. When display is performed at a higher frame frequency, smooth display can be performed and afterimages can be reduced by interpolating data other than the original screen data using a motion vector or the like.

Note that, when a sub gray scale voltage is supplied to each sub pixel, it is desirable to perform overdrive driving, which is a driving method that supplies a voltage that is larger or smaller than the voltage that should be originally supplied. Liquid crystal molecules have a slow response speed and are difficult to change. Therefore, by supplying a voltage that is larger or smaller than the voltage that should be supplied, the liquid crystal molecules respond quickly. Thereby, the display quality of a moving image can also be improved, a smooth display can be performed, and an afterimage can be reduced.

Sub-pixel A and sub-pixel B in the first period and the second period described with reference to FIGS.
The subpixel A, the subpixel B, and the total value of the subpixel A and the subpixel B will be described with reference to the correlation between the gradation of the pixels constituting the pixel and the light transmission amount (luminance) of the pixel.

Note that the luminance shown in FIG. 7 is a light transmission amount in front of the liquid crystal display device. That is, it means the brightness of light emitted from a unit area in which light from a backlight portion of a liquid crystal display device passes through a panel including a liquid crystal element and is transmitted to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device.

FIG. 7A illustrates the luminance of each of the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B and the sub-pixel when the pixels constituting the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B display a desired gradation in the first period. The sum of the luminance values of A and sub-pixel B is shown. In FIG. 7B, the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B when the pixels constituting the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B display a desired gradation in the second period are shown.
The sum of the respective luminance values and the luminance values of the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B is shown.

FIG. 7A and FIG. 7B will be described. The horizontal axis in FIG. 7A and FIG.
Indicates the gradation of the pixels constituting the sub-pixel A and sub-pixel B, and the maximum value of the gradation is represented by G _{MA
Let X} be. 7A and 7B, the vertical axis indicates the luminance of the sub pixel A, the sub pixel B, and the combined value of the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B. The sub pixel A and the sub pixel B The maximum luminance value of the total value of the subpixel A and subpixel B is L. Note that the maximum value of the luminance of the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B is L / 2, which is half the luminance of the sum of the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B. This is because the area of the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B is This is due to being 1/2 of the pixel.

In FIG. 7A corresponding to the first period, the luminance for displaying a desired gradation is approximately proportional to the gradation as shown by the curve of the sum of the subpixel A and the subpixel B. To increase. On the other hand, FIG.
In (a), the luminance of the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B is based on a sub gradation signal which is a signal corresponding to the luminance. As described above, the sub gradation signal is a signal obtained when the gradation data conversion unit refers to a lookup table stored in advance in the gradation data storage unit. Then, based on the lookup table stored in the gradation data storage unit, the gradation data storage unit outputs combination data that outputs different sub gradation signals for the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B.
Therefore, the luminance curve for the gradation of the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B shown in FIG. 7A is different from the luminance curve for the gradation of the sum of the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B, and the sub-pixel A And the sub-pixel B have different curves.

In FIG. 7B corresponding to the second period, the luminance for displaying a desired gradation is shown in FIG.
In the same manner as in (), as indicated by the curve of the sum value of the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B, it increases approximately in proportion to the gradation. Further, the luminance curve for the gradation of the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B shown in FIG. 7B is the luminance for the gradation of the sum value of the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B, as in FIG. Is different from that of the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B.

For the correlation between the pixel gradation and the luminance of the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B, FIG. 7A describing the first period and FIG. 7B describing the second period are overlapped. The figure
As shown in FIG. In FIG. 8, the sub-pixel A in the first period, the sub-pixel B in the first period, the sub-pixel A in the second period, and the second period shown in FIGS. 7 (a) and 7 (b). A luminance curve with respect to pixel gradation is shown for the sub-pixel B in the period. Note that the maximum luminance value of the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B is L / 2, which is half the luminance of the total value of the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B, as in FIGS. 7A and 7B. Become.

In the liquid crystal display device of the present invention, the sub-pixel A in the first period, the sub-pixel B in the first period,
The subpixel A in the second period and the subpixel B in the second period have different potentials applied to the electrodes that control the liquid crystal molecules, and the tilt angles of the liquid crystal molecules are different, thereby changing the liquid crystal molecules. This is to average the appearance of molecules. Accordingly, the subpixel A in the first period, the subpixel B in the first period, and the second in the low gradation, medium gradation, and high gradation levels in FIG.
FIG. 9 shows the luminance of the sub-pixel A in the period and the sub-pixel B in the second period.

In the present invention, in the first period and the second period, the gradation data conversion unit refers to the lookup table stored in the gradation data storage unit for the sub gradation signal that is input to the sub-pixel. It is a signal obtained by doing. Then, based on the lookup table stored in the gradation data storage unit, the gradation data storage unit outputs combination data that outputs different sub gradation signals for the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9, the luminance of the subpixel A and the subpixel B in the first period and the second period can be made different in luminance. The liquid crystal display device of the present invention can average the appearance of liquid crystal molecules and improve the viewing angle characteristics when the display portion is viewed from any direction.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing of this embodiment can be applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (or part of the contents) described in the drawings of another embodiment. Etc. can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.
(Embodiment 2)

In this embodiment mode, the liquid crystal display device of the present invention described in Embodiment Mode 1 will be further described. In particular, in the present embodiment, the configuration of sub-pixels constituting a pixel will be described.

7A and 7B described in the first embodiment, the configuration in which the areas of the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B are each ½ of the pixel has been described. 10 (a) and FIG.
In (b), a configuration in which the area of the sub-pixel A and the area of the sub-pixel B are different will be described. The vertical and horizontal axes in FIGS. 10A and 10B are the same as those in FIG. 7 described in the first embodiment.
(A) The same as FIG. 7 (b). The areas of the subpixel A and the subpixel B are respectively
The area is 2/3 of one pixel and 1/3 of one pixel. Therefore, FIG. 10 (a), FIG.
The maximum luminance value of subpixel A and subpixel B at 0 (b) is 2L / 3 for subpixel A and L for subpixel B, where the luminance of the sum of subpixel A and subpixel B is L. / 3.

In FIG. 10A corresponding to the first period, as in FIG. 7A, the luminance for displaying a desired gradation is indicated by a curve of the sum value of the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B. In addition, it increases in proportion to the gradation. In FIG. 10A, the luminance of the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B is based on a sub-gradation signal that is a signal corresponding to the luminance. As described above, the sub gradation signal is a signal obtained when the gradation data conversion unit refers to a lookup table stored in advance in the gradation data storage unit. And based on the lookup table stored in the gradation data storage unit,
The gradation data storage unit outputs combination data that outputs different sub gradation signals for the sub pixel A and the sub pixel B. Therefore, the luminance curve for the gradation of the subpixel A and the subpixel B shown in FIG. 10A is different from the luminance curve for the gradation of the sum of the subpixel A and the subpixel B, and the subpixel A And the sub-pixel B have different curves.

In FIG. 10B corresponding to the second period, the luminance for displaying a desired gradation is as shown in FIG.
As in (a), as indicated by the curve of the sum of subpixel A and subpixel B, it increases approximately in proportion to the gradation. Further, the luminance curve for the gradation of the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B shown in FIG. 10B is the luminance for the gradation of the sum of the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B, as in FIG. Is different from that of the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B.

FIG. 10A describing the first period and FIG. 10B describing the second period are overlaid on the correlation between the pixel gradation and the luminance of the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B. This figure is shown in FIG. In FIG. 11, the sub-pixel A in the first period, the sub-pixel B in the first period, the sub-pixel A in the second period, and the second period shown in FIG. 10 (a) and FIG. 10 (b). A luminance curve with respect to pixel gradation is shown for the sub-pixel B in the period. Sub-pixel A
10B, the maximum value of the luminance of the sub-pixel B is 2L / 3 in the sub-pixel A, where L is the luminance of the sum of the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B. In sub-pixel B, L /
3 As shown in FIG. 11, even when the areas of the sub-pixels are different, the sub-pixel A in the first period, the sub-pixel B in the first period, the sub-pixel A in the second period, and the sub-pixel in the second period In B, the change in luminance according to the gradation of the pixel can be made different.

In the liquid crystal display device of the present invention, the sub-pixel A in the first period, the sub-pixel B in the first period,
The subpixel A in the second period and the subpixel B in the second period have different potentials applied to the electrodes that control the liquid crystal molecules, and the tilt angles of the liquid crystal molecules are different, thereby changing the liquid crystal molecules. This is to average the appearance of molecules. The present invention is shown in FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b).
As shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 11, it is also effective when the pixels of the display unit are configured with different areas of the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B. The liquid crystal display device of the present invention can average the appearance of liquid crystal molecules regardless of the direction of the display portion, and can improve viewing angle characteristics.

Further, the liquid crystal display device of the present invention can improve the viewing angle characteristics even when it is composed of three or more subpixels of one pixel, as in the case of the subpixel A and subpixel B described above. Can do.
In FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, a case where one pixel is composed of three sub-pixels will be described as an example. Note that the three subpixels exemplified in FIGS. 12 and 13 are a first subpixel (also referred to as subpixel A), a second subpixel (also referred to as subpixel B), and a third subpixel (subpixel). Also referred to as pixel C).

FIG. 12 schematically shows a look-up table stored in a gradation data storage unit of a liquid crystal display device having a display unit in which each of a plurality of pixels includes a sub pixel A, a sub pixel B, and a sub pixel C. It is shown. In the lookup table, FIG.
Similar to the lookup table shown in (a), a plurality of combination data corresponding to the number of gradations of the gradation signal are provided. The look-up table shown in FIG. 12 includes a sub gradation signal A input to the sub pixel A, a sub gradation signal B input to the sub pixel B, and a sub gradation signal (third sub gradation signal) input to the sub pixel C. Signal or sub-gradation signal C: hereinafter, sub-gradation signal C
First combination data 1201 corresponding to the above. Also, the sub gradation signal A,
The second combination data 1202 corresponding to the sub gradation signal B and the sub gradation signal C is included. In FIG. 12, when the number of gradations of the gradation signal is 0, the first combination data 1
The combination data (a0, b0, c0) corresponding to the sub gradation signal A, the sub gradation signal B, and the sub gradation signal C is referred to as 201, and the sub gradation signal A is referred to as the second combination data 1202. , Sub gradation signal B, and combination data (d0) corresponding to sub gradation signal C
, E0, f0). Similarly, the number of gradations of the gradation signal is 1 to (n−
1), the first combination data 1201 includes combination data (a1, b1, c1) to (a (n−1)) corresponding to the sub gradation signal A, the sub gradation signal B, and the sub gradation signal C. , B
(N-1), c (n-1)), and in the second combination data 1202, combination data corresponding to the sub gradation signal A, the sub gradation signal B, and the sub gradation signal C ( d1, e
1, f1) to (d (n-1), f (n-1), g (n-1)).

Here, the first combination data 1201 and the second combination data 1202 of the lookup table will be described using a specific example.

For example, it is assumed that one pixel of the display unit is divided into three sub-pixels, a sub-pixel A, a sub-pixel B, and a sub-pixel C, respectively. First, for example, when the display unit displays 256 gradations, it is assumed that the number of gradations is (138) as a gradation signal. Then, in an arbitrary period, here, an arbitrary frame period, a gradation signal having the number of gradations (138) is input to the gradation data conversion unit. In the gradation data storage unit, when the number of gradations is (138), a plurality of combination data corresponding to the three sub-pixels are stored as a lookup table. For example, (10
, 40, 88) and (30, 60, 48) are stored. In addition, the sum total of the combination data of each sub-pixel is as follows.
It is the same. That is, 10 + 40 + 88 = 138 and 30 + 60 + 48 = 138. Then, the first set (10, 40, 88) is selected from the look-up table according to the tone signal input to the tone data conversion unit, and the combination data is
Input to the gradation data converter. Then, from the gradation data conversion unit, (10) is used as the sub gradation signal for the sub pixel A, (40) is used as the sub gradation signal for the sub pixel B, and (88) is used as the sub gradation signal for the sub pixel C. Output to the drive unit. The driving unit relates to the plurality of sub gradation signals.
D / A conversion processing, gamma correction, signal polarity inversion, and the like are appropriately performed, and a signal is input to the display unit. In each sub-pixel of the display unit, light is transmitted with transmission amounts of (10), (40), and (88), and display is performed such that the number of gradations is (138) for one pixel.

Next, in the next frame period, a gradation signal having the number of gradations (138) is input to the gradation data conversion unit again as a gradation signal. Here, as an example, the same gradation is displayed even if the frame period changes. The second set (30, 60, 48) is selected from the look-up table according to the gradation signal input to the gradation data conversion unit, and is input to the gradation data conversion unit as combination data. Is done. Then, from the gradation data conversion unit, (30) is used as the sub gradation signal for sub pixel A, (60) is used as the sub gradation signal for sub pixel B, and (48) is used as the sub gradation signal for sub pixel C. Output to the drive unit. The drive unit
For a plurality of sub-gradation signals, D / A conversion processing, gamma correction, and signal polarity inversion are performed, and signals are input to the display unit. In each sub-pixel of the display unit, (30), (60), (4
Light is transmitted with the transmission amount of 8), and display is performed so that the number of gradations is (138) for one pixel.

In the next frame period, the first set (10, 40, 88) is selected from the lookup table again in accordance with the gradation signal input to the gradation data conversion unit.

Note that when the area of the transmissive region is different between the sub-pixels, here, the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B, it is necessary to consider the difference in the area of the transmissive region between the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B. When considering the difference in the area of the transmission region between the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B, the combination data may be stored in the already-considered combination data when the combination data is stored in the lookup table in advance. When the gradation voltage is generated from the gradation signal, the sub gradation signal may be processed in consideration of the area difference.

As described above, from the combination data corresponding to the number of gradations of the same gradation signal, any one combination data is selected every arbitrary period, and the gradation data conversion unit based on the combination data. By generating sub-gradation signals and displaying on the display unit, even in the same gradation display, the orientation in which liquid crystal molecules are tilted in a different direction can be increased every arbitrary period. The viewing angle characteristics of the viewer can be improved.

Next, FIG. 13 shows the correlation between the gray level of the pixel and the light transmission amount (luminance) in the first period and the second period for the subpixel A, the subpixel B, and the subpixel C. The figure is shown.
In FIG. 13, the areas of the sub-pixel A, the sub-pixel B, and the sub-pixel C are each 1 pixel.
A configuration that is / 3 will be described. The vertical axis and horizontal axis in FIG. 13 are the same as those in FIGS. 7A and 7B described in the first embodiment. Note that the areas of the sub-pixel A, the sub-pixel B, and the sub-pixel C are each １ ／ the area of the pixel. Therefore, the maximum luminance values of the sub-pixel A, the sub-pixel B, and the sub-pixel C in FIG. 13 are each L / 3 when the luminance of the sum value of the sub-pixel A, sub-pixel B, and sub-pixel C is L. It becomes. In FIG. 13, the sub-pixel A in the first period, the sub-pixel B in the first period, the sub-pixel C in the first period, the sub-pixel A in the second period, the sub-pixel B in the second period, and A luminance curve with respect to pixel gradation is shown for the sub-pixel C in the second period. As shown in FIG. 13, similarly to FIGS. 8 and 11 described above, even when the number of subpixels is three or more, the subpixel A in the first period, the subpixel B in the first period, the second In the sub-pixel C in the period, the sub-pixel A in the second period, the sub-pixel B in the second period, and the sub-pixel C in the second period, changes in luminance according to the gradation of the pixels are made different from each other. Can do. The present invention is also effective in the case where each pixel of the display unit is composed of three or more sub-pixels A, B, and C, as shown in FIGS. . In particular, since the voltage application state to the liquid crystal element in one frame period can be changed, the image sticking of the liquid crystal element can be prevented. The liquid crystal display device of the present invention can average the appearance of liquid crystal molecules regardless of the direction of the display portion, and can improve viewing angle characteristics.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing of this embodiment can be applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (or part of the contents) described in the drawings of another embodiment. Etc. can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.
(Embodiment 3)

In this embodiment mode, the liquid crystal display device of the present invention described in Embodiment Modes 1 and 2 will be further described. In the present embodiment, in particular, the first period described above,
The second period will be specifically described.

In the first period and the second period described with reference to FIG. 5 in the first embodiment, the sub gradation signal generated by the gradation data conversion unit with reference to any one of the combination data from the lookup table. Are output to each sub-pixel. By generating sub-gradation signals in the gradation data conversion unit and displaying on the display unit, the liquid crystal molecules are tilted and aligned in a different direction every arbitrary period even in the same gradation display. The orientation can be increased, and the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer can be improved.

In the first period and the second period of the present invention described in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14A, combination data that is alternately referred to every frame period is displayed. It can be set as the structure which selects and replaces. When displaying a video such as a moving image, different image data is displayed several tens of times (for example, 30 times, 60 times, or 120 times) per second. According to the present invention, as the first period and the second period, which are different periods, the nth frame (n is a natural number) is the first period, and the (n + 1) th frame is the second period. To do. By displaying a lot of different image data per second, it is possible to reduce display flickering and afterimages of moving images. Even in the same gradation display, the liquid crystal is displayed in a different direction every arbitrary period. The orientation in which the molecules are tilted can be increased, and the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer can be improved.

In the case of a still image or the like, the same image data is displayed over a plurality of frame periods. Even when displaying the same image data, the present invention generates sub-gradation signals with reference to different combination data, and sets the orientation in which liquid crystal molecules are tilted in a different direction every arbitrary period. The viewing angle characteristics of the viewer can be improved.

Further, in the first period and the second period of the present invention described in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14B, the combination data is alternately displayed for each subframe period. It can be set as the structure replaced by selecting. The subframe means each period obtained by dividing one frame period into a plurality of periods. The subframe is shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 4 (b), one frame period is divided into equal periods in the first subframe and the second subframe, or one frame period is divided into the first subframe as shown in FIG. 15 (a). The frame and the second subframe may be divided into different periods. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 15B, the first subframe to the third subframe may be divided into equal periods, and the first period and the second period may be switched alternately. . The present invention is configured to switch the first period and the second period for each subframe period as the first period and the second period, which are different periods, and equalize the period of the subframe period, or By making the periods of the subframes different, the orientation in which the liquid crystal molecules are tilted in another direction can be increased within one frame period, and the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer can be improved. In the present invention, the first subframe to the third subframe are divided into equal periods, and the first period and the second period are alternately switched. The orientation in which the liquid crystal molecules are tilted in another direction can be increased, and the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer can be improved. Furthermore, by dividing each subframe period into a plurality of parts, display flicker and afterimages of moving images can be reduced and displayed.

In addition to the first period and the second period described in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, a plurality of periods, for example, the first period to the third period are included for each frame period. Alternatively, different combination data can be selected from the lookup table and replaced for each subframe period.

FIG. 16 shows that the first period to the third period are for each frame period or each subframe period.
It is an example of the look-up table for selecting different combination data. The look-up table shown in FIG. 16 includes a sub gray level signal (first sub gray level signal or sub gray level signal A: hereinafter referred to as sub gray level signal A) input to the sub pixel A, and a sub pixel B. The first combination data 1601 corresponding to the sub gray scale signal (second sub gray scale signal or sub gray scale signal B: hereinafter referred to as sub gray scale signal B). In addition, second combination data 1602 corresponding to the sub gradation signal A and the sub gradation signal B is included. In addition, third combination data 1603 corresponding to the sub gradation signal A and the sub gradation signal B is included. In FIG. 16, when the number of gradations of the gradation signal is 0, the first combination data 1
601, combination data (a0,) corresponding to the sub gradation signal A and the sub gradation signal B
b0), the second combination data 1602 is referred to as the combination data (c0, d0) corresponding to the sub gradation signal A and the sub gradation signal B, and the third combination data 1603 is referred to as the sub combination data 1603. Combination data corresponding to the gradation signal A and the sub gradation signal B (e
0, f0). Similarly, when the number of gradations of the gradation signal is 1 to (n−1), the first combination data 1601 is the combination data (a1, b1) corresponding to the sub gradation signal A and the sub gradation signal B. ) To (a (n−1), b (n−1)), and in the second combination data 1602, combination data (c1, d1) corresponding to the sub gradation signal A and the sub gradation signal B ) To (c (n−1), d (n−1)), the third combination data 1603 is combination data (e1, f1) corresponding to the sub gradation signal A and the sub gradation signal B. To (e (n-1), f (n-1)).

Here, the first combination data 1601, the second combination data 1602, and the third combination data 1603 of the lookup table will be described using a specific example.

For example, the pixel of the display unit is divided into two sub-pixels, a sub-pixel A and a sub-pixel B,
Assume that the area of the light transmission region in each pixel of the display unit 103 is the same for the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B. First, for example, when the display unit displays 256 gradations, it is assumed that the number of gradations is (138) as a gradation signal. Then, in an arbitrary period, here, an arbitrary frame period, a gradation signal having the number of gradations (138) is input to the gradation data conversion unit. In the gradation data storage unit, when the number of gradations is (138), a plurality of combination data corresponding to two sub-pixels are stored as a lookup table. For example, (50, 88), (90, 48),
Assume that three sets of combination data (20, 118) are stored. Note that the total sum of the combination data of each sub-pixel is the same in each combination data. That is, 50 + 88 = 138, 90 + 48 = 138, 20 + 118 = 138. The first set (50, 8) according to the gradation signal input to the gradation data converter.
8) is selected from the look-up table and is input to the gradation data converter as combination data. Then, the gradation data conversion unit outputs (50) as the sub gradation signal of the sub pixel A.
) As a sub gradation signal of the sub pixel B, and (88) as a sub gradation signal of the sub pixel C (8).
8) is output to the drive unit. The driving unit appropriately performs D / A conversion processing, gamma correction, signal polarity inversion, and the like on the plurality of sub grayscale signals, and inputs signals to the display unit. In each sub-pixel of the display unit, light is transmitted with transmission amounts of (50) and (88), and the number of gradations is (1)
138) is displayed.

Next, in the next frame period, a gradation signal having the number of gradations (138) is input to the gradation data conversion unit again as a gradation signal. Here, as an example, the same gradation is displayed even if the frame period changes. The second set (90, 48) is selected from the look-up table according to the gradation signal input to the gradation data conversion unit, and is input to the gradation data conversion unit as combination data. . Then, from the gradation data conversion unit, (90) as the sub gradation signal of the sub pixel A and (48) as the sub gradation signal of the sub pixel B.
) Is output to the drive unit. The driving unit performs D / A conversion processing, gamma correction, signal polarity inversion, and the like on the plurality of sub grayscale signals, and inputs signals to the display unit. Each sub-pixel of the display unit transmits light with transmission amounts of (90) and (48), and the number of gradations is (138) for one pixel.
) Is displayed.

Next, similarly in the next frame period, the gradation signal having the number of gradations (138) is input to the gradation data conversion unit as the gradation signal. Then, the third set (20, 118) is selected from the lookup table according to the gradation signal input to the gradation data conversion unit, and is input to the gradation data conversion unit as combination data. . Then, the gradation data conversion unit outputs (20) as the sub gradation signal of the sub pixel A and (118) as the sub gradation signal of the sub pixel B to the driving unit. The driving unit performs D / A conversion processing, gamma correction, signal polarity inversion, and the like on the plurality of sub grayscale signals, and inputs signals to the display unit. In each sub-pixel of the display unit, light is transmitted with transmission amounts of (20) and (118), and display is performed so that the number of gradations is (138) as one pixel.

In the next frame period, the first set (50, 88) is selected from the lookup table again in accordance with the grayscale signal input to the grayscale data converter.

As described above, from among three or more combination data corresponding to the number of gradations of the same gradation signal, any one combination data is selected every arbitrary period, and gradation is based on the combination data. By generating a sub gray scale signal in the data conversion section and displaying on the display section, even in the same gray scale display, the liquid crystal molecules are tilted in different directions and aligned in any direction. The viewing angle characteristics of the viewer can be improved.

Note that when the area of the transmissive region is different between the sub-pixels, here, the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B, it is necessary to consider the difference in the area of the transmissive region between the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B. When considering the difference in the area of the transmission region between the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B, the combination data may be stored in the already-considered combination data when the combination data is stored in the lookup table in advance. When the gradation voltage is generated from the gradation signal, the sub gradation signal may be processed in consideration of the area difference.

Any one of the first to third combination data shown in FIG. 16 is referred to for each of the first to third periods. Then, based on one of the selected first combination data to third combination data, the sub gradation signal generated by the gradation data conversion unit is output to each sub pixel. As shown in FIG. 17A, the first period to the third period are configured to switch every frame period, and display flickering,
Video afterimages can be reduced, and even in the same gradation display, the orientation of the liquid crystal molecules can be tilted in a different direction for each arbitrary period to increase the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer Can be improved. In addition, as shown in FIG. 17B, the first period to the third period are configured to be switched for each subframe period, and display flicker and afterimage of a moving image can be reduced. By increasing the number of subframes, even in the same gradation display, it is possible to increase the orientation in which the liquid crystal molecules are tilted in a different direction every arbitrary period. Improvements can be made. In addition, as shown in FIG. 17C, the first period to the third period are configured to be switched every subframe period and over a plurality of frame periods to reduce display flicker and afterimages of moving images. Even in the same gradation display, it is possible to increase the orientation of the liquid crystal molecules by tilting the liquid crystal molecules in different directions every arbitrary period, thereby improving the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer. .

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing of this embodiment can be applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (or part of the contents) described in the drawings of another embodiment. Etc. can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.
(Embodiment 4)

In this embodiment mode, a structure different from that of the liquid crystal display device of the present invention described in Embodiment Modes 1 to 3 will be described. In the first to third embodiments,
The configuration has been described in which different lookup tables are selected in the first period and the second period among the plurality of combination data stored in the gradation data storage unit. In this embodiment, a configuration in which a sub gradation signal generated by a gradation data conversion unit with reference to any one of a plurality of combination data for each pixel constituting a display unit is output to each sub pixel. explain. For example, in one pixel (first pixel), the first combination data is input to the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B, and in the other pixel (second pixel), the second combination data is input to the sub-pixel A. And input to the sub-pixel B. As a result, in a region including two pixels, the light transmission amount can be averaged by the first pixel and the second pixel. Therefore, by generating a sub gray scale signal in the gray scale data conversion section and displaying the display section, even in the same gray scale display, liquid crystal molecules are moved in different directions for each pixel constituting the display section. The direction of orientation by tilting can be increased, and the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer can be improved.

An example in which display is performed with reference to any one of combination data from a lookup table for each pixel constituting the display unit will be described with reference to FIGS. In FIGS. 18 and 19,
An example in which either the first combination data or the second combination data is selected from a plurality of look-up tables and pixels are displayed will be specifically described.

18A, 18 </ b> B, and 18 </ b> C are diagrams showing a pixel area (hereinafter referred to as a first region) that refers to one of the display unit 1800, the first combination data, or the second combination data. A region 1801), and a pixel region (hereinafter referred to as a second region 1802) referring to the other of the first combination data or the second combination data. As shown in FIG. 18A, odd-numbered columns of pixels in the pixel region can be the first region 1801, and even-numbered columns of pixel region can be the second region 1802. In addition, as shown in FIG. 18B, the odd-numbered pixels in the pixel region can be the first region 1801, and the even-numbered pixels in the pixel region can be the second region 1802. Further, as shown in FIG. 18C, in the odd-numbered rows of the pixel region, the odd-numbered columns of pixels are the first region 1801 and the even-numbered columns of pixels are the second region 1802, and the even-numbered rows of the pixel region are the odd-numbered columns. These pixels may be arranged in a so-called checkered pattern in which the second region 1802 and the pixels in even-numbered columns are the first region 1801.

18A, 18B, and 18C, each pixel in the odd-numbered row or even-numbered row is arranged in the row direction (direction in which the pixels in the row direction extend). 19A, 19B, and 19C show so-called delta arrangements that are shifted by 1/2 pixel. FIG.
As shown in (a), the pixels corresponding to the odd columns of the pixel region can be the first region 1801, and the pixels corresponding to the even columns of the pixel region can be the second region 1802. FIG. 19 (b
), Pixels in odd rows in the pixel region can be the first region 1801, and pixels in even rows in the pixel region can be the second region 1802. Further, as shown in FIG. 19C, in the odd-numbered rows of the pixel region, the pixels corresponding to the odd-numbered columns are the first region 1801 and the pixels corresponding to the even-numbered columns are the second region 1802, and the even-numbered rows of the pixel region. Then, the pixel corresponding to the odd-numbered column can be arranged as the second region 1802, and the pixel corresponding to the even-numbered column can be set as the first region 1801.

In the configurations shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the sub grayscale signals generated by the grayscale data conversion unit with reference to the first combination data or the second combination data for each pixel constituting the display unit, It can be output to a sub-pixel. By generating a sub gradation signal in the gradation data conversion section and displaying the display section, even in the same gradation display, for each pixel constituting the display section,
The orientation in which the liquid crystal molecules are tilted in another direction can be increased, and the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer can be improved.

Note that it is preferable that the sub gradation voltage input to each sub pixel is so-called inversion driven to change the polarity of the sub gradation voltage input every arbitrary period. Note that it is preferable to input a sub gradation voltage having the same polarity as the sub gradation voltage input to each sub pixel constituting one pixel. By making the polarity of the sub gradation voltage inputted to the sub pixel constituting one pixel the same polarity, the amplitude fluctuation width of the sub gradation voltage inputted to the adjacent sub pixel can be reduced, and the adjacent Since the parasitic capacitance between the subpixels and between the wirings for inputting the sub gradation voltage can be reduced, a favorable display can be obtained. As inversion driving, for example, frame inversion driving in which video signals having the same polarity are input to all pixels every frame period, source line inversion driving, gate line inversion driving, dot inversion driving, or other inversion driving. It may be.

20 and FIG. 21, a specific operation example of the configuration described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19 will be described. FIG. 21 includes a display unit 2000 including a plurality of pixels, a gate driver 2001 and a source driver 2002 for driving the plurality of pixels. The plurality of pixels are arranged in m rows and n columns (m and n are natural numbers). In addition, the display unit 2000 includes m lines for controlling the operation of the pixels by the gate driver 2001, and the source driver 2002.
Further, n wirings for controlling the operation of the pixels are extended. In FIG. 20, each of the plurality of pixels in the display unit 2000 is a pixel of 1 row and 1 column (1-1).
) If it is a pixel of 1 row and 2 columns (1-2), if it is a pixel of 1 row and n columns, (1-n), m rows and n
FIG. 21 will be described with reference to a column of pixels such as (mn) with an address added.

21 (a), 21 (b), and 21 (c), the display unit 2 of FIG.
4 is a diagram for explaining whether a gradation signal corresponding to each pixel of 000 selects first combination data or second combination data to generate a sub gradation signal. FIG.
The diagram shown in a) shows an example in which the first combination data or the second combination data is alternately selected as the gradation signal that is serially input to the gradation data conversion unit in the order of the pixels in the row direction. ing. By selecting the first combination data or the second combination data alternately for each gradation signal of one pixel, in each pixel of the display unit, as shown in FIG. A sub gradation signal can be output to each sub pixel. FIG.
In the diagram shown in b), the gradation signal input to the gradation data conversion unit serially in the order of the pixels in the row direction is the first combination data or the second combination data, and the gradation signal for one row. An example of alternately selecting each time (ie, for n pixels) is shown. By alternately selecting the first combination data or the second combination data for each gradation signal of the pixels for one row, each pixel of the display unit can select one of FIG. 18B or FIG. ), The sub gradation signal can be output to each sub pixel. In the diagram shown in FIG.
The grayscale signals that are serially input to the grayscale data converter in the order of the pixels in the row direction are alternately selected from the first combination data or the second combination data in each row, and are different from each other in the odd rows and even rows. An example in which the first combination data or the second combination data is selected is shown. In each pixel of the display unit, the first combination data or the second combination data is alternately selected for each pixel and in the odd-numbered row and the even-numbered row.
) Or as shown in FIG. 19C, the sub gradation signal can be output to each sub pixel.

21 (a), 21 (b), and 21 (c), the selection of combination data from the look-up table corresponding to the grayscale signal in one frame period has been described, but in one subframe period. Even if it exists, it can display by performing selection corresponding to each pixel similarly.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing of this embodiment can be applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (or part of the contents) described in the drawings of another embodiment. Etc. can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.
(Embodiment 5)

In this embodiment mode, a structure different from that of the liquid crystal display device of the present invention described in Embodiment Modes 1 to 4 will be described. In the first to fourth embodiments,
The configuration for improving the viewing angle characteristic by using a lookup table having a plurality of combination data stored in the gradation data storage unit has been described. In this embodiment, a configuration in which a plurality of combination data is obtained by arithmetic processing based on the number of gradations of a gradation signal will be described. For example, when calculating combination data by arithmetic processing, combination data can be output without bias by using random numbers. As a result, the light transmission amount can be averaged in each pixel of the display unit. Therefore, by generating a sub gray scale signal in the gray scale data conversion section and displaying the display section, even in the same gray scale display, liquid crystal molecules are moved in different directions for each pixel constituting the display section. The direction of orientation by tilting can be increased, and the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer can be improved. Further, in this embodiment, in addition to the above-described effects, it is not necessary to store the lookup table in the gradation data storage unit, and the storage capacity of the gradation data storage unit can be reduced. And miniaturization can be achieved.

A specific example in which combination data corresponding to a gradation signal referred to for each pixel constituting the display unit is obtained by arithmetic processing will be described below.

It is assumed that the pixels in the display unit are divided into two sub-pixels, a sub-pixel A and a sub-pixel B. First, for example, when the display unit displays 256 gradations, it is assumed that the number of gradations is (X) as a gradation signal (X is a natural number between 0 and 255). Then, in an arbitrary period, here, in an arbitrary frame period, a gradation signal having the number of gradations (X) is input to the gradation data converter. In the gradation data storage unit, the combination data corresponding to the sub gradation signal A input to the sub pixel A is XA, the combination data corresponding to the sub gradation signal input to the sub pixel B is XB, and the random number to be generated is α ( α is a number from 0 to 1, and XA = X × α, XB = X−XA 2
Calculate multiple combination data from one formula. More specifically, the number of gradations is (120),
When the random number α is 0.75, the combination data corresponding to the two sub-pixels is XA = 12
By calculating 0 × 0.75 = 90 and XB = 120−90 = 30, (90, 30) is obtained as combination data corresponding to the sub gradation signal A and the sub gradation signal B. Note that the sum of the combination data of each sub-pixel is the same as the number of gradations. That is, 90+
30 = 120. Then, combination data (90, 30) corresponding to the gradation signal input to the gradation data conversion unit is input to the gradation data conversion unit. Then, the gradation data conversion unit outputs (90) as the sub gradation signal of the sub pixel A and (30) as the sub gradation signal of the sub pixel B to the driving unit. The driving unit appropriately performs D / A conversion processing, gamma correction, signal polarity inversion, and the like on the plurality of sub grayscale signals, and inputs signals to the display unit. In each sub-pixel of the display unit, light is transmitted with transmission amounts of (90) and (30), and display is performed so that the number of gradations is (120) for one pixel.

Next, in the next frame period, a gradation signal having the number of gradations of (120) is input to the gradation data converter as the gradation signal. Here, as an example, the same gradation is displayed even if the frame period changes. In the gradation data storage unit, a random number is generated in response to the input of the gradation signal to the gradation data storage unit. When the random number is 0.40, the combination data corresponding to the two subpixels is XA = 120 × 0.40 = 48, XB = 120−48 = 72
(48, 72) is obtained as combination data corresponding to the sub gradation signal A and the sub gradation signal B. Note that the sum of the combination data of each sub-pixel is the same as the number of gradations. That is, 48 + 72 = 120. Then, combination data (48, 72) corresponding to the gradation signal input to the gradation data converter is input to the gradation data converter. Then, the gradation data conversion unit outputs (48) as the sub gradation signal of the sub pixel A.
) As a sub gradation signal of the sub-pixel B, and (72) is output to the driving unit. The driving unit appropriately performs D / A conversion processing, gamma correction, signal polarity inversion, and the like on the plurality of sub grayscale signals, and inputs signals to the display unit. In each sub-pixel of the display unit, light is transmitted with transmission amounts of (48) and (72), and display is performed so that the number of gradations is (120) for one pixel.

When obtaining combination data by a calculation process using a random number, a value larger than the number of gradations that can be displayed in each sub-pixel may be calculated. For example, when 256 gradation display is performed and the area of the transmission region of the subpixel A and the subpixel B included in one pixel is the same, the number of gradations displayed by one pixel is (200). If the random number α is 0.75, XA =
200 × 0.75 = 150. However, the sub-pixel A can display only up to 128 gradations. This is because one pixel is composed of the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B having the same transmissive area, so that the area of the transmissive area is halved in the sub-pixel A. Therefore, when combination data is obtained by arithmetic processing using a random number and the maximum number of gradations that can be displayed by the sub-pixel A is exceeded, the maximum number of gradations is set as the number of gradations in the sub-pixel A. This
One pixel can be displayed correctly.

Alternatively, as another method, combination data may be obtained again by arithmetic processing using random numbers. By obtaining combination data by a calculation process using random numbers until the number of gradations is below the maximum number of gradations, one pixel can be displayed correctly.

Alternatively, as another method, when the maximum number of gradations is exceeded, XA = X × α × α is used as another formula for calculating combination data using random numbers. Since α is 1 or less, the value of XA can be reduced. As a result, the value of XA can be reduced below the maximum number of gradations that can be displayed by the sub-pixel A. If it is still larger than the maximum number of gradations that can be displayed by the sub-pixel A,
Multiply by α until it falls below. That is, if XA = X × α ^N (N is an integer equal to or greater than 1), XA can be made equal to or less than the maximum number of gradations that can be displayed by the sub-pixel A.

Similarly, when the number of gradations displayed by one pixel is (200) and the random number α is 0.1, XA = 20
0 × 0.1 = 20 and XB = 200−20 = 180. However, the sub-pixel B can display only up to 128 gradations. This is because, in the sub-pixel B, one pixel is composed of the sub-pixel A and the sub-pixel B having the same transmissive area, so that the area of the transmissive area is halved in the sub-pixel B. Therefore, when combination data is obtained by arithmetic processing using random numbers and the maximum number of gradations that can be displayed by the sub-pixel B is exceeded, the maximum number of gradations is set as the number of gradations in the sub-pixel B. . Then, the sub-pixel A newly calculates the value of XA again using the formula XA = X−XB. As a result, one pixel can be displayed correctly.

Alternatively, as another method, combination data may be obtained again by arithmetic processing using random numbers. By obtaining combination data by a calculation process using random numbers until the number of gradations is below the maximum number of gradations, one pixel can be displayed correctly.

Alternatively, as another method, when the maximum number of gradations is exceeded, XA = X × (1−α) is used as another formula for calculating combination data using random numbers. Since α is 1 or less, XA
The value of can be increased. As a result, the value of XB can be reduced below the maximum number of gradations that can be displayed by the sub-pixel B. Note that if the number of gradations is still larger than the maximum number of gradations that can be displayed by the sub-pixel B, the value multiplied by α may be subtracted from 1 until it falls below. That is, XA = XX
If (1-α ^N ) (N is an integer of 1 or more), XB can be made equal to or less than the maximum number of gradations that can be displayed by the sub-pixel B.

As described above, the calculation of the combination data using the random numbers can be normally operated by performing various arithmetic processes. However, various methods can be used as a method for calculating combination data using random numbers, and the present invention is not limited to this.

As described above, although one pixel displays the same number of gradations as in the previous frame period, the transmission amount in each sub-pixel is different from that in the previous frame. is there. Therefore, the alignment state of the liquid crystal molecules in each sub-pixel can be changed for each frame period. Therefore, when the display unit is viewed from a specific direction, the amount of transmitted light is averaged, so that the viewing angle can be widened.

In a further next frame period, a random number is generated again in response to the input of the gradation signal to the gradation data storage unit, and the combination data is obtained by arithmetic processing. Therefore, it is not necessary to store the lookup table in the gradation data storage unit, and the storage capacity of the gradation data storage unit can be reduced. Therefore, the cost and size of the display device can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing of this embodiment can be applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (or part of the contents) described in the drawings of another embodiment. Etc. can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.
(Embodiment 6)

In this embodiment mode, display methods applicable to the liquid crystal display device of the present invention are described with reference to FIGS.
5 will be described.

There is an MVA system for the alignment of liquid crystal molecules in a display system applicable to the present invention, and FIG.
As shown in FIG. The MVA method is a method in which the alignment of liquid crystal molecules is divided in a plurality of directions and the viewing angle dependence of each portion is compensated for each other. 24A and 24B, a layer 2600 having a liquid crystal element is sandwiched between a first substrate 2601 and a second substrate 2602 which are arranged to face each other. The first substrate 2601 side has a first
A layer 2603 including a second polarizer is stacked, and a layer 2604 including a second polarizer is disposed on the second substrate 2602 side. Note that the layer 2603 including the first polarizer and the layer 2604 including the second polarizer are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols.

Although not shown, the backlight or the like is disposed outside the layer including the second polarizer. A first electrode 2605 and a second electrode 2602 are formed over the first substrate 2601 and the second substrate 2602, respectively.
Electrode 2606 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 24A, in the MVA method, the first electrode 2605 and the second electrode 26 are used.
A protrusion 2607 having a triangular cross section and a protrusion 2608 are provided on the 06 for controlling the orientation. When voltage is applied to the first electrode 2605 and the second electrode 2606, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 2, the white display is performed. At this time, the liquid crystal molecules are protrusions 2607,
And it will be in the state where it fell and lined up with respect to the protrusion 2608. Then, the light from the backlight is a layer including a pair of polarizers (layer 2 including the first polarizer) arranged so as to be crossed Nicols.
603 and the layer 2604 including the second polarizer), and a predetermined image display is performed. At this time, a full color display can be performed by providing a color filter. The color filter can be provided on either the first substrate 2601 side or the second substrate 2602 side. In addition, as shown in FIG. 24B, when no voltage is applied between the first electrode 2605 and the second electrode 2606, black display, that is, an off state is set. At this time, the liquid crystal molecules are aligned vertically. As a result, the light from the backlight cannot pass through the substrate, resulting in a black display.

As an example of the MVA mode, a top view and a cross-sectional view are shown in FIG. In FIG. 60A, the second electrode is formed in a bent pattern like a dog-leg shape, and the second electrode 26
06a, 2606b, and 2606c. Second electrodes 2606a, 2606b, 2
An insulating layer 2651 which is an alignment film is formed over 606c. As shown in FIG. 60B, a projection 2607 is formed over the first electrode 2605 with the second electrodes 2606a, 2606b, and 260.
It is formed in a shape corresponding to 6c and covered with an insulating layer 2650 which is an alignment film.
The openings of the second electrodes 2606a, 2606b, and 2606c function like protrusions and can move liquid crystal molecules. Note that the first electrode 2605 may be formed over the protrusion 2607.

Further, there is a PVA method for the alignment of the liquid crystal molecules of the display method applicable to the present invention.
), As shown in FIG. Similar to the MVA method, the PVA method is a method in which the alignment of liquid crystal molecules is divided in a plurality of directions and the viewing angle dependency of each part is mutually compensated. FIG.
25B, a layer 2600 having a liquid crystal element is sandwiched between a first substrate 2601 and a second substrate 2602 which are arranged to face each other. A layer 2603 including a first polarizer is stacked on the first substrate 2601 side, and a layer 2604 including a second polarizer is disposed on the second substrate 2602 side. The layer 26 containing the first polarizer
03 and the layer 2604 including the second polarizer are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols.

Although not shown, the backlight or the like is disposed outside the layer including the second polarizer. A first electrode 2605 and a second electrode 2602 are formed over the first substrate 2601 and the second substrate 2602, respectively.
Electrode 2606 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 25A, in the PVA method, the first electrode 2605 and the second electrode 26 are used.
06 is provided with slits (also referred to as slits or electrode notches) provided in different patterns for orientation control. When a voltage is applied to the first electrode 2605 and the second electrode 2606, an on state in which white display is performed is performed as shown in FIG. At this time, the liquid crystal molecules are tilted and aligned with respect to the slits of the first electrode 2605 and the second electrode 2606. Then, the light from the backlight is a layer including a pair of polarizers (a layer 2603 including a first polarizer and a layer 26 including a second polarizer) arranged so as to be crossed Nicols.
04), and a predetermined video display is performed. At this time, a full color display can be performed by providing a color filter. The color filter can be provided on either the first substrate 2601 side or the second substrate 2602 side. In addition, FIG.
As shown in (b), when a voltage is not applied between the first electrode 2605 and the second electrode 2606, black display, that is, an off state is set. At this time, the liquid crystal molecules are aligned vertically. As a result, the light from the backlight cannot pass through the substrate, resulting in a black display.

Note that the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer can be improved by using the MVA method and the PVA method for the liquid crystal display device of the present invention and forming one pixel with a plurality of sub-pixels. Note that the present invention only needs to be a display method capable of performing display with liquid crystal molecules inclined or radially inclined in sub-pixels constituting one pixel. For example, a ferroelectric liquid crystal may be used. However, an antiferroelectric liquid crystal may be used. In addition, the liquid crystal driving method is not limited to the MVA method and the PVA method, but a TN (Twisted Nematic) mode, IPS (In
-Plane-Switching) mode, FFS (Fringe Field Sw)
itching) mode, ASM (Axially Symmetric Align)
d Micro-cell) mode, OCB (Optical Compensated)
Birefringence mode, FLC (Ferroelectric Liq)
uid Crystal) mode, AFLC (Antiferroelectric L)
liquid crystal) or the like. Moreover, it is not limited to a liquid crystal element, A light emitting element (Including organic EL or inorganic EL) may be sufficient.

As an example, FIGS. 59A and 59B are schematic views of a TN mode liquid crystal display device.

A layer 2600 having a display element is sandwiched between a first substrate 2601 and a second substrate 2602 which are arranged to face each other. A layer 2603 including a first polarizer is stacked on the first substrate 2601 side, and a layer 2 including a second polarizer is stacked on the second substrate 2602 side.
604 is arranged. Note that the layer 2603 including the first polarizer and the layer 2604 including the second polarizer are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols.

Although not shown, the backlight or the like is disposed outside the layer including the second polarizer. A first electrode 2605 and a second electrode 2602 are formed over the first substrate 2601 and the second substrate 2602, respectively.
Electrode 2606 is provided. The first electrode 2605 which is the electrode on the side opposite to the backlight, that is, the viewing side is formed so as to have at least translucency.

In the liquid crystal display device having such a structure, in the normally white mode, when voltage is applied to the first electrode 2605 and the second electrode 2606 (referred to as a vertical electric field mode), FIG.
As shown in 9 (A), black display is performed. At this time, the liquid crystal molecules are aligned vertically.
As a result, the light from the backlight cannot pass through the substrate, resulting in a black display.

As shown in FIG. 59B, when no voltage is applied between the first electrode 2605 and the second electrode 2606, white display is performed. At this time, the liquid crystal molecules are aligned horizontally and are rotated in a plane. As a result, light from the backlight passes through a layer including a pair of polarizers (a layer 2603 including a first polarizer and a layer 2604 including a second polarizer) arranged to be crossed Nicols. And a predetermined video display is performed.

At this time, a full color display can be performed by providing a color filter in the reflection region. The color filter can be provided on either the first substrate 2601 side or the second substrate 2602 side.

As an example, a known liquid crystal material may be used for the TN mode.

FIG. 59C is a schematic diagram of a VA mode liquid crystal display device. The VA mode is a mode in which liquid crystal molecules are aligned so as to be perpendicular to the substrate when there is no electric field.

Similarly to FIGS. 59A and 59B, a first electrode 2605 and a second electrode 2606 are provided over the first substrate 2601 and the second substrate 2602, respectively. The first electrode 2605 which is the electrode on the side opposite to the backlight, that is, the viewing side is formed so as to have at least translucency. A layer 2603 including a first polarizer is stacked on the first substrate 2601 side, and a layer 2604 including a second polarizer is disposed on the second substrate 2602 side. Note that the layer 2603 including the first polarizer and the layer 2604 including the second polarizer are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols.

In the liquid crystal display device having such a structure, the first electrode 2605 and the second electrode 2 are used.
When a voltage is applied to 606 (vertical electric field method), white display is performed as shown in FIG. 59C. At this time, the liquid crystal molecules are arranged side by side. Then, the light from the backlight passes through a layer including a pair of polarizers (a layer 2603 including a first polarizer and a layer 2604 including a second polarizer) arranged to be crossed Nicols. And a predetermined video display is performed. At this time, a full color display can be performed by providing a color filter. The color filter is formed on the first substrate 2601 side or the second substrate 2602.
Can be provided on either side.

As shown in FIG. 59D, when voltage is not applied between the first electrode 2605 and the second electrode 2606, black display is performed, that is, an off state is obtained. At this time, the liquid crystal molecules are aligned vertically. As a result, the light from the backlight cannot pass through the substrate, resulting in a black display.

Thus, in the off state, the liquid crystal molecules stand up perpendicular to the substrate and display black,
In the on state, the liquid crystal molecules are tilted horizontally with respect to the substrate, and a white display is obtained. Since the liquid crystal molecules are standing up in the off state, the light from the polarized backlight passes through the cell without being affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules, and is completely in the layer containing the polarizer on the counter substrate side. Can be blocked.

As an example, FIGS. 61A and 61B are schematic diagrams of an OCB mode liquid crystal display device. In the OCB mode, the alignment of liquid crystal molecules forms an optically compensated state in the liquid crystal layer.
This is called bend alignment.

Similarly to FIG. 59, a first electrode 2605 and a second electrode 2606 are provided over the first substrate 2601 and the second substrate 2602, respectively. Although not illustrated, the backlight or the like is disposed outside the layer 2604 including the second polarizer. The first electrode 2605 which is the electrode on the side opposite to the backlight, that is, the viewing side is formed so as to have at least translucency. A layer 2603 including a first polarizer is stacked on the first substrate 2601 side, and a layer 2604 including a second polarizer is disposed on the second substrate 2602 side. In addition,
The layer 2603 including the first polarizer and the layer 2604 including the second polarizer are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols.

In the liquid crystal display device having such a structure, the first electrode 2605 and the second electrode 2 are used.
When a constant ON voltage is applied to 606 (vertical electric field method), black display is performed as shown in FIG. At this time, the liquid crystal molecules are aligned vertically. Then, the light from the backlight cannot pass through the substrate, and a black display is obtained.

As shown in FIG. 61B, when a constant off voltage is applied between the first electrode 2605 and the second electrode 2606, white display is performed. At this time, the liquid crystal molecules are in a bend alignment state. As a result, the light from the backlight is a layer including a pair of polarizers (layer 2603 including the first polarizer and layer 2 including the second polarizer) arranged so as to be crossed Nicols.
604), and a predetermined video display is performed. At this time, a full color display can be performed by providing a color filter. The color filter can be provided on either the first substrate 2601 side or the second substrate 2602 side.

In such an OCB mode, the alignment of liquid crystal molecules can be optically compensated in the liquid crystal layer, so that the viewing angle dependency is small, and the contrast ratio can be increased by a layer including a pair of stacked polarizers.

FIGS. 61C and 61D are schematic views of liquid crystals in the FLC mode and the AFLC mode.

Similarly to FIG. 59, a first electrode 2605 and a second electrode 2606 are provided over the first substrate 2601 and the second substrate 2602, respectively. And the opposite side of the backlight,
That is, the first electrode 2605 which is a viewing-side electrode is formed so as to have at least translucency. A layer 2603 including a first polarizer is stacked on the first substrate 2601 side, and a layer 2604 including a second polarizer is disposed on the second substrate 2602 side. The first
The layer 2603 containing the second polarizer and the layer 2604 containing the second polarizer are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols.

In the liquid crystal display device having such a structure, the first electrode 2605 and the second electrode 26 are used.
When a voltage is applied to 06 (referred to as a vertical electric field method), white display is obtained as shown in FIG. At this time, the liquid crystal molecules are arranged side by side in a direction shifted from the rubbing direction. As a result, light from the backlight passes through a layer including a pair of polarizers (a layer 2603 including a first polarizer and a layer 2604 including a second polarizer) arranged to be crossed Nicols. And a predetermined video display is performed.

As shown in FIG. 61D, when no voltage is applied between the first electrode 2605 and the second electrode 2606, black display is performed. At this time, the liquid crystal molecules are arranged side by side along the rubbing direction. As a result, the light from the backlight cannot pass through the substrate, resulting in a black display.

At this time, a full color display can be performed by providing a color filter. The color filter can be provided on either the first substrate 2601 side or the second substrate 2602 side.

As the liquid crystal material used in the FLC mode and the AFLC mode, a known material may be used.

As an example, FIGS. 62A and 62B are schematic views of an IPS mode liquid crystal display device. The IPS mode is a mode in which liquid crystal molecules are always rotated in a plane with respect to a substrate, and an electrode adopts a horizontal electric field method provided only on one substrate side.

The IPS mode is characterized in that the liquid crystal is controlled by a pair of electrodes provided on one substrate. Therefore, a pair of electrodes 2801 and 2802 is provided over the second substrate 2602. The pair of electrodes 2801 and 2802 may each have a light-transmitting property. A layer 2603 including a first polarizer is stacked on the first substrate 2601 side, and a layer 2604 including a second polarizer is disposed on the second substrate 2602 side. The layer 26 containing the first polarizer
03 and the layer 2604 including the second polarizer are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols.

In a liquid crystal display device having such a structure, when voltage is applied to the pair of electrodes 2801 and 2802, liquid crystal molecules are aligned along electric lines of force shifted from the rubbing direction as shown in FIG. An on-state in which white display is performed. Then, the light from the backlight is a layer including a pair of polarizers (layer 260 including the first polarizer) arranged so as to be crossed Nicols.
3 and the second polarizer-containing layer 2604), and a predetermined video display is performed.

At this time, a full color display can be performed by providing a color filter. The color filter can be provided on either the first substrate 2601 side or the second substrate 2602 side.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62B, when a voltage is not applied between the pair of electrodes 2801 and 2802, black display, that is, an off state is obtained. At this time, the liquid crystal molecules are arranged side by side along the rubbing direction. As a result, the light from the backlight cannot pass through the substrate, resulting in a black display.

An example of a pair of electrodes 2801 and 2802 that can be used in the IPS mode is shown in FIG. As shown in the top views of FIGS. 63A to 63D, a pair of electrodes 2801 and 2802 are formed so as to alternate with each other. In FIG. 63A, the electrodes 2801a and 2802a have undulations. In FIG. 63B, an electrode 2801b and an electrode 2802b are formed.
Is a shape having concentric openings, and in FIG. 63C, the electrode 2801c and the electrode 2
Reference numeral 802c denotes a comb-like shape which is partially overlapped. In FIG. 63D, an electrode 2801d is formed.
, And the electrode 2802d have a comb-like shape so that the electrodes mesh with each other.

As an example, an FFS mode can be used in addition to the IPS mode. In the IPS mode, the pair of electrodes are formed on the same surface in the IPS mode, whereas the pair of electrodes are not formed in the same layer, and the electrodes 2803 are formed as shown in FIGS. 62 (C) and 62 (D). In this structure, an electrode 2804 is formed over an insulating film.

In the liquid crystal display device having such a structure, when voltage is applied to the pair of electrodes 2803 and 2804, white display is performed as illustrated in FIG. Then
The light from the backlight is a layer containing a pair of polarizers arranged to be crossed Nicols (
The layer 2603 including the first polarizer and the layer 2604 including the second polarizer can pass through, and a predetermined image display is performed.

At this time, a full color display can be performed by providing a color filter. The color filter can be provided on either the first substrate 2601 side or the second substrate 2602 side.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62D, when a voltage is not applied between the pair of electrodes 2803 and 2804, black display, that is, an off state is obtained. At this time, the liquid crystal molecules are arranged side by side and rotated in a plane. As a result, the light from the backlight cannot pass through the substrate, resulting in a black display.

An example of a pair of electrodes 2803 and 2804 that can be used in the FFS mode is shown in FIG. As shown in the top views in FIGS. 64A to 64D, electrodes 2804 formed in various patterns are formed over the electrode 2803. In FIG. 64A, the electrode 28 on the electrode 2803a is formed.
04a is a bent-shaped shape, and the electrode 2804 on the electrode 2803b is shown in FIG.
b is a concentric shape. In FIG. 64C, the electrode 2804c on the electrode 2803c has a comb-like shape and the electrodes mesh with each other. In FIG. 64D, the electrode 2 on the electrode 2803d.
Reference numeral 804d denotes a comb-like shape.

As the liquid crystal material used for the IPS mode and the FFS mode, a known material may be used.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing of this embodiment can be applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (or part of the contents) described in the drawings of another embodiment. Etc. can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.
(Embodiment 7)

In the present embodiment, regarding the configuration of the liquid crystal panel of the display unit in the liquid crystal display device of the present invention,
This will be described with reference to FIG. Specifically, TFT substrate, counter substrate, counter substrate and TFT
A structure of a liquid crystal panel having a liquid crystal layer sandwiched between the substrate and the substrate will be described. FIG. 26A is a top view of the liquid crystal panel. FIG. 26B is a cross-sectional view taken along line CD in FIG. Note that FIG. 26B illustrates a case where a top-gate transistor in the case where a crystalline semiconductor film (polysilicon film) is used as a semiconductor film is formed over a substrate 50100, and a cross section in which the display method is an MVA method. FIG.

In the liquid crystal panel illustrated in FIG. 26A, a pixel portion 50101, a scan line driver circuit 50105a, a scan line driver circuit 50105b, and a signal line driver circuit 50106 are formed over a substrate 50100. Pixel portion 50101, scan line driver circuit 50105a, scan line driver circuit 5010
5b and the signal line driver circuit 50106 are formed of a substrate 50100 by a sealant 50516.
And the substrate 50515. In addition, FPC5020 by TAB method.
0 and an IC chip 50530 are arranged on the substrate 50100.

Note that the scan line driver circuit 50105a (gate driver), the scan line driver circuit 50105b,
As the signal line driver circuit 50106 (source driver), a circuit similar to that described in Embodiment 1 can be used.

A cross-sectional structure taken along line CD in FIG. 26A is described with reference to FIG.
A pixel portion 50101 and its peripheral driver circuit portion (scanning line driver circuit 501) are formed over a substrate 50100.
05a, a scanning line driver circuit 50105b, and a signal line driver circuit 50106) are formed; here, a driving circuit region 50525 (scanning line driver circuit 50105b) and a pixel region 50526 (pixel portion 50101) are shown. Has been.

First, an insulating film 50501 is formed over the substrate 50100 as a base film. As the insulating film 50501, a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon oxynitride film (Si
A single layer of an insulating film such as OxNy) or a stack of at least two of these films is used. Note that a silicon oxide film is preferably used in a portion in contact with the semiconductor. As a result, electron trapping in the base film and hysteresis of transistor characteristics can be suppressed. Further, it is desirable to dispose at least one film containing a large amount of nitrogen as the base film. Thereby, impurities from the glass can be reduced.

Next, a semiconductor film 50502 is formed over the insulating film 50501 by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like.

Next, an insulating film 50503 is formed over the semiconductor film 50502 as a gate insulating film. Note that as the insulating film 50503, a single layer or a stacked structure such as a thermal oxide film, a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon oxynitride film can be used. Semiconductor film 505
The insulating film 50503 in contact with 02 is preferably a silicon oxide film. This is because a trap level at the interface with the semiconductor film 50502 is reduced when a silicon oxide film is used. When the gate electrode is made of Mo, the gate insulating film in contact with the gate electrode is preferably a silicon nitride film. This is because the silicon nitride film does not oxidize Mo. Here, the insulating film 505
03, a silicon oxynitride film having a thickness of 115 nm (composition ratio Si) by plasma CVD.
= 32%, O = 59%, N = 7%, H = 2%).

Next, a conductive film 50504 is formed as a gate electrode over the insulating film 50503 by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like. The conductive film 5
As 0504, Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, Al, Nd, Cu, Ag, Au, Pt
Nb, Si, Zn, Fe, Ba, Ge, etc., and alloys of these elements. Or
You may comprise by lamination | stacking of these elements or the alloy of these elements. Here, the gate electrode is formed of Mo. Mo is suitable because it is easy to etch and is resistant to heat. Note that the semiconductor film 50502 is formed using the conductive film 50504 or the resist as a mask.
02 is doped with an impurity element, and a channel formation region and impurity regions to be a source region and a drain region are formed. The impurity region may be formed as a high concentration region and a low concentration region by controlling the impurity concentration. Note that the conductive film 50504 of the transistor 50521 has a dual-gate structure. When the transistor 50521 has a dual-gate structure, the off-state current of the transistor 50521 can be reduced. Note that the dual gate structure is a structure having two gate electrodes. Note that a plurality of gate electrodes may be provided over the channel region of the transistor. The conductive film 50504 of the transistor 50521 may have a single gate structure. Also,
In the same process as the transistor 50521, the transistor 50519 and the transistor 505
20 can be made.

Next, an insulating film 50505 is formed as an interlayer film over the insulating film 50503 and the conductive film 50504 formed over the insulating film 50503. Note that the insulating film 50505 can be formed using an organic material, an inorganic material, or a stacked structure thereof. For example, silicon oxide, silicon nitride, silicon oxynitride, silicon nitride oxide, aluminum nitride, aluminum oxynitride, aluminum nitride oxide or aluminum oxide whose nitrogen content is higher than oxygen content, diamond like carbon (DLC), polysilazane, nitrogen content Carbon (CN), PS
It can be formed of a material selected from substances including G (phosphorus glass), BPSG (phosphorus boron glass), alumina, and other inorganic insulating materials. An organic insulating material may be used, and the organic material may be either photosensitive or non-photosensitive, and polyimide, acrylic, polyamide, polyimide amide, resist, benzocyclobutene, siloxane resin, or the like can be used. . Note that a siloxane resin corresponds to a resin including a Si—O—Si bond. Siloxane has a skeleton structure formed of a bond of silicon (Si) and oxygen (O).
As a substituent, an organic group containing at least hydrogen (for example, an alkyl group or an aromatic hydrocarbon) is used. A fluoro group may be used as a substituent. Alternatively, an organic group containing at least hydrogen and a fluoro group may be used as a substituent. Note that a contact hole is selectively formed in the insulating film 50503 and the insulating film 50505. For example, the contact hole is formed on the upper surface of the impurity region of each transistor.

Next, a conductive film 50506 is formed over the insulating film 50505 by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like as a drain electrode, a source electrode, and a wiring. Note that the conductive film 50506 includes Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W as materials.
Al, Nd, Cu, Ag, Au, Pt, Nb, Si, Zn, Fe, Ba, Ge, etc.
There are alloys of these elements. Alternatively, a stacked structure of these elements or an alloy of these elements can be used. Note that the conductive film 50506 and the impurity region of the semiconductor film 50502 of the transistor are connected to each other in a portion where the insulating film 50503 and the contact hole of the insulating film 50505 are formed.

Next, over the insulating film 50505 and the conductive film 50506 formed over the insulating film 50505,
An insulating film 50507 is formed as the planarizing film. Note that the insulating film 50507 is preferably formed using an organic material because the insulating film 50507 preferably has good flatness and coverage.
Note that an organic material may be formed over an inorganic material (silicon oxide, silicon nitride, silicon oxynitride) to have a multilayer structure. Note that a contact hole is selectively formed in the insulating film 50507. For example, the contact hole is formed in the upper surface of the drain electrode of the transistor 50521.

Next, a conductive film 50508 is formed as a pixel electrode over the insulating film 50507 by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like. Conductive film 50508
In this case, an opening is formed. Since the opening formed in the conductive film can incline the liquid crystal molecules, it can play the same role as the protrusion in the MVA method described in FIG. 25 of Embodiment 6. Note that the conductive film 50508 includes a transparent electrode that transmits light, for example, an indium tin oxide (ITO) film in which tin oxide is mixed with indium oxide, and indium tin silicon in which silicon oxide is mixed in indium tin oxide (ITO). An oxide (ITSO) film, an indium zinc oxide (IZO) film in which zinc oxide is mixed with indium oxide, a zinc oxide film, a tin oxide film, or the like can be used. Note that IZO is a transparent conductive material formed by sputtering using a target in which 2 to 20 wt% of zinc oxide (ZnO) is mixed with ITO, but is not limited thereto. In the case of a reflective electrode, for example, Ti, Mo, Ta
, Cr, W, Al, Nd, Cu, Ag, Au, Pt, Nb, Si, Zn, Fe, Ba, G
e or an alloy thereof can be used. Alternatively, a two-layer structure in which Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W and Al are stacked, or a three-layer structure in which Al is sandwiched between metals such as Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, and W may be used.

Next, an insulating film 50509 is formed as an alignment film over the insulating film 50507 and the conductive film 50508 formed over the insulating film 50507.

Next, a sealant 50516 is formed on the periphery of the pixel portion 50101 or the periphery of the pixel portion 50101 and the periphery of the peripheral driver circuit portion by an inkjet method or the like.

Next, the substrate 50515 over which the conductive film 50512, the insulating film 50511, the protrusion portion 50551, and the like are formed, and the substrate 50100 are attached to each other with the spacer 50531 interposed therebetween.
A liquid crystal layer 50510 is disposed in the gap. Note that the substrate 50105 functions as a counter substrate. Alternatively, the spacer 50531 may be provided by scattering particles of several μm, or may be formed by forming a resin film on the entire surface of the substrate and then etching the resin film. In addition, the conductive film 50512 functions as a counter electrode. The conductive film 50512 can be similar to the conductive film 50508. The insulating film 50511 functions as an alignment film.

Next, the conductive film 505 electrically connected to the pixel portion 50101 and its peripheral driver circuit portion.
An FPC 50200 is disposed on the layer 18 with an anisotropic conductive layer 50517 interposed therebetween. Further, an IC chip 50530 is provided on the FPC 50200 with an anisotropic conductive layer 50517 interposed therebetween.
Is arranged. That is, the FPC 50200, the anisotropic conductor layer 50517, and the IC chip 50530 are electrically connected.

Note that the anisotropic conductor layer 50517 has a function of transmitting a signal and a potential input from the FPC 50200 to a pixel or a peripheral circuit. As the anisotropic conductor layer 50517, the same material as the conductive film 50506, the same material as the conductive film 50504, or the impurity region of the semiconductor film 50502 may be used. Alternatively, a combination of at least two layers may be used.

Note that the IC chip 50530 can effectively use the substrate area by forming a functional circuit (memory or buffer).

Note that FIG. 26B illustrates a cross-sectional view in which the display method is the MVA method, but the display method may be a PVA method. In the case of the PVA method, liquid crystal molecules may be inclined and aligned by providing the conductive film 50512 over the substrate 50515 with a slit as described in FIG. 26 of Embodiment 6 (see FIG. 35). . FIG. 35 illustrates a structure in which the conductive film 50512 is provided with a slit; however, a protrusion 50551 (also referred to as an alignment control protrusion) may be provided over the conductive film provided with the slit so that liquid crystal molecules are tilted. Good (see FIG. 36).

26A and 26B includes a scanning line driving circuit 50105a and a scanning line driving circuit 5.
Although the structure in the case where the 0105b and the signal line driver circuit 50106 are formed over the substrate 50100 has been described, the signal line driver circuit 50106 is shown in the liquid crystal panel in FIG.
A driver circuit corresponding to the above may be formed in the driver IC 50601 and mounted on the liquid crystal panel by a COG method or the like. By forming the signal line driver circuit 50106 in the driver IC 50601, power saving can be achieved. In addition, when the driver IC 50601 is a semiconductor chip such as a silicon wafer, the liquid crystal panel in FIG. 27A can achieve higher speed and lower power consumption.

Similarly, as illustrated in the liquid crystal panel in FIG. 27B, driver circuits corresponding to the scan line driver circuit 50105a, the scan line driver circuit 50105b, and the signal line driver circuit 50106 are driver IC 50602a, driver IC 50602b, and driver, respectively. A structure may be employed in which the IC 50601 is formed and mounted on a liquid crystal panel by a COG method or the like. In addition, driver circuits corresponding to the scan line driver circuit 50105a, the scan line driver circuit 50105b, and the signal line driver circuit 50106 are formed in the driver IC 50602a, the driver IC 50602b, and the driver IC 50601, respectively, so that cost can be reduced.

In FIG. 26, a cross-sectional view in the case where a top-gate transistor is formed over the substrate 50100 has been described. Next, a cross-sectional view in the case where a bottom-gate transistor is formed over the substrate 50100 and the display method is the MVA method will be described with reference to FIGS. However, FIG. 28 shows only the pixel region 50526.

First, an insulating film 50501 is formed over the substrate 50100 as a base film.

Next, a conductive film 50504 is formed as a gate electrode over the insulating film 50501 by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like. Note that the conductive film 50504 of the transistor 50521 has a dual-gate structure. This is because, as described above, the transistor 50521 has a dual gate structure, whereby the off-state current of the transistor 50521 can be reduced. However, on the channel region of the transistor,
A plurality of gate electrodes may be provided. Further, the conductive film 5050 of the transistor 50521
4 may have a single gate structure.

Next, an insulating film 50503 is formed as a gate insulating film over the insulating film 50501 and the conductive film 50504 formed over the insulating film 50501.

Next, a semiconductor film 50502 is formed over the insulating film 50503 by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like. Note that the semiconductor film 50502 includes
The semiconductor film 50502 is doped with an impurity element using a resist as a mask, so that a channel formation region and impurity regions to be a source region and a drain region are formed. The impurity region may be formed as a high concentration region and a low concentration region by controlling the impurity concentration.

Next, an insulating film 50505 is formed as an interlayer film over the insulating film 50503 and the semiconductor film 50502 formed over the insulating film 50503. Note that the insulating film 50505 includes
Contact holes are selectively formed. For example, the contact hole is formed on the upper surface of the impurity region of each transistor.

Next, a conductive film 50506 is formed over the insulating film 50505 by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like as a drain electrode, a source electrode, and a wiring. Note that the conductive film 50506 is connected to the impurity region of the semiconductor film 50502 of the transistor in a portion where the contact hole of the insulating film 50505 is formed.

Next, an insulating film 50507 is formed as a planarization film over the insulating film 50505 and the conductive film 50506 formed over the insulating film 50505. Note that the insulating film 50507 includes
Contact holes are selectively formed. For example, the contact hole is formed in the upper surface of the drain electrode of the transistor 50521.

Next, a conductive film 50508 is formed as a pixel electrode over the insulating film 50507 by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like. Conductive film 50508
In this case, an opening is formed. Since the opening formed in the conductive film can incline the liquid crystal molecules, it can play the same role as the protrusion in the MVA method described in FIG. 25 of Embodiment 6.

Next, an insulating film 50509 is formed as an alignment film over the insulating film 50507 and the conductive film 50508 formed over the insulating film 50507.

Next, a liquid crystal layer 50510 is provided in a gap between the substrate 50515 on which the conductive film 50512, the insulating film 50511, the protrusion portion 50551, and the like are formed, and the substrate 50100. The insulating film 50511 functions as an alignment film.

In FIG. 28, a cross-sectional view of the MVA method is shown, but a PVA display method may be used. A configuration of a cross-sectional view in the PVA method is shown in FIG. A difference from FIG. 28 is that a slit is provided in the conductive film 50512 instead of the protrusion 50551. Since the unevenness is formed on the surface of the insulating film 50511 by the slit of the conductive film 50512, MVA
Similarly to the method, the liquid crystal element can be tilted.

26 and 28, the cross-sectional views in the case where the insulating film 50507 is formed as a flat film over the insulating film 50505 and the conductive film 50506 formed over the insulating film 50505 are described. However, the insulating film 50507 is not necessarily required as shown in FIG.

Note that although the cross-sectional view in FIG. 29 illustrates the case of a top-gate transistor, the same applies to a bottom-gate transistor and a double-gate transistor.

Although FIG. 29 shows a cross-sectional view in which the display method is the MVA method, the display method may be a PVA method. A configuration of a cross-sectional view of the PVA method is shown in FIG. A difference from FIG. 29 is that a slit is provided in the conductive film 50512 instead of the protrusion 50551. Since the unevenness is formed on the surface of the insulating film 50511 by the slit of the conductive film 50512, MVA
Similarly to the method, the liquid crystal element can be tilted.

26, 28, and 29, a cross-sectional view in the case where a transistor using a crystalline semiconductor film (polysilicon film) as a semiconductor film is formed over the substrate 50100 has been described. Next, a cross-sectional view in the case where a transistor using an amorphous semiconductor film (amorphous silicon film) as a semiconductor film is formed over the substrate 50100 will be described with reference to FIGS.

Note that the cross-sectional view in FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view of an inverted staggered channel-etched transistor.

First, an insulating film 50501 is formed over the substrate 50100 as a base film.

Next, a conductive film 50504 is formed as a gate electrode over the insulating film 50501 by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like.

Next, over the insulating film 50501 and the conductive film 50504 formed over the insulating film 50501,
An insulating film 50503 is formed as a gate insulating film.

Next, a semiconductor film 50502 is formed over the insulating film 50503 by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like. Note that the semiconductor film 50502 includes
The semiconductor film 50502 is doped with an impurity element, and an impurity region is formed over the entire surface of the semiconductor film 50502.

Next, the conductive film 50503 is formed over the insulating film 50503 and the semiconductor film 50502 formed over the insulating film 50503 by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like.
506 is formed. Note that the semiconductor film 50502 is etched using the conductive film 50506 as a mask, so that a channel formation region and impurity regions to be a source region and a drain region are formed.

Next, the insulating film 50507 is formed as a planarization film over the insulating film 50503, over the semiconductor film 50502 formed over the insulating film 50503, and over the conductive film 50506 formed over the insulating film 50503 and the semiconductor film 50502. Is formed. Note that a contact hole is selectively formed in the insulating film 50507. For example, the contact hole is formed by transistor 5
0521 is formed on the upper surface of the drain electrode.

Next, a conductive film 50508 is formed as a pixel electrode over the insulating film 50507 by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like. Conductive film 50508
In this case, an opening is formed. Since the opening formed in the conductive film can incline the liquid crystal molecules, it can play the same role as the protrusion in the MVA method described in FIG. 25 of Embodiment 6.

Next, an insulating film 50509 is formed as an alignment film over the insulating film 50507 and the conductive film 50508 formed over the insulating film 50507.

Next, the substrate 5 over which the conductive film 50512, the insulating film 50511, the protrusions 50551, and the like are formed.
A liquid crystal layer 50510 is provided in a gap between 0515 and the substrate 50100. The insulating film 50511 functions as an alignment film.

Note that although a channel-etched transistor has been described, a channel-protective transistor may be used.

Although FIG. 30 shows a cross-sectional view in which the display method is the MVA method, the display method may be a PVA method. A configuration of a cross-sectional view of the PVA method is shown in FIG. A difference from FIG. 30 is that a slit is provided in the conductive film 50512 instead of the protrusion 50551. Since the unevenness is formed on the surface of the insulating film 50511 by the slit of the conductive film 50512, MVA
Similarly to the method, the liquid crystal element can be tilted.

In FIG. 30, a cross-sectional view in the case where an inverted staggered transistor is formed over the substrate 50100 has been described. Next, a cross-sectional view in the case where a forward staggered transistor is formed over the substrate 50100 will be described with reference to FIGS.

First, an insulating film 50501 is formed over the substrate 50100 as a base film.

Next, a conductive film 50506 is formed over the insulating film 50501 by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like.

Next, a semiconductor film 50502a is formed over the conductive film 50506 by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like. Note that the semiconductor film 50502a can be formed using a material and a structure similar to those of the semiconductor film 50502. In addition, the semiconductor film 50502a is doped with an impurity element, so that impurity regions to be a source region and a drain region are formed.

Next, a semiconductor film 50502b is formed over the insulating film 50501 and the semiconductor film 50502a by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like.
Note that the semiconductor film 50502b can be formed using a material and a structure similar to those of the semiconductor film 50502. Note that the semiconductor film 50502b is not doped with an impurity element and has a channel region.

Next, an insulating film 50503 is formed as a gate insulating film over the insulating film 50501, the semiconductor film 50502b, and the conductive film 50506.

Next, a conductive film 50504 is formed as a gate electrode over the insulating film 50503 by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like.

Next, an insulating film 50507 is formed as a planarization film over the insulating film 50503 and the conductive film 50504 formed over the insulating film 50503. Note that the insulating film 50507 includes
Contact holes are selectively formed. For example, the contact hole is formed in the upper surface of the drain electrode of the transistor 50521.

Next, a conductive film 50508 is formed as a pixel electrode over the insulating film 50507 by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like.

Next, an insulating film 50509 is formed as an alignment film over the insulating film 50507 and the conductive film 50508 formed over the insulating film 50507. An opening is formed in the conductive film 50508. Since the opening formed in the conductive film can incline the liquid crystal molecules, it can play the same role as the protrusion in the MVA method described in FIG. 25 of Embodiment 6.

Next, the substrate 5 over which the conductive film 50512, the insulating film 50511, the protrusions 50551, and the like are formed.
A liquid crystal layer 50510 is provided in a gap between 0515 and the substrate 50100. The insulating film 50511 functions as an alignment film.

Although FIG. 31 shows a cross-sectional view in which the display method is the MVA method, the display method may be a PVA method. A configuration of a cross-sectional view in the PVA method is shown in FIG. A difference from FIG. 31 is that a slit is provided in the conductive film 50512 instead of the protrusion 50551. Since the unevenness is formed on the surface of the insulating film 50511 by the slit of the conductive film 50512, MVA
Similarly to the method, the liquid crystal element can be tilted.

30 and 31, a cross-sectional view in the case where the insulating film 50507 is formed as a flat film over the insulating film 50505 and the conductive film 50506 formed over the insulating film 50505 has been described. However, the insulating film 50507 is not necessarily required as shown in FIG.

Note that the cross-sectional view in FIG. 32 illustrates the case of an inverted staggered channel etch transistor, but the same applies to an inverted staggered channel protection transistor.

Although FIG. 32 shows a cross-sectional view in which the display method is the MVA method, the display method may be a PVA method. A configuration of a cross-sectional view in the PVA method is shown in FIG. A difference from FIG. 32 is that a slit is provided in the conductive film 50512 instead of the protrusion 50551. Since the unevenness is formed on the surface of the insulating film 50511 by the slit of the conductive film 50512, MVA
Similarly to the method, the liquid crystal element can be tilted.

Note that the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer can be improved by using the MVA method and the PVA method for the liquid crystal display device of the present invention and forming one pixel with a plurality of sub-pixels. Note that the present invention only needs to be a display method capable of performing display with liquid crystal molecules inclined or radially inclined in sub-pixels constituting one pixel. For example, a ferroelectric liquid crystal may be used. However, an antiferroelectric liquid crystal may be used. In addition, the liquid crystal driving method is not limited to the MVA method and the PVA method, but a TN (Twisted Nematic) mode, IPS (In
-Plane-Switching) mode, FFS (Fringe Field Sw)
itching) mode, ASM (Axially Symmetric Align)
d Micro-cell) mode, OCB (Optical Compensated)
Birefringence mode, FLC (Ferroelectric Liq)
uid Crystal) mode, AFLC (Antiferroelectric L)
liquid crystal) or the like. Moreover, it is not limited to a liquid crystal element, A light emitting element (Including organic EL or inorganic EL) may be sufficient.

28 to 32 and FIGS. 37 to 41, the cross-sectional views of the reflective or transmissive liquid crystal panel have been described. However, the liquid crystal panel of this embodiment may be a transflective type as described above. A cross-sectional view of a transflective liquid crystal panel will be described with reference to FIG.

Note that the cross-sectional view of FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view of a liquid crystal panel in which a transistor uses a polycrystalline semiconductor as a semiconductor film. However, the transistor may be a bottom gate type or a double gate type. In addition, the gate electrode of the transistor may have a single gate structure,
A dual gate structure may be used.

Note that FIG. 65 is similar to FIG. 28 until the conductive film 50506 is formed. Therefore, a process and a structure after the conductive film 50506 is formed will be described.

First, over the insulating film 50505 and the conductive film 50506 formed over the insulating film 50505,
As a film for reducing the thickness of the liquid crystal layer 50510 (so-called cell gap), an insulating film 51801 is formed by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like. Note that the insulating film 51801 is preferably formed using an organic material because it is preferable that the insulating film 51801 has good flatness and coverage. Note that an organic material may be formed over an inorganic material (silicon oxide, silicon nitride, silicon oxynitride) to have a multilayer structure.
Note that a contact hole is selectively formed in the insulating film 51801. For example, the contact hole is formed in the upper surface of the drain electrode of the transistor 50521.

Next, over the insulating film 50505 and the insulating film 50507, a conductive film 50508a is formed as a first pixel electrode by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like. Note that as the conductive film 50508a, a transparent electrode that transmits light similar to the conductive film 50508 can be used.

Next, a conductive film 50508b is formed as the second pixel electrode over the conductive film 50508a by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like. As the conductive film 50508b, a reflective electrode that reflects light similar to the conductive film 50508 can be used. Note that a region where the conductive film 50508b is formed is referred to as a reflective region. Conductive film 5
Among regions where 0508a is formed, a region where the conductive film 50508b is not formed over the conductive film 50508a is referred to as a transmissive region.

Next, an insulating film 50509 is formed as an alignment film over the insulating film 51801, the conductive films 50508a, and 50508b.

Next, the insulating film 50514, the insulating film 50513, the conductive film 50512, and the insulating film 50511
A liquid crystal layer 50510 is provided in a gap between the substrate 50515 on which the substrate is formed and the substrate 50100. The insulating film 50511 functions as an alignment film. Insulating film 505
13 is formed on the reflective region (on the conductive film 50508b).

In FIG. 65, the conductive film 50508b is formed after the conductive film 50508a is formed; however, the conductive film 50508a may be formed after the conductive film 50508b is formed.

In FIG. 65, the insulating film for adjusting the liquid crystal layer 50510 (cell gap) is the conductive film 505.
08a and under the conductive film 50508b. However, the insulating film 52001 may be formed on the substrate 50515 side as shown in FIG. The insulating film 52001 is an insulating film for adjusting the liquid crystal layer 50510 (cell gap) similarly to the insulating film 51801.

Note that FIG. 66 illustrates the case where the insulating film 50507 is formed as the planarization film; however, the insulating film 50507 is not necessarily formed.

65 and 66 show the case where a polycrystalline semiconductor is used as a semiconductor film in the transistor. Next, FIG. 67 shows a cross-sectional view of a liquid crystal panel in the case where a polycrystalline semiconductor is used as a semiconductor film in a transistor.

Note that the cross-sectional view of FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view of a liquid crystal panel including a transistor using an inverted staggered channel etch structure. Note that the transistor may be a forward stagger type or an inverted stagger type channel protection structure.

Note that FIG. 67 is similar to FIG. 30 until the conductive film 50506 is formed. Therefore, a process and a structure after the conductive film 50506 is formed will be described.

First, the liquid crystal layer 5 is formed over the semiconductor film 50502, the insulating film 50503, and the conductive film 50506.
As a layer for reducing the thickness (so-called cell gap) of 0510, an insulating film 52201 is formed by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like. Note that the insulating film 52201 is preferably formed using an organic material because the insulating film 52201 preferably has good flatness and coverage. Note that an organic material may be formed over an inorganic material (silicon oxide, silicon nitride, silicon oxynitride) to have a multilayer structure. Note that a contact hole is selectively formed in the insulating film 52201. For example, the contact hole is formed in the upper surface of the drain electrode of the transistor 50521.

Next, over the insulating film 50503 and the insulating film 52201, a conductive film 50508a is formed as a first pixel electrode by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like.

Next, a conductive film 50508b is formed as the second pixel electrode over the conductive film 50508a by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like. In addition,
A region where the conductive film 50508b is formed is referred to as a reflective region. In addition, among regions where the conductive film 50508a is formed, a region where the conductive film 50508b is not formed over the conductive film 50508a is referred to as a transmission region.

Next, an insulating film 50509 is formed as an alignment film over the insulating film 52201, the conductive films 50508a, and 50508b.

Next, the insulating film 50514, the insulating film 50513, the conductive film 50512, and the insulating film 50511
A liquid crystal layer 50510 is provided in a gap between the substrate 50515 on which the substrate is formed and the substrate 50100. The insulating film 50511 functions as an alignment film. Insulating film 505
13 is formed on the reflective region (on the conductive film 50508b).

In FIG. 67, the conductive film 50508b is formed after the conductive film 50508a is formed; however, the conductive film 50508a may be formed after the conductive film 50508b is formed.

In FIG. 67, an insulating film for adjusting the liquid crystal layer 50510 (cell gap) is the conductive film 505.
08a and under the conductive film 50508b. However, the insulating film 52001 may be formed on the substrate 50515 side as shown in FIG. The insulating film 52001 is an insulating film for adjusting the liquid crystal layer 50510 (cell gap) similarly to the insulating film 52201.

Note that FIG. 68 illustrates the case where the insulating film 50507 is formed as the planarization film; however, the insulating film 50507 is not necessarily formed.

32 and FIGS. 34 to 42 show examples in which a pair of electrodes (a conductive film 50508 and a conductive film 50512) for applying a voltage to the liquid crystal layer 50510 are formed over different substrates. But,
A conductive film 50512 may be provided over the substrate 50100. Thus, an IPS (In-Plane-Switching) mode may be used as a liquid crystal driving method. Further, depending on the liquid crystal layer 50510, two alignment films (an insulating film 50509 and an insulating film 505) are used.
The step of providing one or both of 11) can be omitted.

Note that in FIGS. 28 to 32, FIGS. 37 to 41, and FIGS. 65 to 68, the conductive film 50508 (conductive film 50508b) is formed as the reflective pixel electrode, but the conductive film 5050 is formed.
The shape of 8 is preferably uneven. This is because the reflective pixel electrode is used for display by reflecting external light. This is because in order to efficiently use the external light that has entered the reflective electrode and increase the display luminance, it can be diffusely reflected by the reflective electrode. The conductive film 5
By making the shape of the film below 0508 (such as the insulating film 50505, the insulating film 50507, the insulating film 51801, or the insulating film 52201) uneven, the shape of the conductive film 50508 becomes uneven.

Although some have already been described, the wiring and electrodes are made of aluminum (Al), tantalum (Ta
), Titanium (Ti), molybdenum (Mo), tungsten (W), neodymium (Nd),
Chromium (Cr), nickel (Ni), platinum (Pt), gold (Au), silver (Ag), copper (Cu
), Magnesium (Mg), scandium (Sc), cobalt (Co), nickel (Ni
), Zinc (Zn), niobium (Nb), silicon (Si), phosphorus (P), boron (B), arsenic (As), gallium (Ga), indium (In), tin (Sn), oxygen (O Or one or more elements selected from the group consisting of, or a compound or alloy material containing one or more elements selected from the group (for example, indium tin oxide (ITO), indium) Zinc oxide (IZO), indium tin oxide added with silicon oxide (ITSO), zinc oxide (
ZnO), aluminum neodymium (Al—Nd), magnesium silver (Mg—Ag), or the like, or a combination of these compounds. Alternatively, a silicon compound (silicide) (for example, aluminum silicon, molybdenum silicon, nickel silicide, or the like) or a nitrogen compound (for example, titanium nitride, tantalum nitride, molybdenum nitride, or the like) is formed. . Silicon (Si) contains n-type impurities (
Phosphorus or the like) or a p-type impurity (boron or the like). By containing these impurities, the conductivity is improved and the same behavior as that of a normal conductor is obtained, so that it can be easily used as a wiring or an electrode. Silicon may be single crystal, polycrystalline (polysilicon), or amorphous (amorphous silicon). The resistance can be reduced by using single crystal silicon or polycrystalline silicon. By using amorphous silicon, it can be manufactured by a simple manufacturing process. Note that since aluminum and silver have high conductivity, signal delay can be reduced and etching is easy, so that patterning is easy and fine processing can be performed. Note that copper has high conductivity, so that signal delay can be reduced. Molybdenum can be manufactured without causing problems such as defective materials even when it comes into contact with oxide semiconductors such as ITO and IZO, and silicon, and is easy to pattern and etch, and has high heat resistance. Therefore, it is desirable. In addition, titanium
Even if it comes into contact with an oxide semiconductor such as ITO or IZO, or silicon, it can be manufactured without causing problems such as material failure, and it is desirable because it has high heat resistance. Tungsten is desirable because of its high heat resistance. Neodymium is desirable because of its high heat resistance. In particular, an alloy of neodymium and aluminum is preferable because the heat resistance is improved and aluminum does not easily cause hillocks. Silicon is preferable because it can be formed at the same time as a semiconductor layer included in the transistor and has high heat resistance. Note that indium tin oxide (ITO), indium zinc oxide (IZO), indium tin oxide added with silicon oxide (ITSO), zinc oxide (ZnO), and silicon (Si) have translucency. Because
This is desirable because it can be used for a portion that transmits light. For example, it can be used as a pixel electrode or a common electrode.

In addition, these may form wiring and an electrode with a single layer, and may have a multilayer structure. By forming with a single layer structure, the manufacturing process can be simplified, the number of process days can be reduced, and the cost can be reduced. In addition, by using a multilayer structure, the merit of each material can be utilized, the demerit can be reduced, and high performance wiring and electrodes can be formed. For example, by including a low-resistance material (such as aluminum) in the multilayer structure, the resistance of the wiring can be reduced. In addition, if a material having high heat resistance is included, for example, a wiring or electrode as a whole can be obtained by forming a laminated structure in which a material having low merit is sandwiched between materials having another merit. As a result, the heat resistance can be increased. For example, it is preferable to form a layered structure in which a layer containing aluminum is sandwiched between layers containing molybdenum or titanium. In addition, if there is a portion that is in direct contact with a wiring or electrode of another material, it may adversely affect each other. For example, one material may be contained in the other material, changing its properties and failing to fulfill its original purpose, or producing a problem and making it impossible to manufacture normally. is there. In such a case, the problem can be solved by sandwiching or covering one layer with another layer.
For example, if you want to contact indium tin oxide (ITO) and aluminum,
It is desirable to sandwich titanium or molybdenum. In addition, when silicon and aluminum are to be brought into contact with each other, it is desirable to sandwich titanium or molybdenum between them.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing of this embodiment can be applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (or part of the contents) described in the drawings of another embodiment. Etc. can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.
(Embodiment 8)

In this embodiment, cross-sectional views and upper surfaces of pixels of MVA mode and PVA mode liquid crystal display devices in which liquid crystal molecules are controlled to have various orientations by using alignment control protrusions and a viewing angle is increased. The figure will be described.

FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional view and a top view of a pixel when a thin film transistor (TFT) is combined in an MVA liquid crystal display device. FIG. 33A is a cross-sectional view of a pixel.
(B) is a top view of the pixel. A cross-sectional view of the pixel shown in FIG.
This corresponds to a line segment aa ′ in the top view of the pixel shown in FIG. By applying the present invention to the liquid crystal display device having the pixel structure shown in FIG. 33, a liquid crystal display device with a large viewing angle, a high response speed, and a large contrast can be obtained.

A pixel structure of an MVA liquid crystal display device is described with reference to FIG. The liquid crystal display device has a basic part that displays an image, called a liquid crystal panel. LCD panel
The two processed substrates are bonded together with a gap of several μm, and a liquid crystal material is injected between the two substrates. In FIG. 33A, the two substrates are a first substrate 6001 and a second substrate 6016. A TFT and a pixel electrode are formed over the first substrate, and a light shielding film 6014, a color filter 6015, a fourth conductive layer 6013, a spacer 6017, a second alignment film 6012, and a second substrate are formed. Orientation control protrusion 6019
May be produced.

Note that the present invention can be implemented without manufacturing a TFT on the first substrate 5901. TFT
In the case where the present invention is carried out without manufacturing the manufacturing cost, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. on the other hand,
When the present invention is implemented by manufacturing a TFT, a larger display device can be obtained.

Note that the TFT illustrated in FIG. 33 is a bottom-gate TFT using an amorphous semiconductor, and has an advantage of being inexpensively manufactured using a large-area substrate. However, the present invention is not limited to this. TFT structures that can be used include a channel etch type, a channel protection type, and the like for bottom-gate TFTs. A top gate type may also be used. Furthermore, not only an amorphous semiconductor but also a polycrystalline semiconductor can be used.

Note that the present invention can be implemented without forming the light-shielding film 6014 on the second substrate 6016. In the case where the present invention is implemented without forming the light-shielding film 6014, the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the light-shielding film 6014 is formed and the present invention is implemented, a display device with little light leakage during black display can be obtained.

Note that the present invention can be implemented without forming the color filter 6015 on the second substrate 6016. In the case where the present invention is implemented without manufacturing the color filter 6015, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the color filter 6015 is manufactured and the present invention is carried out, a display device capable of color display can be obtained.

Note that the present invention can also be implemented by spraying spherical spacers without forming the spacers 6017 on the second substrate 6016. When the present invention is carried out by spraying spherical spacers, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the spacer 6017 is manufactured and the present invention is carried out, the distance between the two substrates can be made uniform because the position of the spacer does not vary, and a display device with little display unevenness can be obtained. Can do.

Next, processing performed on the first substrate 5901 will be described. The first substrate 5901 is preferably a light-transmitting substrate, and may be a quartz substrate, a glass substrate, or a plastic substrate, for example. Note that the first substrate 5901 may be a light-shielding substrate, and may be a semiconductor substrate, SOI (Silic).
on on Insulator) substrate.

First, the first insulating film 6002 may be formed over the first substrate 6001. First insulating film 60
02 may be an insulating film such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon oxynitride film (SiOxNy). Alternatively, an insulating film having a stacked structure in which at least two of these films are combined may be used. In the case where the first insulating film 6002 is formed and the present invention is carried out, since it is possible to prevent impurities from the substrate from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the properties of the TFT, reliability can be improved. A high display device can be obtained. The first insulating film 60
When the present invention is carried out without forming 02, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved.

Next, a first conductive layer 6003 is formed over the first substrate 6001 or the first insulating film 6002. Note that the first conductive layer 6003 may be formed by processing a shape. The step of processing the shape is preferably as follows. First, a first conductive layer is formed on the entire surface. At this time, a film forming apparatus such as a sputtering apparatus or a CVD apparatus may be used. next,
A photosensitive resist material is formed over the entire surface of the first conductive layer formed over the entire surface. Next, the resist material is exposed according to the shape to be formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, or the like. Next, either one of the resist material that has been exposed or the resist material that has not been exposed is removed by etching, whereby a mask for processing the shape of the first conductive layer 6003 can be obtained. After that, by removing the first conductive layer 6003 by etching according to the formed mask pattern, the first conductive layer 6003 can be processed into a desired pattern. Note that there are a chemical method (wet etching) and a physical method (dry etching) as a method for etching the first conductive layer 6003. The material of the first conductive layer 6003, the first conductive layer 6003, The material is selected as appropriate in consideration of the properties of the material under the conductive layer 6003. Note that the material used for the first conductive layer 6003 is Mo.
Ti, Al, Nd, Cr and the like are preferable. Or these laminated structures may be sufficient. Further, these alloys may be formed as a first conductive layer 6003 as a single layer or a stacked structure.

Next, a second insulating film 6004 is formed. At this time, a film forming apparatus such as a sputtering apparatus or a CVD apparatus may be used. Note that a material used for the second insulating film 6004 is preferably a thermal oxide film, a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxynitride film, or the like. Or these laminated structures may be sufficient. Note that the second portion of the portion in contact with the first semiconductor layer 6005 is
The insulating film 6004 is particularly preferably a silicon oxide film. This is because a trap level at the interface with the semiconductor layer 6005 is reduced when a silicon oxide film is used. Note that in the case where the first conductive layer 6003 is formed using Mo, the second insulating film 6004 in contact with the first conductive layer 6003 is preferably a silicon nitride film. The silicon nitride film is M
This is because o is not oxidized.

Next, a first semiconductor layer 6005 is formed. After that, it is preferable to continuously form the second semiconductor layer 6006. Note that the first semiconductor layer 6005 and the second semiconductor layer 6006 are used.
May be formed by processing the shape. The step of processing the shape is preferably a method such as the photolithography method described above. Note that a material used for the first semiconductor layer 6005 is preferably silicon, silicon germanium (SiGe), or the like. The material used for the second semiconductor layer 6006 is preferably silicon containing phosphorus or the like.

Next, a second conductive layer 6007 is formed. At this time, it is preferable to use a sputtering method or a printing method. Note that the material used for the second conductive layer 6007 has transparency,
It may have reflectivity. In the case of transparency, for example, an indium tin oxide (ITO) film in which tin oxide is mixed with tin oxide, an indium tin silicon oxide (ITSO) film in which indium tin oxide (ITO) is mixed with silicon oxide, oxidation An indium zinc oxide (IZO) film, a zinc oxide film, or a tin oxide film in which zinc oxide is mixed with indium can be used. Note that IZO is a transparent conductive material formed by sputtering using a target in which 2 to 20 wt% zinc oxide (ZnO) is mixed with ITO. On the other hand, when it has reflectivity, Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, Al, etc. can be used. T
2-layer structure in which i, Mo, Ta, Cr, W and Al are laminated, Al is Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr
A three-layer structure sandwiched between metals such as W and W may be used. Note that the second conductive layer 6007 may be formed by processing a shape. The method of processing the shape is preferably a method such as the photolithography method described above. Note that the etching method is preferably dry etching. Dry etching is ECR (Electron Cyctron R).
The etching may be performed by a dry etching apparatus using a high-density plasma source such as sonic or ICP (Inductive Coupled Plasma).

Next, a channel region of the TFT is formed. At this time, the second semiconductor layer 6006 may be etched using the second conductive layer 6007 as a mask. By doing so, the number of masks can be reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. By etching the second semiconductor layer 6006 having conductivity, the removed portion becomes a channel region of the TFT. Note that the first semiconductor layer 6005 and the second semiconductor layer 6006 are not formed continuously,
After the formation of the first semiconductor layer 6005, a film serving as a stopper may be formed and patterned in a portion that becomes a channel region of the TFT, and then the second semiconductor layer 6006 may be formed. By doing so, the channel region of the TFT can be formed without using the second conductive layer 6007 as a mask, and there is an advantage that the degree of freedom of the layout pattern is increased. In addition, since the first semiconductor layer 6005 is not etched when the second semiconductor layer 6006 is etched, there is an advantage that the channel region of the TFT can be surely formed without causing etching failure.

Next, a third insulating film 6008 is formed. The third insulating film 6008 is preferably transparent. Note that a material used for the third insulating film 6008 is an inorganic material (silicon oxide, silicon nitride, silicon oxynitride, or the like), a low dielectric constant organic compound material (photosensitive or non-photosensitive organic resin material), or the like. Is preferred. Further, a material containing siloxane may be used. Siloxane is a material in which a skeleton structure is formed by a bond of silicon (Si) and oxygen (O). As a substituent, an organic group containing at least hydrogen (for example, an alkyl group or an aromatic hydrocarbon) is used. A fluoro group may be used as a substituent. Or as a substituent
An organic group containing at least hydrogen and a fluoro group may be used. The second conductive layer 60
07 may be formed by processing the shape. The method of processing the shape is preferably a method such as the photolithography method described above. At this time, the second insulating film 6004 is also etched, whereby a contact hole with the first conductive layer 6003 as well as the second conductive layer 6007 can be formed. Note that the surface of the third insulating film 6008 is preferably as flat as possible. This is because the alignment of the liquid crystal molecules is affected by the unevenness of the surface in contact with the liquid crystal.

Next, a third conductive film 6009 is formed. At this time, it is preferable to use a sputtering method or a printing method. Note that the material used for the third conductive film 6009 may be transparent or reflective, like the second conductive layer 6007. Note that the third conductive film 600
A material that can be used for the second conductive layer 6007 may be the same as that of the second conductive layer 6007. Further, the third conductive film 6009 may be formed by processing a shape. The method of processing the shape is performed by using the second conductive layer 60.
It may be the same as 07.

Next, a first alignment film 6010 is formed. As the alignment film 6010, a polymer film such as polyimide can be used. Although not shown, an alignment control protrusion may be provided also on the first substrate side. Instead of the alignment control protrusion, a slit may be provided in the third conductive film 6009 so that unevenness is formed on the surface of the first alignment film 6010. By doing so, the orientation of the liquid crystal molecules can be controlled more reliably. In addition, the first alignment film 6010 and the second alignment film 6010
The alignment film 6012 may be a vertical alignment film. By doing so, the liquid crystal molecules 6018 can be vertically aligned.

The first substrate 6001 manufactured as described above, the light shielding film 6014, and the color filter 6015.
The second substrate 6016 on which the fourth conductive layer 6013, the spacer 6017, and the second alignment film 6012 are manufactured is bonded to each other with a gap of several μm by a sealing material, and a liquid crystal material is provided between the two substrates. A liquid crystal panel can be manufactured by injecting. Note that in the MVA liquid crystal panel illustrated in FIG. 33, the fourth conductive layer 6013 may be formed over the entire surface of the second substrate 6016. Also, the alignment control protrusion 6 is in contact with the fourth conductive layer 6013.
019 may be manufactured. The shape of the orientation control protrusion 6019 is not limited, but a shape having a smooth curved surface is preferable. In this way, the adjacent liquid crystal molecules 6018
Since the orientation of is very close, orientation defects are reduced. In addition, the second alignment film 6012 has
It is also possible to reduce defects in the alignment film caused by disconnection due to the alignment control protrusion 6019.

Next, characteristics of the pixel structure of the MVA liquid crystal panel illustrated in FIG. A liquid crystal molecule 6018 illustrated in FIG. 33A is an elongated molecule having a major axis and a minor axis. In order to show the direction of the liquid crystal molecules 6018, the length is expressed in FIG. That is, the longer expressed liquid crystal molecules 6018 are parallel to the paper surface, and the shorter expressed liquid crystal molecules 6018 are closer to the normal direction of the paper surface. . In other words, the liquid crystal molecules 6018 illustrated in FIG. 33A are aligned so that the direction of the long axis is in the normal direction of the alignment film. Accordingly, the liquid crystal molecules 6018 in a portion where the alignment control protrusion 6019 is located are aligned radially with the alignment control protrusion 6019 as the center. In this state, a liquid crystal display device with a large viewing angle can be obtained.

Next, an example of a pixel layout of the MVA liquid crystal display device is described with reference to FIG. An example of a pixel of an MVA liquid crystal display device to which the present invention is applied is as follows.
The scanning line 6021, the first video signal line 6022A, the second video signal line 6022B, the capacitor line 6023, the first TFT 6024A, the second TFT 6024B, the first pixel electrode 6025A, and the second Pixel electrode 6025B, pixel capacitor 6026, and alignment control protrusion 6
019. Note that the first pixel electrode 6025A and the second pixel electrode 6025B together constitute one pixel. That is, the first pixel electrode 6025A corresponds to the first subpixel described in the above embodiment, and the second pixel electrode 6025B corresponds to the second subpixel described in the above embodiment. In addition, the sub-pixel signal from the first video signal line 6022A is converted into the first T
A series of operations such as inputting to the first pixel electrode 6025A via the FT 6024A drives the first sub-pixel. Similarly, a series of operations such as inputting a sub-pixel signal from the second video signal line 6022B to the second pixel electrode 6025B through the second TFT 6024B drives the second sub-pixel. It becomes. Since the driving of the first sub-pixel and the driving of the second sub-pixel are the same, only the configuration of the first sub-pixel will be described below.

Since the scan line 6021 is electrically connected to the gate electrode of the first TFT 6024A, the scan line 6021 is preferably formed using the first conductive layer 6003.

The first video signal line 6022A is preferably formed using the second conductive layer 6007 because it is electrically connected to the source electrode or the drain electrode of the first TFT 6024A.
In addition, since the scan lines 6021 and the first video signal lines 6022A are arranged in a matrix, it is preferable that the scan lines 6021 and the first video signal lines 6022A be formed of at least different conductive layers.

The capacitor line 6023 is arranged in parallel with the first pixel electrode 6025A, so that the pixel capacitor 60
It is preferable that the wiring is formed by the first conductive layer 6003. Note that as shown in FIG. 33B, the capacitor line 6023 is connected to the first video signal line 6022A.
And may extend so as to surround the first video signal line 6022A. By doing so, it is possible to reduce a phenomenon in which the potential of the electrode that should hold the potential changes, that is, so-called crosstalk, in accordance with the potential change of the first video signal line 6022A. Note that in order to reduce cross capacitance with the first video signal line 6022A, as shown in FIG. 33B, the first semiconductor layer 6005 is formed in a cross region of the capacitor line 6023 and the first video signal line 6022A. It may be provided.

The first TFT 6024A operates as a switch for electrically connecting the first video signal line 6022A and the first pixel electrode 6025A. As shown in FIG. 33B, the first TFT 6
Either the source region or the drain region of 024A may be arranged so as to surround the other of the source region or the drain region. By doing so, a large channel width can be obtained with a small area, and the switching capability can be increased. Note that FIG. 33 (B)
As shown, the gate electrode of the first TFT 6024A may be arranged so as to surround the first semiconductor layer 6005.

The first pixel electrode 6025A is electrically connected to one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the first TFT 6024A. The first pixel electrode 6025A is connected to the first video signal line 6022.
It is an electrode for applying the signal voltage transmitted by A to the liquid crystal element. Also, the capacitance line 60
23 and a pixel capacitor 6026 may be formed. In this way, the first video signal line 6022 is obtained.
It can also serve to hold the signal voltage transmitted by A. Note that the first pixel electrode 6025A may have a rectangular shape as illustrated in FIG. By doing so, the aperture ratio of the pixel can be increased, so that the efficiency of the liquid crystal display device is improved. The first
When the pixel electrode 6025A is made of a transparent material, a transmissive liquid crystal display device can be obtained. A transmissive liquid crystal display device has high color reproducibility and can display an image with high image quality. In the case where the first pixel electrode 6025A is formed using a reflective material, a reflective liquid crystal display device can be obtained. The reflective liquid crystal display device has high visibility in a bright environment such as outdoors and does not require a backlight, so that power consumption can be extremely reduced. Note that in the case where the first pixel electrode 6025A is formed using both a transparent material and a reflective material, a transflective liquid crystal display device having both advantages can be obtained. Note that in the case where the first pixel electrode 6025A is formed using a reflective material, the surface of the first pixel electrode 6025A may be uneven.
By doing so, since the reflected light is irregularly reflected, there is an advantage that the angle dependence of the intensity distribution of the reflected light is reduced. That is, it is possible to obtain a reflective liquid crystal display device having a certain brightness at any angle.

Next, referring to FIG. 34, there are a cross-sectional view and a top view of a pixel when a thin film transistor is combined in a PVA liquid crystal display device. FIG. 34A is a cross-sectional view of a pixel, and FIG. 34B is a top view of the pixel. A cross-sectional view of the pixel shown in FIG.
This corresponds to a line segment aa ′ in the top view of the pixel shown in FIG. By applying the present invention to the liquid crystal display device having the pixel structure shown in FIG. 34, a liquid crystal display device having a large viewing angle, a high response speed, and a large contrast can be obtained.

A pixel structure of a PVA liquid crystal display device will be described with reference to FIG. The liquid crystal display device has a basic part that displays an image, called a liquid crystal panel. A liquid crystal panel is manufactured by bonding two processed substrates together with a gap of several μm and injecting a liquid crystal material between the two substrates. In FIG. 34A, the two substrates are a first substrate 6101 and a second substrate 6116. A TFT and a pixel electrode are formed over the first substrate, and a light shielding film 6114, a color filter 6115, a fourth conductive layer 6113, a spacer 6117, and a second alignment film 6112 are formed over the second substrate. It may be produced.

Note that the present invention can be implemented without manufacturing TFTs on the first substrate 6101. TFT
In the case where the present invention is carried out without manufacturing the manufacturing cost, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. on the other hand,
When the present invention is implemented by manufacturing a TFT, a larger display device can be obtained.

Note that the TFT illustrated in FIGS. 34A and 34B is a bottom-gate TFT using an amorphous semiconductor, and has an advantage of being inexpensively manufactured using a large-area substrate. However, the present invention is not limited to this. TFT structures that can be used include a channel etch type, a channel protection type, and the like for bottom-gate TFTs. A top gate type may also be used. Furthermore, not only an amorphous semiconductor but also a polycrystalline semiconductor can be used.

Note that the present invention can be implemented without forming the light-shielding film 6114 on the second substrate 6116. In the case where the present invention is implemented without forming the light-shielding film 6114, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the light-shielding film 6114 is formed and the present invention is carried out, a display device with little light leakage at the time of black display can be obtained.

Note that the present invention can be implemented without forming the color filter 6115 on the second substrate 6116. In the case where the present invention is implemented without manufacturing the color filter 6115, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the color filter 6115 is manufactured and the present invention is implemented, a display device capable of color display can be obtained.

Note that the present invention can also be implemented by spraying spherical spacers without forming the spacers 6117 on the second substrate 6116. When the present invention is carried out by spraying spherical spacers, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the spacer 6117 is manufactured and the present invention is carried out, the spacer position does not vary, so that the distance between the two substrates can be made uniform, and a display device with little display unevenness can be obtained. Can do.

Next, processing applied to the first substrate 6101 may be omitted because the method described in FIG. 33 may be used. Here, the first substrate 6101, the first insulating film 6102, and the first conductive layer 6
103, the second insulating film 6104, the first semiconductor layer 6105, the second semiconductor layer 6106, the second conductive layer 6107, the third insulating film 6108, the third conductive layer 6109, and the first alignment film 61.
10 are the first substrate 6001, the first insulating film 6002, the first conductive layer 6003, the second insulating film 6004, the first semiconductor layer 6005, and the second semiconductor layer 60 in FIG. 33, respectively.
06, the second conductive layer 6007, the third insulating film 6008, the third conductive film 6009, and the first alignment film 6010. Note that an electrode notch portion may be provided in the third conductive layer 6109 on the first substrate 6101 side. By doing so, the orientation of the liquid crystal molecules can be controlled more reliably. Further, the first alignment film 6110 and the second alignment film 6112 may be vertical alignment films. By doing so, the liquid crystal molecules 6118 can be vertically aligned.

The first substrate 6101 manufactured as described above, the light shielding film 6114, and the color filter 6115.
The second substrate 6116 on which the fourth conductive layer 6113, the spacer 6117, and the second alignment film 6112 are manufactured is bonded with a sealant with a gap of several μm, and a liquid crystal material is provided between the two substrates. A liquid crystal panel can be manufactured by injecting. Note that in the PVA mode liquid crystal panel as illustrated in FIG. 34, the fourth conductive layer 6113 may be patterned to form the electrode notch portion 6119. The shape of the electrode notch 6119 is not limited, but is preferably a shape in which a plurality of rectangles having different directions are combined.
By doing so, a plurality of regions having different orientations can be formed, so that a liquid crystal display device with a large viewing angle can be obtained. In addition, the shape of the fourth conductive layer 6113 at the boundary between the electrode notch portion 6119 and the fourth conductive layer 6113 is preferably a smooth curve. By doing so, the alignment of the adjacent liquid crystal molecules 6118 becomes very close, and alignment defects are reduced. In addition, defects in the alignment film due to the second alignment film 6112 being stepped by the electrode notch 6119 can be reduced.

Next, features of the pixel structure of the PVA liquid crystal panel shown in FIG. 34 will be described. FIG.
A liquid crystal molecule 6118 shown in (A) of 4 is an elongated molecule having a major axis and a minor axis. In order to show the direction of the liquid crystal molecules 6118, the length is expressed in FIG. That is, the longer expressed liquid crystal molecules 6118 are parallel to the paper surface, and the shorter expressed liquid crystal molecules 6118 are closer to the normal direction of the paper surface. . That is, the liquid crystal molecules 6118 shown in FIG. 34A are aligned so that the direction of the long axis is in the normal direction of the alignment film. Accordingly, the liquid crystal molecules 6118 in a portion where the electrode notch 6119 is located are aligned radially around the boundary between the electrode notch 6119 and the fourth conductive layer 6113. In this state, a liquid crystal display device with a large viewing angle can be obtained.

Next, an example of a pixel layout of a PVA liquid crystal display device is described with reference to FIG. As an example, a pixel of a PVA liquid crystal display device to which the present invention is applied
The scanning line 6121, the first video signal line 6122A, the second video signal line 6122B, the capacitor line 6123, the first TFT 6124A, the second TFT 6124B, the first pixel electrode 6125A, and the second Pixel electrode 6125B, pixel capacitor 6126, and electrode notch 6
119. Note that the first pixel electrode 6125A and the second pixel electrode 6125B together constitute one pixel. That is, the first pixel electrode 6025A corresponds to the first subpixel described in the above embodiment, and the second pixel electrode 6025B corresponds to the second subpixel described in the above embodiment. Further, the sub-pixel signal from the first video signal line 6122A is converted into the first T
A series of operations such as inputting to the first pixel electrode 6125A via the FT 6124A drives the first sub-pixel. Similarly, a series of operations such as inputting a subpixel signal from the second video signal line 6122B to the second pixel electrode 6125B via the second TFT 6124B drives the second subpixel. It becomes. Since the driving of the first sub-pixel and the driving of the second sub-pixel are the same, only the configuration of the first sub-pixel will be described below.

The scan line 6121 is preferably formed using the first conductive layer 6103 because it is electrically connected to the gate electrode of the first TFT 6124A.

The first video signal line 6122A is preferably formed using the second conductive layer 6107 because it is electrically connected to the source electrode or the drain electrode of the first TFT 6124A.
In addition, since the scan line 6121 and the first video signal line 6122A are arranged in a matrix, it is preferable to form at least different conductive layers.

The capacitor line 6123 is arranged in parallel to the first pixel electrode 6125A, so that the pixel capacitor 61
It is preferable that the wiring is formed by the first conductive layer 6103. Note that as shown in FIG. 34B, the capacitor line 6123 is connected to the first video signal line 6122A.
And may extend so as to surround the first video signal line 6122A. Thus, a phenomenon in which the potential of the electrode that should hold the potential changes with the potential change of the first video signal line 6122A, so-called crosstalk, can be reduced. Note that in order to reduce the cross capacitance between the first video signal line 6122A and the first semiconductor layer 6105 in the cross region between the capacitor line 6123 and the first video signal line 6122A as shown in FIG. It may be provided.

The first TFT 6124A operates as a switch for electrically connecting the first video signal line 6122A and the first pixel electrode 6125A. As shown in FIG. 34B, the first TFT 6
Either the source region or the drain region of 124A may be arranged so as to surround the other of the source region or the drain region. By doing so, a large channel width can be obtained with a small area, and the switching capability can be increased. Note that FIG. 34 (B)
As shown, the gate electrode of the first TFT 6124 </ b> A may be disposed so as to surround the first semiconductor layer 6105.

The first pixel electrode 6125A is electrically connected to one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the first TFT 6124A. The first pixel electrode 6125A is connected to the first video signal line 6122.
It is an electrode for applying the signal voltage transmitted by A to the liquid crystal element. In addition, the capacitance line 61
23 and a pixel capacitor 6126 may be formed. In this way, the first video signal line 6122 is obtained.
It can also serve to hold the signal voltage transmitted by A. Note that the first pixel electrode 6125A is formed in a portion where the electrode notch 6119 is not provided in accordance with the shape of the electrode notch 6119 provided in the fourth conductive layer 6113 as illustrated in FIG. It is preferable to form a notched portion of the first pixel electrode 6125A. In this way, the liquid crystal molecules 61
Since a plurality of regions having different 18 orientations can be formed, a liquid crystal display device having a large viewing angle can be obtained. In the case where the first pixel electrode 6125A is formed using a material having transparency, a transmissive liquid crystal display device can be obtained. A transmissive liquid crystal display device has high color reproducibility and can display an image with high image quality. In addition, the first pixel electrode 61
When 25A is made of a reflective material, a reflective liquid crystal display device can be obtained. The reflective liquid crystal display device has high visibility in a bright environment such as outdoors and does not require a backlight, so that power consumption can be extremely reduced. Note that in the case where the first pixel electrode 6125A is formed using both a transparent material and a reflective material, a transflective liquid crystal display device having both advantages can be obtained. The first
In the case where the pixel electrode 6125A is made of a reflective material, the first pixel electrode 6125A is used.
The surface of A may be uneven. By doing so, since the reflected light is irregularly reflected, there is an advantage that the angle dependence of the intensity distribution of the reflected light is reduced. That is, it is possible to obtain a reflective liquid crystal display device having a certain brightness at any angle.

Note that the viewing angle characteristics of the viewer can be improved by using the MVA method and the PVA method for the liquid crystal display device of the present invention and forming one pixel with a plurality of sub-pixels. Note that the present invention only needs to be a display method capable of performing display with liquid crystal molecules inclined or radially inclined in sub-pixels constituting one pixel. For example, a ferroelectric liquid crystal may be used. However, an antiferroelectric liquid crystal may be used. In addition, the liquid crystal driving method is not limited to the MVA method and the PVA method, but a TN (Twisted Nematic) mode, IPS (In
-Plane-Switching) mode, FFS (Fringe Field Sw)
itching) mode, ASM (Axially Symmetric Align)
d Micro-cell) mode, OCB (Optical Compensated)
Birefringence mode, FLC (Ferroelectric Liq)
uid Crystal) mode, AFLC (Antiferroelectric L)
liquid crystal) or the like. Moreover, it is not limited to a liquid crystal element, A light emitting element (Including organic EL or inorganic EL) may be sufficient.

As an example, FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view and a top view of a pixel in the case where a thin film transistor (TFT) is combined with a pixel structure of a liquid crystal display device called a TN mode. 69A is a cross-sectional view of a pixel, and FIG. 69B is a top view of subpixels included in the pixel. A cross-sectional view of the pixel shown in FIG. 69A corresponds to a line segment aa ′ in the top view of the sub-pixel shown in FIG.

A pixel structure of a TN liquid crystal display device will be described with reference to FIG. The liquid crystal display device has a basic part that displays an image, called a liquid crystal panel. LCD panel
The two processed substrates are bonded together with a gap of several μm, and a liquid crystal material is injected between the two substrates. In FIG. 69A, the two substrates are a first substrate 5901 and a second substrate 5916. A TFT and a pixel electrode are formed on the first substrate, and a light shielding film 5914, a color filter 5915, a fourth conductive layer 5913, a spacer 5917, and a second alignment film 5912 are formed on the second substrate. It may be produced.

Note that the present invention can be implemented without manufacturing a TFT on the first substrate 5901. TFT
In the case where the present invention is carried out without manufacturing the manufacturing cost, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. on the other hand,
When the present invention is implemented by manufacturing a TFT, a larger display device can be obtained.

Note that the TFT illustrated in FIGS. 69A and 69B is a bottom-gate TFT using an amorphous semiconductor and has an advantage of being inexpensively manufactured using a large-area substrate. However, the present invention is not limited to this. TFT structures that can be used include a channel etch type, a channel protection type, and the like for bottom-gate TFTs. A top gate type may also be used. Furthermore, not only an amorphous semiconductor but also a polycrystalline semiconductor can be used.

Note that the present invention can be implemented without forming the light-shielding film 5914 on the second substrate 5916. In the case where the present invention is implemented without forming the light-shielding film 5914, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the light-shielding film 5914 is manufactured and the present invention is implemented, a display device with little light leakage at the time of black display can be obtained.

Note that the present invention can be implemented without forming the color filter 5915 on the second substrate 5916. In the case where the present invention is implemented without manufacturing the color filter 5915, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the color filter 5915 is manufactured and the present invention is carried out, a display device capable of color display can be obtained.

Note that the present invention can also be implemented by spraying spherical spacers without forming the spacers 5917 on the second substrate 5916. When the present invention is carried out by spraying spherical spacers, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the spacer 5917 is manufactured and the present invention is carried out, the spacer position does not vary, so that the distance between the two substrates can be made uniform, and a display device with little display unevenness can be obtained. Can do.

Next, processing performed on the first substrate 5901 may be used because the method described in FIG. 33 may be used. Here, the first substrate 5901, the first insulating film 5902, and the first conductive layer 5 are used.
903, a second insulating film 5904, a first semiconductor layer 5905, a second semiconductor layer 5906, a second conductive layer 5907, a third insulating film 5908, a third conductive layer 5909, and a first alignment film 59
10 are the first substrate 6001, the first insulating film 6002, the first conductive layer 6003, the second insulating film 6004, the first semiconductor layer 6005, and the second semiconductor layer 60 in FIG. 33, respectively.
06, the second conductive layer 6007, the third insulating film 6008, the third conductive film 6009, and the first alignment film 6010.

The first substrate 5901 manufactured as described above, the light shielding film 5914, and the color filter 5915.
The second substrate 5916 on which the fourth conductive layer 5913, the spacer 5917, and the second alignment film 5912 are formed is bonded to each other with a gap of several μm by a sealant, and a liquid crystal material is provided between the two substrates. A liquid crystal panel can be manufactured by injecting. Note that in the TN liquid crystal panel illustrated in FIG. 69, the fourth conductive layer 5913 may be formed over the entire surface of the second substrate 5916.

Next, features of the pixel structure of the TN liquid crystal panel shown in FIG. 69 will be described. FIG. 69
The liquid crystal molecules 6918 shown in (A) are elongated molecules having a major axis and a minor axis. In order to show the direction of the liquid crystal molecules 6918, the length is expressed in FIG. That is, the long liquid crystal molecule 5918 has a long axis direction parallel to the paper surface,
It is assumed that the longer the liquid crystal molecules 5918 are expressed, the longer axes are closer to the normal direction of the paper surface. That is, the liquid crystal molecules 5918 shown in FIG. 69A have a major axis direction different by 90 degrees between the one close to the first substrate 5901 and the one close to the second substrate 5916. The orientation of the major axis of the liquid crystal molecules 5918 located in the middle of the orientation is such that they are smoothly connected. That is, the liquid crystal molecules 5918 illustrated in FIG. 69A are aligned so as to be twisted by 90 degrees between the first substrate 5901 and the second substrate 5916.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69B, the present invention is applied to a TN liquid crystal display device.
An example of a pixel layout will be described. A pixel of a TN liquid crystal display device to which the present invention is applied includes a scanning line 5921, a video signal line 5922, a capacitor line 5923, and a TFT 5924.
In addition, a pixel electrode 5925 and a pixel capacitor 5926 may be provided.

The scan line 5921 is preferably formed using the first conductive layer 5903 because it is electrically connected to the gate electrode of the TFT 5924.

Since the video signal line 5922 is electrically connected to the source electrode or the drain electrode of the TFT 5924, the video signal line 5922 is preferably formed using the second conductive layer 5907. Also, the scanning line 59
21 and the video signal line 5922 are arranged in a matrix, and are preferably formed of at least different conductive layers.

The capacitor line 5923 is a wiring for forming the pixel capacitor 5926 by being arranged in parallel with the pixel electrode 5925 and is preferably formed using the first conductive layer 5903. Note that as illustrated in FIG. 69B, the capacitor line 5923 may be extended along the video signal line 5922 so as to surround the video signal line 5922. In this way, the video signal line 592
The phenomenon that the potential of the electrode that should hold the potential changes with the potential change of 2, so-called crosstalk, can be reduced. Note that in order to reduce cross capacitance with the video signal line 5922, a first semiconductor layer 5905 may be provided in a cross region of the capacitor line 5923 and the video signal line 5922 as illustrated in FIG.

The TFT 5924 operates as a switch for electrically connecting the video signal line 5922 and the pixel electrode 5925. Note that as shown in FIG. 69B, either the source region or the drain region of the TFT 5924 may be disposed so as to surround the other of the source region or the drain region. By doing so, a large channel width can be obtained with a small area, and the switching capability can be increased. As shown in FIG. 69B, the TFT 5924
The gate electrode may be disposed so as to surround the first semiconductor layer 5905.

The pixel electrode 5925 is electrically connected to one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the TFT 5924. The pixel electrode 5925 is an electrode for applying a signal voltage transmitted through the video signal line 5922 to the liquid crystal element. Further, a capacitor line 5923 and a pixel capacitor 5926 may be formed. In this way, the signal voltage transmitted through the video signal line 5922 can be held. Note that the pixel electrode 5925 may have a rectangular shape as illustrated in FIG. By doing so, the aperture ratio of the pixel can be increased, so that the efficiency of the liquid crystal display device is improved. In the case where the pixel electrode 5925 is formed using a material having transparency, a transmissive liquid crystal display device can be obtained. A transmissive liquid crystal display device has high color reproducibility and can display an image with high image quality. In the case where the pixel electrode 5925 is formed using a reflective material, a reflective liquid crystal display device can be obtained. The reflective liquid crystal display device has high visibility in a bright environment such as outdoors and does not require a backlight, so that power consumption can be extremely reduced. Note that in the case where the pixel electrode 5925 is formed using both a transparent material and a reflective material, a transflective liquid crystal display device having both advantages can be obtained. Note that in the case where the pixel electrode 5925 is formed using a reflective material, the surface of the pixel electrode 5925 may be uneven. By doing so, since the reflected light is irregularly reflected, there is an advantage that the angle dependence of the intensity distribution of the reflected light is reduced. That is, it is possible to obtain a reflective liquid crystal display device having a certain brightness at any angle.

Next, a case where the present invention is applied to a horizontal electric field type liquid crystal display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 illustrates a pixel electrode 622 in a pixel structure of a liquid crystal display device in which an electric field is applied in the horizontal direction in order to perform switching so that the alignment of liquid crystal molecules is always horizontal with respect to the substrate.
5 and the common electrode 6223 are subjected to comb-teeth pattern processing, and a cross-sectional view of a pixel when the present invention is applied to a method of applying an electric field in the horizontal direction, a so-called IPS (In-Plane-Switching) method. It is a top view. FIG. 70A is a cross-sectional view of a pixel.
(B) is a top view of the pixel. A cross-sectional view of the pixel shown in FIG.
This corresponds to the line segment aa ′ in the top view of the pixel shown in FIG. By applying the present invention to the liquid crystal display device having the pixel structure shown in FIG. 70, a liquid crystal display device having a large viewing angle in principle and a small dependence of response speed on gray scale can be obtained.

A pixel structure of an IPS liquid crystal display device is described with reference to FIG. The liquid crystal display device has a basic part that displays an image, called a liquid crystal panel. A liquid crystal panel is manufactured by bonding two processed substrates together with a gap of several μm and injecting a liquid crystal material between the two substrates. In FIG. 70A, the two substrates are a first substrate 6201 and a second substrate 6216. A TFT and a pixel electrode may be manufactured on the first substrate, and a light shielding film 6214, a color filter 6215, a spacer 6217, and a second alignment film 6212 may be manufactured on the second substrate.

Note that the present invention can be implemented without manufacturing TFTs on the first substrate 6201. TFT
In the case where the present invention is carried out without manufacturing the manufacturing cost, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. on the other hand,
When the present invention is implemented by manufacturing a TFT, a larger display device can be obtained.

Note that the TFT illustrated in FIG. 70 is a bottom-gate TFT using an amorphous semiconductor and has an advantage of being inexpensively manufactured using a large-area substrate. However, the present invention is not limited to this. TFT structures that can be used include a channel etch type, a channel protection type, and the like for bottom-gate TFTs. A top gate type may also be used. Furthermore, not only an amorphous semiconductor but also a polycrystalline semiconductor can be used.

Note that the present invention can be implemented without forming the light-shielding film 6214 on the second substrate 6216. In the case where the present invention is implemented without forming the light-shielding film 6214, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the light-shielding film 6214 is formed and the present invention is implemented, a display device with little light leakage during black display can be obtained.

Note that the present invention can be implemented without forming the color filter 6215 on the second substrate 6216. In the case where the present invention is implemented without manufacturing the color filter 6215, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, in the case of manufacturing the color filter 6215 and carrying out the present invention, a display device capable of color display can be obtained.

Note that the present invention can also be implemented by spraying spherical spacers without forming the spacers 6217 on the second substrate 6216. When the present invention is carried out by spraying spherical spacers, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, in the case where the spacer 6217 is manufactured and the present invention is carried out, the distance between the two substrates can be made uniform because the position of the spacer does not vary, and a display device with little display unevenness can be obtained. Can do.

Next, processing performed on the first substrate 6201 may be omitted because the method described in FIG. 33 may be used. Here, the first substrate 6201, the first insulating film 6202, and the first conductive layer 6
203, the second insulating film 6204, the first semiconductor layer 6205, the second semiconductor layer 6206, the second conductive layer 6207, the third insulating film 6208, the third conductive layer 6209, and the first alignment film 62.
10 are the first substrate 6001, the first insulating film 6002, the first conductive layer 6003, the second insulating film 6004, the first semiconductor layer 6005, and the second semiconductor layer 60 in FIG. 33, respectively.
06, the second conductive layer 6007, the third insulating film 6008, the third conductive film 6009, and the first alignment film 6010. Note that pattern processing may be performed on the third conductive layer 6209 on the first substrate 6201 side to form two comb-like shapes that are meshed with each other. One comb-like electrode may be electrically connected to one of the source electrode or the drain electrode of the TFT 6224, and the other comb-like electrode may be electrically connected to the common electrode 6223. By doing so, a horizontal electric field can be effectively applied to the liquid crystal molecules 6218.

The first substrate 6201 manufactured as described above, the light-shielding film 6214, and the color filter 6215.
The spacer 6217 and the second substrate 6216 on which the second alignment film 6212 is manufactured are bonded to each other with a gap of several μm by a sealant, and a liquid crystal material is injected between the two substrates, whereby a liquid crystal material is injected. Panels can be made. Although not shown, on the second substrate 6216 side,
A conductive layer may be formed. By forming the conductive layer on the second substrate 6216 side, the influence of electromagnetic noise from the outside can be reduced.

Next, features of the pixel structure of the IPS liquid crystal panel illustrated in FIG. 70 will be described. FIG.
A liquid crystal molecule 6218 shown in 0 (A) is an elongated molecule having a major axis and a minor axis. In order to show the direction of the liquid crystal molecules 6218, the length is expressed in FIG. That is, the longer expressed liquid crystal molecule 6218 is parallel to the paper surface, and the shorter expressed liquid crystal molecule 6218 is closer to the normal direction of the paper surface. . That is, the liquid crystal molecules 6218 shown in FIG. 70A are aligned so that the direction of the major axis is always in the horizontal direction to the substrate. In FIG. 70A, the alignment is shown in the absence of an electric field. However, when an electric field is applied to the liquid crystal molecules 6218, the orientation of the major axis always remains horizontal with the substrate. Rotate within. In this state, a liquid crystal display device with a large viewing angle can be obtained.

Next, an example of a pixel layout when the present invention is applied to an IPS liquid crystal display device will be described with reference to FIG. A pixel of an IPS liquid crystal display device to which the present invention is applied includes a scanning line 6221, a video signal line 6222, a common electrode 6223, and a TFT 6.
224 and a pixel electrode 6225 may be provided.

Since the scan line 6221 is electrically connected to the gate electrode of the TFT 6224, the scan line 6221 is preferably formed using the first conductive layer 6203.

Since the video signal line 6222 is electrically connected to the source electrode or the drain electrode of the TFT 6224, the video signal line 6222 is preferably formed using the second conductive layer 6207. Also, the scanning line 62
21 and the video signal line 6222 are arranged in a matrix, and are preferably formed of at least different conductive layers. As shown in FIG. 70B, the video signal line 6
222 may be bent in the pixel so as to match the shape of the pixel electrode 6225 and the common electrode 6223. By doing so, the aperture ratio of the pixel can be increased, so that the efficiency of the liquid crystal display device can be improved.

The common electrode 6223 is an electrode for generating a horizontal electric field by being arranged in parallel with the pixel electrode 6225, and includes the first conductive layer 6203 and the third conductive layer 6209. Is preferred. Note that, as illustrated in FIG. 70B, the common electrode 6223 may be extended along the video signal line 6222 so as to surround the video signal line 6222. By doing so, it is possible to reduce a phenomenon in which the potential of the electrode to hold the potential changes, that is, so-called crosstalk, in accordance with the potential change of the video signal line 6222. Note that in order to reduce cross capacitance with the video signal line 6222, the first semiconductor layer 6205 may be provided in a cross region of the common electrode 6223 and the video signal line 6222 as illustrated in FIG.

The TFT 6224 operates as a switch for electrically connecting the video signal line 6222 and the pixel electrode 6225. Note that as illustrated in FIG. 70B, either the source region or the drain region of the TFT 6224 may be disposed so as to surround the other of the source region or the drain region. By doing so, a large channel width can be obtained with a small area, and the switching capability can be increased. As shown in FIG. 70B, the TFT 6224
The gate electrode may be disposed so as to surround the first semiconductor layer 6205.

The pixel electrode 6225 is electrically connected to one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the TFT 6224. The pixel electrode 6225 is an electrode for applying a signal voltage transmitted through the video signal line 6222 to the liquid crystal element. Further, a common electrode 6223 and a pixel capacitor may be formed. Thus, the signal voltage transmitted through the video signal line 6222 can be held. Note that the pixel electrode 6225 and the comb-like common electrode 6223 are preferably formed in a bent comb-like shape as illustrated in FIG. Thus, a plurality of regions with different alignment of the liquid crystal molecules 6218 can be formed, so that a liquid crystal display device with a wide viewing angle can be obtained. In the case where the pixel electrode 6225 and the comb-like common electrode 6223 are formed using a material having transparency, a transmissive liquid crystal display device can be obtained. A transmissive liquid crystal display device has high color reproducibility and can display an image with high image quality. In the case where the pixel electrode 6225 and the comb-like common electrode 6223 are formed using a reflective material, a reflective liquid crystal display device can be obtained. The reflective liquid crystal display device has high visibility in a bright environment such as outdoors and does not require a backlight, so that power consumption can be extremely reduced. Note that in the case where the pixel electrode 6225 and the comb-like common electrode 6223 are formed using both a transparent material and a reflective material, a transflective liquid crystal display device having both advantages is obtained. Can be obtained. In addition,
In the case where the pixel electrode 6225 and the comb-shaped common electrode 6223 are formed using a reflective material, the surface of the pixel electrode 6225 and the comb-shaped common electrode 6223 may be uneven.
By doing so, since the reflected light is irregularly reflected, there is an advantage that the angle dependence of the intensity distribution of the reflected light is reduced. That is, it is possible to obtain a reflective liquid crystal display device having a certain brightness at any angle.

Note that although the comb-like pixel electrode 6225 and the comb-like common electrode 6223 are both formed of the third conductive layer 6209, the pixel configuration to which the present invention can be applied is not limited thereto. It can be selected appropriately. For example, the comb-like pixel electrode 6225 and the comb-like common electrode 6
223 may be formed of the second conductive layer 6207, or both may be formed of the first conductive layer 620.
3, one of them may be formed with the third conductive layer 6209, the other may be formed with the second conductive layer 6207, or one of them may be formed with the third conductive layer 6209. Alternatively, the other may be formed using the first conductive layer 6207, or one of them may be formed using the second conductive layer 6209 and the other may be formed using the first conductive layer 6207.

Next, a case where the present invention is applied to another lateral electric field type liquid crystal display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing another pixel structure of a liquid crystal display device in which an electric field is applied in the lateral direction in order to perform switching so that the alignment of liquid crystal molecules is always horizontal with respect to the substrate. More specifically, either one of the pixel electrode 6325 and the common electrode 6323 is subjected to comb-like pattern processing, and the other is uniformly formed in a region overlapping the comb-like shape.
A method of applying an electric field in the horizontal direction, so-called FFS (Fringe Field Switch)
ing) is a cross-sectional view and a top view of a pixel when the present invention is applied to the method. (A in FIG.
) Is a cross-sectional view of the pixel, and FIG. 71B is a top view of the pixel. In addition, (
The cross-sectional view of the pixel shown in A) corresponds to a line segment aa ′ in the top view of the pixel shown in FIG. By applying the present invention to the liquid crystal display device having the pixel structure shown in FIG.
In principle, a liquid crystal display device having a large viewing angle and a small dependence of response speed on gradation can be obtained.

A pixel structure of an FFS liquid crystal display device is described with reference to FIG. The liquid crystal display device has a basic part that displays an image, called a liquid crystal panel. A liquid crystal panel is manufactured by bonding two processed substrates together with a gap of several μm and injecting a liquid crystal material between the two substrates. In FIG. 71A, the two substrates are a first substrate 6301 and a second substrate 6316. A TFT and a pixel electrode may be manufactured on the first substrate, and a light shielding film 6314, a color filter 6315, a spacer 6317, and a second alignment film 6312 may be manufactured on the second substrate.

Note that the present invention can be implemented without manufacturing TFTs on the first substrate 6301. TFT
In the case where the present invention is carried out without manufacturing the manufacturing cost, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. on the other hand,
When the present invention is implemented by manufacturing a TFT, a larger display device can be obtained.

Note that the TFT illustrated in FIG. 71 is a bottom-gate TFT using an amorphous semiconductor, and has an advantage of being inexpensively manufactured using a large-area substrate. However, the present invention is not limited to this. TFT structures that can be used include a channel etch type, a channel protection type, and the like for bottom-gate TFTs. A top gate type may also be used. Furthermore, not only an amorphous semiconductor but also a polycrystalline semiconductor can be used.

Note that the present invention can be implemented without forming the light-shielding film 6314 on the second substrate 6316. In the case where the present invention is implemented without forming the light-shielding film 6314, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, in the case where the light-blocking film 6314 is formed and the present invention is implemented, a display device with little light leakage during black display can be obtained.

Note that the present invention can be implemented without forming the color filter 6315 on the second substrate 6316. In the case where the present invention is implemented without manufacturing the color filter 6315, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the color filter 6315 is manufactured and the present invention is implemented, a display device capable of color display can be obtained.

Note that the present invention can be implemented by spraying spherical spacers without forming the spacers 6317 on the second substrate 6316. When the present invention is carried out by spraying spherical spacers, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, in the case where the spacer 6317 is manufactured and the present invention is carried out, since the position of the spacer does not vary, the distance between the two substrates can be made uniform, and a display device with little display unevenness can be obtained. Can do.

Next, processing performed on the first substrate 6301 may be omitted because the method described in FIG. 33 may be used. Here, the first substrate 6301, the first insulating film 6302, the first conductive layer 6
303, the second insulating film 6304, the first semiconductor layer 6305, the second semiconductor layer 6306, the second conductive layer 6307, the third insulating film 6308, the third conductive layer 6309, and the first alignment film 63.
10 are the first substrate 6001, the first insulating film 6002, the first conductive layer 6003, the second insulating film 6004, the first semiconductor layer 6005, and the second semiconductor layer 60 in FIG. 33, respectively.
06, the second conductive layer 6007, the third insulating film 6008, the third conductive film 6009, and the first alignment film 6010.

However, the difference from FIG. 33 is that a fourth insulating film 6319 and a fourth conductive layer 6313 may be formed on the first substrate 6301 side. More specifically, the third conductive layer 63
After performing pattern processing on 09, a fourth insulating film 6319 is formed, and after pattern processing is performed to form a contact hole, a fourth conductive layer 6313 is formed, and pattern processing is similarly performed. Thereafter, the first alignment film 6310 may be formed. Note that materials and processing methods that can be used for the fourth insulating film 6319 and the fourth conductive layer 6313 can be the same as those used for the third insulating film 6308 and the third conductive layer 6309. One comb-like electrode may be electrically connected to one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the TFT 6324, and the other uniform electrode may be electrically connected to the common electrode 6323. By doing so, a horizontal electric field can be effectively applied to the liquid crystal molecules 6318.

The first substrate 6301 manufactured as described above, the light shielding film 6314, and the color filter 6315.
The second substrate 6316 on which the spacer 6317 and the second alignment film 6312 are manufactured is bonded with a sealant with a gap of several μm, and a liquid crystal material is injected between the two substrates, whereby a liquid crystal material is injected. Panels can be made. Although not shown, on the second substrate 6316 side,
A conductive layer may be formed. By forming the conductive layer on the second substrate 6316 side, the influence of electromagnetic noise from the outside can be reduced.

Next, characteristics of the pixel structure of the FFS mode liquid crystal panel illustrated in FIG. 71 will be described. FIG.
A liquid crystal molecule 6318 shown in (A) of 1 is an elongated molecule having a major axis and a minor axis. In order to show the direction of the liquid crystal molecules 6318, the length is expressed in FIG. 71A. That is, the longer expressed liquid crystal molecule 6318 has a long axis direction parallel to the paper surface, and the shorter expressed liquid crystal molecule 6318 has a longer axis direction closer to the normal direction of the paper surface. . That is, the liquid crystal molecules 6318 shown in FIG. 71A are aligned so that the direction of the major axis is always in the horizontal direction to the substrate. In FIG. 71A, the alignment is shown in the absence of an electric field. However, when an electric field is applied to the liquid crystal molecules 6318, the orientation of the major axis always remains horizontal with the substrate. Rotate within. In this state, a liquid crystal display device with a large viewing angle can be obtained.

Next, an example of a pixel layout when the present invention is applied to an FFS liquid crystal display device will be described with reference to FIG. A pixel of an FFS mode liquid crystal display device to which the present invention is applied includes a scanning line 6321, a video signal line 6322, a common electrode 6323, and a TFT 6.
324 and a pixel electrode 6325 may be provided.

The scan line 6321 is preferably formed using the first conductive layer 6303 because it is electrically connected to the gate electrode of the TFT 6324.

Since the video signal line 6322 is electrically connected to the source electrode or the drain electrode of the TFT 6324, the video signal line 6322 is preferably formed using the second conductive layer 6307. Also, the scanning line 63
21 and the video signal line 6322 are arranged in a matrix form, it is preferable that they are formed of at least different conductive layers. As shown in FIG. 71B, the video signal line 6
322 may be bent in the pixel so as to match the shape of the pixel electrode 6325. By doing so, the aperture ratio of the pixel can be increased, so that the efficiency of the liquid crystal display device can be improved.

The common electrode 6323 is an electrode for generating a horizontal electric field by being arranged in parallel with the pixel electrode 6325, and includes the first conductive layer 6303 and the third conductive layer 6309. Is preferred. As shown in FIG. 71B, the common electrode 6323 may be formed in a shape along the video signal line 6322. In this way, the video signal line 63
A phenomenon in which the potential of the electrode that should hold the potential changes, that is, so-called crosstalk, can be reduced with the change in the potential 22. Note that in order to reduce cross capacitance with the video signal line 6322, the first semiconductor layer 6305 is formed with the common electrode 6323 as illustrated in FIG.
And the video signal line 6322 may be provided.

The TFT 6324 operates as a switch for electrically connecting the video signal line 6322 and the pixel electrode 6325. As shown in FIG. 71B, either the source region or the drain region of the TFT 6324 may be arranged so as to surround the other of the source region or the drain region. By doing so, a large channel width can be obtained with a small area, and the switching capability can be increased. As shown in FIG. 71B, the TFT 6324
The gate electrode may be disposed so as to surround the first semiconductor layer 6305.

The pixel electrode 6325 is electrically connected to one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the TFT 6324. The pixel electrode 6325 is an electrode for applying a signal voltage transmitted through the video signal line 6322 to the liquid crystal element. Further, a common electrode 6323 and a pixel capacitor may be formed. Thus, the signal voltage transmitted through the video signal line 6322 can be held. Note that the pixel electrode 6325 is preferably formed in a bent comb-like shape as illustrated in FIG. Thus, a plurality of regions with different alignment of the liquid crystal molecules 6318 can be formed, so that a liquid crystal display device with a wide viewing angle can be obtained. In the case where the pixel electrode 6325 and the comb-like common electrode 6323 are formed using a transparent material, a transmissive liquid crystal display device can be obtained. A transmissive liquid crystal display device has high color reproducibility and can display an image with high image quality. In the case where the pixel electrode 6325 and the comb-like common electrode 6323 are formed using a reflective material, a reflective liquid crystal display device can be obtained. The reflective liquid crystal display device has high visibility in a bright environment such as outdoors and does not require a backlight, so that power consumption can be extremely reduced. Note that in the case where the pixel electrode 6325 and the comb-like common electrode 6323 are formed using both a transparent material and a reflective material, a transflective liquid crystal display device having both advantages is obtained. Can be obtained. Note that in the case where the pixel electrode 6325 and the comb-shaped common electrode 6323 are formed using a reflective material, the surface of the pixel electrode 6325 and the comb-shaped common electrode 6323 may be uneven. By doing so, since the reflected light is irregularly reflected, there is an advantage that the angle dependence of the intensity distribution of the reflected light is reduced. That is, it is possible to obtain a reflective liquid crystal display device having a certain brightness at any angle.

Although the comb-like pixel electrode 6325 is formed of the fourth conductive layer 6313 and the uniform common electrode 6323 is formed of the third conductive layer 6309, the pixel configuration to which the present invention can be applied is described. Is not limited to this, and can be appropriately selected as long as a certain condition is satisfied. More specifically, it is only necessary that the comb-like electrode is positioned closer to the liquid crystal than the uniform electrode when viewed from the first substrate 6301. This is because the horizontal electric field is always generated in the opposite direction to the uniform electrode when viewed from the comb-like electrode. That is, in order to apply a lateral electric field to the liquid crystal, the comb-like electrode must be positioned closer to the liquid crystal than the uniform electrode.

In order to satisfy this condition, for example, a comb-shaped electrode may be formed of the fourth conductive layer 6313, a uniform electrode may be formed of the third conductive layer 6309, or a comb-shaped electrode may be formed. Fourth conductive layer 631
3, a uniform electrode may be formed by the second conductive layer 6307, a comb-shaped electrode may be formed by the fourth conductive layer 6313, and the uniform electrode may be formed by the first conductive layer 6307. 6303, or
A comb-like electrode may be formed of the third conductive layer 6309, a uniform electrode may be formed of the second conductive layer 6307, or a comb-like electrode may be formed of the third conductive layer 6309. A uniform electrode may be formed using the first conductive layer 6303, a comb-like electrode may be formed using the second conductive layer 6307, and a uniform electrode may be formed using the first conductive layer 6303. May be. Note that the comb-like electrode is a TFT 632.
4, and the uniform electrode is electrically connected to the common electrode 6323, but this connection may be reversed. In that case, a uniform electrode may be formed independently for each pixel.

As an example, with reference to FIG. 72A, as a display device using a light-emitting element, two pixels are included in one pixel.
It is an example of a top view (layout diagram) of a pixel having two transistors. FIG. 72B is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the line XX ′ illustrated in FIG.

FIG. 72A illustrates a first transistor 60105, a first wiring 60106, and a second wiring 6
0107, the second transistor 60108, the third wiring 60111, the counter electrode 60112
, Capacitor 60113, pixel electrode 60115, partition wall 60116, organic conductor film 6011
7 shows an organic thin film 60118 and a substrate 60119. The first transistor 6
0105 is a switching transistor, the first wiring 60106 is a gate signal line, the second wiring 60107 is a source signal line, the second transistor 60108 is a driving transistor, and the third wiring 60111 is a current supply line. Are preferably used respectively.

The gate electrode of the first transistor 60105 is electrically connected to the first wiring 60106, one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the first transistor 60105 is electrically connected to the second wiring 60107, and The other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of one transistor 60105 is a gate electrode of the second transistor 60108 and a capacitor 60113
Is electrically connected to one of the electrodes. Note that the gate electrode of the first transistor 60105 includes a plurality of gate electrodes. Thus, leakage current in the off state of the first transistor 60105 can be reduced.

One of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the second transistor 60108 is connected to the third wiring 60.
111, and the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the second transistor 60108 is electrically connected to the pixel electrode 60115. Accordingly, the current flowing through the pixel electrode 60115 can be controlled by the second transistor 60108.

An organic conductor film 60117 is provided on the pixel electrode 60115, and the organic thin film 601 is further provided.
18 (organic compound layer) is provided. On the organic thin film 60118 (organic compound layer),
A counter electrode 60112 is provided. Note that the counter electrode 60112 may be formed on one surface so as to be commonly connected to all pixels, or may be patterned using a shadow mask or the like.

Light emitted from the organic thin film 60118 (organic compound layer) is transmitted through either the pixel electrode 60115 or the counter electrode 60112.

In FIG. 72B, the case where light is emitted to the pixel electrode side, that is, the side where a transistor or the like is formed is called bottom emission, and the case where light is emitted to the counter electrode side is called top emission.

In the case of bottom emission, the pixel electrode 60115 is preferably formed using a transparent conductive film.
Conversely, in the case of top emission, the counter electrode 60112 is preferably formed using a transparent conductive film.

In a light emitting device for color display, EL elements having emission colors of R, G, and B may be applied separately, or a single color EL element is applied on one side, and R, G, and B light emission is obtained by a color filter. You may do it.

The configuration illustrated in FIG. 72 is merely an example, and various configurations other than the configuration illustrated in FIG. 72 can be employed with respect to the pixel layout, the cross-sectional configuration, the stacking order of the electrodes of the EL element, and the like. For the light emitting layer, various elements such as a crystalline element such as an LED and an element composed of an inorganic thin film can be used in addition to the element composed of the illustrated organic thin film.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing of this embodiment can be applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (or part of the contents) described in the drawings of another embodiment. Etc. can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.
(Embodiment 9)

In this embodiment, a method for driving a display device will be described. In particular, a method for driving a liquid crystal display device will be described.

A liquid crystal panel that can be used in the liquid crystal display device described in this embodiment has a structure in which a liquid crystal material is sandwiched between two substrates. Each of the two substrates includes an electrode for controlling an electric field applied to the liquid crystal material. A liquid crystal material is a material whose optical and electrical properties are changed by an electric field applied from the outside. Therefore, the liquid crystal panel
It is a device that can obtain desired optical and electrical properties by controlling a voltage applied to a liquid crystal material using an electrode of a substrate. A liquid crystal panel capable of displaying a fine image can be obtained by arranging a large number of electrodes side by side to form a pixel and individually controlling the voltage applied to the pixel.

Here, the response time of the liquid crystal material to the change in electric field is the distance between two substrates (cell gap).
Although it depends on the type of liquid crystal material, it is generally several milliseconds to several tens of milliseconds. Furthermore, when the change amount of the electric field is small, the response time of the liquid crystal material is further increased. This property causes obstacles in image display such as afterimages, tailing, and contrast reduction when displaying moving images on a liquid crystal panel, especially when changing from halftone to another halftone (change in electric field). Is small), the above-mentioned degree of failure becomes significant.

On the other hand, a problem peculiar to a liquid crystal panel using an active matrix is a change in write voltage due to constant charge driving. Hereinafter, constant charge driving in the present embodiment will be described.

A pixel circuit in the active matrix includes a switch for controlling writing and a capacitor for holding charge. The driving method of the pixel circuit in the active matrix is that the switch is turned on and a predetermined voltage is written in the pixel circuit, and then the switch is turned off and the charge in the pixel circuit is held (hold state). In the hold state, no charge is exchanged between the inside and outside of the pixel circuit (constant charge). Usually, the period in which the switch is off is several hundred times (the number of scanning lines) times longer than the period in which the switch is on. Therefore, it can be considered that the switch of the pixel circuit is almost off.
From the above, it is assumed that the constant charge driving in the present embodiment is a driving method in which the pixel circuit is in a hold state in most periods when the liquid crystal panel is driven.

Next, electrical characteristics of the liquid crystal material will be described. In the liquid crystal material, when the electric field applied from the outside changes, the optical properties change and the dielectric constant also changes. That is, when each pixel of the liquid crystal panel is considered as a capacitive element (liquid crystal element) sandwiched between two electrodes, the capacitive element is a capacitive element whose capacitance changes according to an applied voltage. This phenomenon is called dynamic capacitance.

As described above, when the capacitive element whose capacitance is changed by the applied voltage is driven by the above-described constant charge driving, the following problem occurs. That is, there is a problem that when the capacitance of the liquid crystal element changes in the hold state where no charge is transferred, the applied voltage also changes. This can be understood from the fact that the charge amount is constant in the relational expression (charge amount) = (capacitance) × (applied voltage).

For the above reasons, in the liquid crystal panel using the active matrix, the voltage in the hold state changes from the voltage in the writing state due to the constant charge driving. As a result, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is different from the change in the driving method that does not take the hold state. This is shown in FIG. FIG. 42A shows a control example of the voltage written in the pixel circuit, with time on the horizontal axis and absolute value of voltage on the vertical axis. FIG. 42B shows a control example of the voltage written to the pixel circuit when the horizontal axis represents time and the vertical axis represents voltage. In FIG. 42C, time is plotted on the horizontal axis and transmittance of the liquid crystal element is plotted on the vertical axis.
FIG. 43 shows a change over time in the transmittance of the liquid crystal element when the voltage shown in FIG. 42A or FIG. 42B is written to the pixel circuit. In FIGS. 42A to 42C, a period F represents a voltage rewriting period, and the time for rewriting the voltage is described as t ₁ , t ₂ , t ₃ , and t ₄ .

Here, the writing voltage corresponding to the image data input to the liquid crystal display device is | V ₁ | for rewriting at time 0, and | V ₂ | for rewriting at times t ₁ , t ₂ , t ₃ , and t ₄ . And (See FIG. 42 (A))

Note that the polarity of the writing voltage corresponding to the image data input to the liquid crystal display device may be periodically switched. (Inversion driving: see FIG. 42B) By this method, it is possible to prevent a direct current voltage from being applied to the liquid crystal as much as possible, so that burn-in due to deterioration of the liquid crystal element can be prevented. Note that the polarity switching period (inversion period) may be the same as the voltage rewriting period. In this case, since the inversion cycle is short, occurrence of flicker due to inversion driving can be reduced. Further, the inversion cycle may be a cycle that is an integral multiple of the voltage rewrite cycle. In this case, since the inversion period is long and the frequency of writing the voltage by changing the polarity can be reduced, the power consumption can be reduced.

FIG. 42C shows the change over time in the transmittance of the liquid crystal element when a voltage as shown in FIG. 42A or FIG. 42B is applied to the liquid crystal element. Here, the voltage | V ₁ is applied to the liquid crystal element.
| Is applied, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element after enough time passes corresponds to TR _1. Similarly, the transmissivity of the liquid crystal element after the voltage | V ₂ | is applied to the liquid crystal element and a sufficient time has elapsed is defined as TR ₂ . When the voltage applied to the liquid crystal element changes from | V ₁ | to | V ₂ | at time t ₁ , the transmittance of the liquid crystal element does not immediately become TR ₂ as indicated by a broken line 30401, It changes slowly. For example, the rewriting period of the voltage, when the same as the frame period of the image signal of 60 Hz (16.7 msec), until the transmittance is changed to TR _2, it is necessary to time of several frames.

However, the smooth transmittance change with time as indicated by a broken line 30401 is obtained when the voltage | V ₂ | is accurately applied to the liquid crystal element. In an actual liquid crystal panel, for example, a liquid crystal panel using an active matrix, the voltage in the hold state changes from the voltage in the writing state due to constant charge driving. Instead of the time change as shown in FIG. 2, instead of the time change as shown by the solid line 30402. This is because the voltage changes due to the constant charge driving, and the target voltage cannot be reached by one writing. As a result, the response time of the transmissivity of the liquid crystal element is apparently longer than the original response time (broken line 30401), and there are noticeable obstacles in image display such as afterimage, tailing, and contrast reduction. It will cause.

By using overdrive drive, the inherent response time of the liquid crystal element and the die
Apparent response due to lack of writing due to dynamic capacitance and constant charge drive
The phenomenon that the time is further prolonged can be solved simultaneously. This is shown in the figure
43. In FIG. 43A, the horizontal axis represents time, the vertical axis represents the absolute value of voltage, and is written to the pixel circuit.
This shows an example of controlling the voltage to be inserted. In FIG. 43B, time is plotted on the horizontal axis and voltage is plotted on the vertical axis.
This shows an example of controlling the voltage to be written to the pixel circuit in the case of the above. 43C shows the horizontal axis.
Is the time, and the vertical axis is the transmittance of the liquid crystal element, which is shown in FIG.
This shows the change over time in the transmittance of the liquid crystal element when the measured voltage is written to the pixel circuit.
. 43A to 43C, a period F represents a voltage rewrite cycle, and the voltage is rewritten.
T ₁ , T ₂ , T ₃ , T ₄ Will be described.

Here, the writing voltage corresponding to the image data input to the liquid crystal display device is | V ₁ | for rewriting at time 0, | V ₃ | for rewriting at time t ₁ , and times t ₂ , t ₃ , t.
It is assumed that the rewriting in ₄ is | V ₂ |. (Refer to FIG. 43 (A))

Note that the polarity of the writing voltage corresponding to the image data input to the liquid crystal display device may be periodically switched. (Inverted drive: see FIG. 43B) By this method, it is possible to prevent a direct current voltage from being applied to the liquid crystal as much as possible, so that burn-in or the like due to deterioration of the liquid crystal element can be prevented. Note that the polarity switching period (inversion period) may be the same as the voltage rewriting period. In this case, since the inversion cycle is short, occurrence of flicker due to inversion driving can be reduced. Further, the inversion cycle may be a cycle that is an integral multiple of the voltage rewrite cycle. In this case, since the inversion period is long and the frequency of writing the voltage by changing the polarity can be reduced, the power consumption can be reduced.

FIG. 43C shows a change over time in the transmittance of the liquid crystal element when a voltage as shown in FIG. 43A or 43B is applied to the liquid crystal element. Here, the voltage | V ₁ is applied to the liquid crystal element.
| Is applied, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element after enough time passes corresponds to TR _1. Similarly, the transmissivity of the liquid crystal element after the voltage | V ₂ | is applied to the liquid crystal element and a sufficient time has elapsed is defined as TR ₂ . Similarly, the voltage | V ₃ | is applied to the liquid crystal element, and the transmittance of the liquid crystal element after a sufficient time has elapsed is defined as TR ₃ . At time t ₁ , the voltage applied to the liquid crystal element changes from | V ₁ | to | V
_When it changes to ₃ |, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element tends to change to TR ₃ over several frames as indicated by a broken line 30501. However, the voltage | _{V 3} | applied at the end at time _{t 2,} later than time _{t 2,} the voltage | _{V 2} | is applied. Therefore, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is not as indicated by the broken line 30501 but as indicated by the solid line 30502. here,
It is preferable to set the value of the voltage | V ₃ | so that the transmittance is approximately TR ₂ at the time t ₂ . Here, the voltage | V ₃ | is also referred to as an overdrive voltage.

That is, by changing the overdrive voltage | V ₃ |, the response time of the liquid crystal element can be controlled to some extent. This is because the response time of the liquid crystal changes depending on the strength of the electric field. Specifically, the stronger the electric field, the shorter the response time of the liquid crystal element, and the weaker the electric field, the longer the response time of the liquid crystal element.

The overdrive voltage | V ₃ | is preferably changed according to the amount of voltage change, that is, the voltages | V ₁ | and | V ₂ | that give the desired transmittances TR ₁ and TR _2. . This is because even if the response time of the liquid crystal element changes depending on the amount of change in voltage, the optimum response time can always be obtained by changing the overdrive voltage | V ₃ | accordingly. is there.

The overdrive voltage | V ₃ | is preferably changed according to the mode of the liquid crystal such as TN, VA, IPS, and OCB. This is because even if the response speed of the liquid crystal varies depending on the mode of the liquid crystal, an optimal response time can always be obtained by changing the overdrive voltage | V ₃ | accordingly.

Note that the voltage rewrite cycle F may be the same as the frame cycle of the input signal. In this case, since the peripheral drive circuit of the liquid crystal display device can be simplified, a liquid crystal display device with low manufacturing cost can be obtained.

Note that the voltage rewrite cycle F may be shorter than the frame cycle of the input signal. For example,
The voltage rewriting period F may be 1/2 times the frame period of the input signal, may be 1/3 times, or may be less than that. This method is effective when used in combination with measures for reducing the quality of moving images caused by hold driving of liquid crystal display devices, such as black insertion driving, backlight blinking, backlight scanning, and intermediate image insertion driving by motion compensation. is there. That is, since the response time of the required liquid crystal element is short because the countermeasure method for the deterioration of the moving image quality caused by the hold driving of the liquid crystal display device is relatively easy by using the overdrive driving method described in this embodiment. In addition, the response time of the liquid crystal element can be shortened. Although the response time of the liquid crystal element can be essentially shortened by the cell gap, the liquid crystal material, the liquid crystal mode, and the like, it is technically difficult. Therefore, it is very important to use a method of shortening the response time of the liquid crystal element from the driving method such as overdrive.

Note that the voltage rewriting period F may be longer than the frame period of the input signal. For example,
The voltage rewrite period F may be twice, three times, or more than the frame period of the input signal. This method is effective when used in combination with means (circuit) for determining whether or not voltage rewriting is not performed for a long period of time. That is, when the voltage is not rewritten for a long time, the operation of the circuit can be stopped during the period by not performing the voltage rewriting operation itself, so that a liquid crystal display device with low power consumption is obtained. Can do.

Next, a specific method for changing the overdrive voltage | V ₃ | according to the voltages | V ₁ | and | V ₂ | that give the desired transmittances TR ₁ and TR ₂ will be described.

The overdrive circuit is a circuit for appropriately controlling the overdrive voltage | V ₃ | according to the voltages | V ₁ | and | V ₂ | that give the desired transmittances TR ₁ and TR _2. The signal input to the drive circuit is a voltage | V that gives the transmittance TR _1
1 | and a signal related to the voltage | V ₂ | giving the transmittance TR ₂ , and a signal output from the overdrive circuit is a signal related to the overdrive voltage | V ₃ |. Here, as these signals, voltages applied to the liquid crystal element (| V ₁ |, | V ₂ |
, | V ₃ |) or a digital signal for applying a voltage to be applied to the liquid crystal element. Here, it is assumed that the signal related to the overdrive circuit is a digital signal.

First, an overall configuration of the overdrive circuit will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the input image signal 301 is used as a signal for controlling the overdrive voltage.
01a and 30101b are used. As a result of processing these signals, an output image signal 30104 is output as a signal for giving an overdrive voltage.

Here, voltages | V ₁ | and | V ₂ | that give the desired transmittances TR ₁ and TR ₂ are:
Since the image signals are in frames adjacent to each other, the input image signals 30101a and 30101b are also preferably image signals in frames adjacent to each other. In order to obtain such a signal, the input image signal 30101a is input to the delay circuit 30102 in FIG.
1b. An example of the delay circuit 30102 is a memory. That is, in order to delay the input image signal 30101a by one frame, the input image signal 30101a is stored in the memory, and at the same time, the signal stored in the previous frame is stored in the memory as the input image signal 30101b. The input image signal 30101a and the input image signal 30101b are input to the correction circuit 30103 at the same time, so that image signals in adjacent frames can be handled. Then, by inputting image signals in adjacent frames to the correction circuit 30103, an output image signal 30104 can be obtained. Note that when a memory is used as the delay circuit 30102, a memory having a capacity capable of storing an image signal for one frame (that is, a frame memory) can be used in order to delay by one frame. By doing so, it is possible to have a function as a delay circuit without excessive or insufficient memory capacity.

Next, a delay circuit 30102 configured mainly for the purpose of reducing the memory capacity will be described. By using such a circuit as the delay circuit 30102, the memory capacity can be reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

As the delay circuit 30102 having such characteristics, specifically, a delay circuit as shown in FIG. 44B can be used. A delay circuit 30102 illustrated in FIG. 44B includes an encoder 30105, a memory 30106, and a decoder 30107.

The operation of the delay circuit 30102 shown in FIG. 44 (B) is as follows. First, before storing the input image signal 30101a in the memory 30106, the encoder 3010
5 is used to perform compression processing. As a result, the size of data to be stored in the memory 30106 can be reduced. As a result, since the memory capacity can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Then, the compressed image signal is sent to the decoder 30107 where the decompression process is performed. As a result, the encoder 30105
It is possible to restore the previous signal that has been compressed. Here, the encoder 3010
5 and the decoder 30107 may be a reversible process. In this way, since the image signal is not deteriorated even after the compression / decompression process, the memory capacity can be reduced without degrading the quality of the image finally displayed on the apparatus. Further, the compression / decompression process performed by the encoder 30105 and the decoder 30107 may be an irreversible process. By doing so, the data size of the image signal after compression can be made very small, so that the memory capacity can be greatly reduced.

As a method for reducing the capacity of the memory, various methods can be used in addition to the methods listed above. Rather than compressing the image with an encoder, the color information of the image signal is reduced (for example, the color is reduced from 260,000 colors to 65,000 colors) or the number of data is reduced (the resolution is reduced). The method can be used.

Next, a specific example of the correction circuit 30103 will be described with reference to FIGS. The correction circuit 30103 is a circuit for outputting an output image signal having a certain value from two input image signals. Here, when the relationship between the two input image signals and the output image signal is non-linear and it is difficult to obtain by a simple calculation, a lookup table (LUT) may be used as the correction circuit 30103. Since the relationship between the two input image signals and the output image signal is obtained in advance in the LUT by measurement, the output image signals corresponding to the two input image signals can be obtained only by referring to the LUT. (See FIG. 44C.) By using the LUT 30108 as the correction circuit 30103, the correction circuit 30103 can be realized without complicated circuit design or the like.

Here, since the LUT is one of the memories, it is preferable to reduce the memory capacity as much as possible in order to reduce the manufacturing cost. As an example of the correction circuit 30103 for realizing this, a circuit shown in FIG. 44D can be considered. The correction circuit 30103 shown in FIG.
Includes an LUT 30109 and an adder 30110. The LUT 30109 stores difference data between the input image signal 30101a and the output image signal 30104 to be output. That is, corresponding difference data is extracted from the LUT 30109 from the input image signal 30101a and the input image signal 30101b, and the extracted difference data and the input image signal 30 are extracted.
The output image signal 30104 can be obtained by adding 101a by the adder 30110. Note that the data stored in the LUT 30109 is the difference data, so that L
Reduction of the memory capacity of the UT can be realized. This is because the output image signal 30104 as it is.
This is because the data size of the difference data is smaller than that of the differential data, so that the memory capacity required for the LUT 30109 can be reduced.

Further, if the output image signal can be obtained by a simple operation such as four arithmetic operations of two input image signals, it can be realized by a combination of simple circuits such as an adder, a subtracter, and a multiplier.
As a result, it is not necessary to use an LUT, and the manufacturing cost can be greatly reduced.
As such a circuit, a circuit shown in FIG. 44 (
E) includes a subtractor 30111, a multiplier 30112, and an adder 3
0113. First, a subtracter 30111 obtains a difference between the input image signal 30101a and the input image signal 30101b. Thereafter, the multiplier 30112 multiplies the difference value by an appropriate coefficient. Then, an output image signal 30104 can be obtained by adding a difference value obtained by multiplying the input image signal 30101a by an appropriate coefficient by the adder 30113. By using such a circuit, it is not necessary to use an LUT, and the manufacturing cost can be greatly reduced.

Note that by using the correction circuit 30103 illustrated in FIG. 44E under certain conditions, output of an inappropriate output image signal 30104 can be prevented. The conditions include an output image signal 30104 that gives an overdrive voltage and an input image signal 30101.
The difference value between a and the input image signal 30101b is linear. Then, the linearity gradient is used as a coefficient multiplied by the multiplier 30112. That is, it is preferable to use a correction circuit 30103 shown in FIG. 44E for a liquid crystal element having such properties. As a liquid crystal element having such properties, an IPS mode liquid crystal element in which the response speed is small in gradation dependency can be given. In this manner, for example, by using the correction circuit 30103 shown in FIG. 44E for the IPS mode liquid crystal element, the manufacturing cost can be significantly reduced.
In addition, it is possible to obtain an overdrive circuit that can prevent an inappropriate output image signal 30104 from being output.

Note that the same function as the circuits shown in FIGS. 44A to 44E may be realized by software processing. As for the memory used for the delay circuit, other memory included in the liquid crystal display device, memory included in a device that sends an image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device (for example, a video card included in a personal computer or a similar device, etc.) Can be diverted. By doing so, not only can the manufacturing cost be reduced, but also the user can select the strength of overdrive, the situation of use, etc. according to his / her preference.

Next, driving for manipulating the potential of the common line will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (
A) shows a plurality of pixel circuits when one common line is arranged for one scanning line in a display device using a capacitive display element such as a liquid crystal element. FIG. The pixel circuit shown in FIG. 45A includes a transistor 30201, an auxiliary capacitor 30202, a display element 30203, a video signal line 30204, a scanning line 30205, and a common line 30206.

The gate electrode of the transistor 30201 is electrically connected to the scan line 30205, one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 30201 is electrically connected to the video signal line 30204, and the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 30201 Are electrically connected to one electrode of the auxiliary capacitor 30202 and one electrode of the display element 30203.
The other electrode of the auxiliary capacitor 30202 is electrically connected to the common line 30206.

First, in the pixel selected by the scanning line 30205, the transistor 30201 is turned on, so that the display element 30203 and the auxiliary capacitor 3 are connected through the video signal line 30204, respectively.
A voltage corresponding to the video signal is applied to 0202. At this time, the video signal is the common line 30.
When the lowest gradation is displayed for all the pixels connected to 206, or when the highest gradation is displayed for all the pixels connected to the common line 30206, the pixel It is not necessary to write a video signal via the video signal line 30204 respectively.
Instead of writing a video signal through the video signal line 30204, the voltage applied to the display element 30203 can be changed by moving the potential of the common line 30206.

Next, FIG. 45B shows a display device using a display element having a capacitive property such as a liquid crystal element when two common lines are arranged for one scanning line. It is a figure showing a plurality of pixel circuits. A pixel circuit illustrated in FIG. 45B includes a transistor 30211, an auxiliary capacitor 30212, a display element 30213, a video signal line 30214, a scanning line 30215, a first common line 30216, and a second common line 30217. .

The gate electrode of the transistor 30211 is electrically connected to the scan line 30215, one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 30211 is electrically connected to the video signal line 30214, and the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 30211 Is electrically connected to one electrode of the auxiliary capacitor 30212 and one electrode of the display element 30213.
In addition, the other electrode of the auxiliary capacitor 30212 is electrically connected to the first common line 30216.
In the pixel adjacent to the pixel, the other electrode of the auxiliary capacitor 30212 is electrically connected to the second common line 30217.

In the pixel circuit illustrated in FIG. 45B, the number of pixels electrically connected to one common line is small, and thus the first common line 30216 is used instead of writing a video signal through the video signal line 30214. Alternatively, the frequency with which the voltage applied to the display element 30213 can be changed by moving the potential of the second common line 30217 is significantly increased. Further, source inversion driving or dot inversion driving is possible. By source inversion driving or dot inversion driving, flicker can be suppressed while improving element reliability.

Next, the scanning backlight will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46A is a diagram showing a scanning backlight in which cold cathode fluorescent lamps are juxtaposed. The scanning backlight shown in FIG. 46A includes a diffusion plate 30301 and N cold cathode tubes 30302-1 to 30302 -N. N cold cathode tubes 30302-1 to 30302 -N are juxtaposed behind the diffuser plate 30301, so that the N cold cathode tubes 30302-1 to 30302 -N scan with varying luminance. Can do.

A change in luminance of each cold cathode tube during scanning will be described with reference to FIG. First, the luminance of the cold cathode fluorescent lamp 30302-1 is changed for a certain time. Then, after that, the cold cathode tube 30
The luminance of the cold cathode fluorescent lamp 30302-2 arranged next to 302-1 is changed for the same time. In this way, the luminance is changed in order from the cold cathode fluorescent lamps 30302-1 to 30302-N. In FIG. 46C, the luminance to be changed for a certain time is smaller than the original luminance, but may be larger than the original luminance. Also, cold cathode fluorescent lamps 30302-1 to 3030
Although scanning up to 2-N is performed, scanning from cold cathode fluorescent lamps 30302-N to 30302-1 may be performed in the reverse direction.

By driving as shown in FIG. 46, the average luminance of the backlight can be reduced. Therefore, the power consumption of the backlight, which accounts for most of the power consumption of the liquid crystal display device, can be reduced.

An LED may be used as the light source of the scanning backlight. The scanning backlight in that case is as shown in FIG. The scanning backlight shown in FIG. 46B includes a diffusion plate 30311 and light sources 30312-1 to 30312 -N in which LEDs are juxtaposed. When the LED is used as the light source of the scanning backlight, the backlight is thin,
There is an advantage that can be lightened. Further, there is an advantage that the color reproduction range can be expanded. Further, LEs juxtaposed on each of the light sources 30312-1 to 30312 -N juxtaposed with LEDs.
Since D can also be scanned in the same manner, it can also be a dot scanning backlight.
If the point scanning type is adopted, the image quality of the moving image can be further improved.

Note that even when an LED is used as the light source of the backlight, it can be driven with the luminance changed as shown in FIG.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (may be a part) described in each drawing of this embodiment are applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (may be a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.
(Embodiment 10)

In this embodiment, the operation of the display device will be described.

FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a display device.

The display device 180100 includes a pixel portion 180101, a signal line driver circuit 180103, and a scan line driver circuit 180104. In the pixel portion 180101, a plurality of signal lines S1 to Sm are arranged to extend from the signal line driver circuit 180103 in the column direction. Pixel portion 180101
A plurality of scanning lines G 1 to Gn are arranged extending in the row direction from the scanning line driving circuit 180104. The pixels 180102 are arranged in a matrix where the plurality of signal lines S1 to Sm and the plurality of scanning lines G1 to Gn intersect each other.

Note that the signal line driver circuit 180103 has a function of outputting a signal to each of the signal lines S1 to Sn. This signal may be called a video signal. Note that the scan line driver circuit 180104
Has a function of outputting a signal to each of the scanning lines G1 to Gm. This signal may be called a scanning signal.

Note that the pixel 180102 includes at least a switching element connected to the signal line. This switching element is controlled to be turned on and off by the potential of the scanning line (scanning signal). The pixel 180102 is selected when the switching element is on, and the pixel 180102 is not selected when the switching element is off.

When the pixel 180102 is selected (selected state), a video signal is input from the signal line to the pixel 180102. Then, the state of the pixel 180102 (eg, luminance, transmittance, storage capacitor voltage, etc.) changes in accordance with the input video signal.

When the pixel 180102 is not selected (non-selected state), the video signal is the pixel 1801.
02 is not entered. However, since the pixel 180102 holds a potential corresponding to the video signal input at the time of selection, the pixel 180102 maintains the voltage (for example, luminance, transmittance, storage capacitor voltage, etc.) corresponding to the video signal.

Note that the structure of the display device is not limited to FIG. For example, a wiring (a scanning line, a signal line, a power supply line, a capacitor line, a common line, or the like) may be newly added depending on the structure of the pixel 180102. As another example, a circuit having various functions may be added.

FIG. 82 shows an example of a timing chart for explaining the operation of the display device.

The timing chart in FIG. 82 shows one frame period corresponding to a period during which an image for one screen is displayed. There is no particular limitation on the period of one frame, but the person who sees the image flickers (flicker)
It is preferable to set it to at least 1/60 second or less so as not to feel the above.

The timing chart of FIG. 82 shows the first scanning line G1, the i-th scanning line Gi (scanning line G1).
1 to Gm), i + 1-th scanning line Gi + 1 and m-th scanning line Gm are respectively selected.

Note that at the same time as the scanning line is selected, the pixel 180102 connected to the scanning line is also selected. For example, when the i-th scanning line Gi is selected, the pixel 180102 connected to the i-th scanning line Gi is also selected.

Each of the scanning lines G1 to Gm is sequentially selected from the first scanning line G1 to the m-th scanning line Gm (hereinafter also referred to as scanning). For example, during the period when the i-th scanning line Gi is selected, scanning lines other than the i-th scanning line Gi (G1 to Gi-1, Gi + 1 to Gm).
) Is not selected. In the next period, the (i + 1) th scanning line Gi + 1 is selected. Note that a period during which one scanning line is selected is referred to as one gate selection period.

Therefore, when a scanning line in a certain row is selected, a plurality of pixels 180 connected to the scanning line.
A video signal is input to the signal line 102 from each of the signal lines G1 to Gm. For example, i
While the scanning line Gi of the row is selected, the plurality of pixels 180102 connected to the scanning line Gi of the i-th row input arbitrary video signals from the signal lines S1 to Sn, respectively.
Thus, each of the plurality of pixels 180102 can be controlled independently by the scanning signal and the video signal.

Next, a case where one gate selection period is divided into a plurality of subgate selection periods will be described.
FIG. 83 shows a timing chart in the case where one gate selection period is divided into two subgate selection periods (a first subgate selection period and a second subgate selection period).

Note that one gate selection period can be divided into three or more sub-gate selection periods.

The timing chart in FIG. 83 shows one frame period corresponding to a period during which an image for one screen is displayed. There is no particular limitation on the period of one frame, but the person who sees the image flickers (flicker)
It is preferable to set it to at least 1/60 second or less so as not to feel the above.

One frame has two subframes (first subframe and second subframe).
It is divided into

The timing chart of FIG. 83 shows the i-th scanning line Gi, the i + 1-th scanning line Gi + 1, j
This shows the timing at which the scanning line Gj in the row (any one of the scanning lines Gi + 1 to Gm), the scanning line in the j + 1th row, and the scanning line Gj + 1 in the Gj + 1th row are selected.

Note that at the same time as the scanning line is selected, the pixel 180102 connected to the scanning line is also selected. For example, when the i-th scanning line Gi is selected, the pixel 180102 connected to the i-th scanning line Gi is also selected.

Note that each of the scanning lines G1 to Gm is sequentially scanned within each sub-gate selection period. For example, in a certain gate selection period, the i-th scanning line Gi is selected in the first sub-gate selection period, and the j-th scanning line Gj is selected in the second sub-gate selection period.
Then, in one gate selection period, it is possible to operate as if scanning signals for two rows were selected at the same time. At this time, different video signals are input to the signal lines S1 to Sn in the first sub-gate selection period and the second sub-gate selection period. Therefore,
A plurality of pixels 180102 connected to the i-th row and a plurality of pixels 1 connected to the j-th row
Separate video signals can be input to the 80102.

Next, a driving method for converting the frame rate of input image data (also referred to as input frame rate) and the display frame rate (also referred to as display frame rate) will be described. The frame rate is the number of frames per second, and the unit is Hz.

In the present embodiment, the input frame rate does not necessarily match the display frame rate. When the input frame rate and the display frame rate are different, the frame rate can be converted by a circuit (frame rate conversion circuit) that converts the frame rate of the image data. Thus, even when the input frame rate and the display frame rate are different, display can be performed at various display frame rates.

When the input frame rate is higher than the display frame rate, display can be performed by converting a part of the input image data into various display frame rates by discarding part of the input image data.
In this case, since the display frame rate can be reduced, the operating frequency of the drive circuit for display can be reduced, and power consumption can be reduced. On the other hand, when the input frame rate is smaller than the display frame rate, all or part of the input image data is displayed a plurality of times. Another image is generated from the input image data. What is input image data? By using means such as generating an irrelevant image, it is possible to perform display by converting to various display frame rates. In this case, the quality of the moving image can be improved by increasing the display frame rate.

In the present embodiment, a frame rate conversion method when the input frame rate is smaller than the display frame rate will be described in detail. Note that the frame rate conversion method when the input frame rate is larger than the display frame rate can be realized by executing the reverse procedure of the frame rate conversion method when the input frame rate is smaller than the display frame rate. it can.

In the present embodiment, an image displayed at the same frame rate as the input frame rate is referred to as a basic image. On the other hand, an image that is displayed at a frame rate different from the basic image and that is displayed in order to match the input frame rate and the display frame rate is referred to as an interpolated image. As the basic image, the same image as the input image data can be used. The same image as the basic image can be used as the interpolation image. Furthermore, an image different from the basic image can be created, and the created image can be used as an interpolation image.

When creating an interpolated image, a method of detecting temporal changes (image motion) of the input image data and using these intermediate images as an interpolated image, an image multiplied by a coefficient in the luminance of the basic image A plurality of different images from the input image data, and presenting the plurality of images sequentially in time (one of the plurality of images as a basic image,
There is a method of causing the observer to perceive that an image corresponding to the input image data is displayed by using the rest as an interpolation image. As a method of creating a plurality of different images from input image data, there are a method of converting a gamma value of the input image data, a method of dividing a gradation value included in the input image data, and the like.

The intermediate state image (intermediate image) is an image obtained by detecting temporal changes (image motion) of input image data and interpolating the detected motion. Obtaining an intermediate image by such a method is referred to as motion compensation.

Next, a specific example of the frame rate conversion method will be described. According to this method, an arbitrary rational number (n / m) times frame rate conversion can be realized. Here, n and m are integers of 1 or more. The frame rate conversion method in the present embodiment can be handled by dividing it into a first step and a second step. Here, the first step is a step of converting the frame rate to an arbitrary rational number (n / m) times. Here, a basic image may be used as the interpolation image, or an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation may be used as the interpolation image. In the second step, a plurality of different images (sub-images) are created from the input image data or each of the images subjected to frame rate conversion in the first step, and the plurality of sub-images are temporally continuous. It is a step for performing the method of displaying. By using the method according to the second step, even though a plurality of different images are actually displayed, it is possible to make the human eye perceive as if the original image was displayed.

The frame rate conversion method in the present embodiment may use both the first step and the second step, omit the first step, and use only the second step. Step 2 may be omitted and only the first step may be used.

First, as a first step, an arbitrary rational number (n / m) times frame rate conversion will be described. (See FIG. 84) In FIG. 84, the horizontal axis represents time, and the vertical axis represents various cases of n and m. The figure in FIG. 84 represents the schematic diagram of the image displayed, and represents the timing displayed by the horizontal position. Furthermore, it is assumed that the movement of the image is schematically represented by the points displayed in the figure. However, this is an example for explanation, and the displayed image is not limited to this. This method can be applied to various images.

The period Tin represents the cycle of the input image data. The period of the input image data corresponds to the input frame rate. For example, when the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the cycle of the input image data is 1/60 seconds. Similarly, if the input frame rate is 50 Hz,
The cycle of the input image data is 1/50 second. Thus, the period of the input image data (unit:
Second) is the reciprocal of the input frame rate (unit: Hz). Various input frame rates can be used. For example, 24 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 70 Hz,
48 Hz, 100 Hz, 120 Hz, 140 Hz, etc. can be mentioned. Where 2
4 Hz is a frame rate used for film movies and the like. 50 Hz is a frame rate used for PAL standard video signals and the like. 60 Hz is a frame rate used for NTSC video signals. 70 Hz is a frame rate used for a display input signal of a personal computer. 48Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz,
140 Hz is twice the frame rate. Note that the frame rate is not limited to double and may be various multiples. Thus, according to the method shown in this embodiment, frame rate conversion can be realized for input signals of various standards.

The procedure for frame rate conversion of an arbitrary rational number (n / m) times in the first step is as follows.
As procedure 1, the k-th interpolation image for the first basic image (k is an integer equal to or greater than 1; the initial value is 1
) Display timing is determined. The display timing of the k-th interpolation image is assumed to be the time when a period obtained by multiplying the cycle of the input image data by k (m / n) has elapsed since the first basic image was displayed.
As a procedure 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the k-th interpolation image is an integer. If it is an integer, the (k (m / n) +1) th basic image is displayed at the display timing of the kth interpolation image, and the first step ends. If it is not an integer, go to step 3.
As a procedure 3, an image used as the kth interpolation image is determined. Specifically, the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the k-th interpolation image is converted into the form of x + y / n. Here, x and y are integers, and y is a number smaller than n. When the k-th interpolation image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the k-th interpolation image is (x + 1).
) To the (x + 2) th basic image, an intermediate image obtained as an image corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the movement of the image by (y / n). When the kth interpolation image is the same as the basic image, the (x + 1) th basic image can be used. A method for obtaining an intermediate image as an image corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the motion of the image by (y / n) will be described in detail in another part.
In step 4, the target interpolation image is moved to the next interpolation image. Specifically, the value of k is incremented by 1, and the procedure returns to procedure 1.

Next, in the procedure in the first step, the values of n and m are specifically shown and described in detail.

Note that the mechanism for executing the procedure in the first step may be implemented in the apparatus, or may be determined in advance at the design stage of the apparatus. If the mechanism for executing the procedure in the first step is mounted on the apparatus, the driving method can be switched so that the optimum operation according to the situation is performed. The situation here refers to the contents of the image data, the environment inside and outside the device (temperature, humidity, atmospheric pressure, light, sound, magnetic field, electric field, radiation dose,
Altitude, acceleration, moving speed, etc.), user settings, software version, etc. On the other hand, if the mechanism for executing the procedure in the first step is determined in advance at the device design stage, an optimal driving circuit can be used for each driving method, and the mechanism is determined. As a result, a reduction in manufacturing cost due to mass production effects can be expected.

When n = 1, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m) is 1 (where n = 1 and m = 1 in FIG. 84), the operation in the first step is as follows. First, when k = 1, in step 1, the display timing of the first interpolation image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the first interpolated image is the period of the input image data after the first basic image is displayed.
/ N) It is the time when a period of 1 time, that is, 1 time has passed.

Next, in procedure 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the first interpolation image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 1, it is an integer. Accordingly, at the display timing of the first interpolation image, the (k (m / n) +1), that is, the second basic image is displayed, and the first step is ended.

That is, when the conversion ratio is 1, the k-th image is a basic image, the (k + 1) -th image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is one time the cycle of input image data. To do.

As a specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 1 (n / m = 1),
I-th image data (i is a positive integer);
I + 1-th image data is sequentially input as input image data in a certain cycle,
A k-th image (k is a positive integer);
A display device driving method for sequentially displaying (k + 1) th images at intervals equal to the period of input image data,
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data;
The (k + 1) th image is displayed according to the (i + 1) th image data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 1, since the frame rate conversion circuit can be omitted, there is an advantage that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Furthermore, when the conversion ratio is 1, there is an advantage that the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 1. Furthermore, when the conversion ratio is 1, there is an advantage that power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 1.

When n = 2 and m = 1, that is, when the conversion ratio (n / m) is 2 (location where n = 2 and m = 1 in FIG. 84), the operation in the first step is as follows. First, when k = 1, in step 1, the display timing of the first interpolation image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the first interpolated image is the period of the input image data after the first basic image is displayed.
/ N) This is the time when a period that is doubled, that is, halved has elapsed.

Next, in procedure 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the first interpolation image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 1/2, it is not an integer. Therefore, go to step 3.

In procedure 3, an image to be used as the first interpolation image is determined. Therefore, the factor 1/2 is set to x
Convert to + y / n form. In the case of the coefficient 1/2, x = 0 and y = 1. When the first interpolation image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the first interpolation image is the (x +
1) That is, an intermediate image obtained as an image corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the motion of the image from the first basic image to the (x + 2) or second basic image by y / n times, that is, ½ times. First
When the interpolated image is the same as the basic image, the (x + 1) th, that is, the first basic image can be used.

By the procedure so far, the display timing of the first interpolation image and the image to be displayed as the first interpolation image can be determined. Next, in procedure 4, the target interpolation image is moved from the first interpolation image to the second interpolation image. That is, k is changed from 1 to 2, and the procedure returns to step 1.

When k = 2, in step 1, the display timing of the second interpolation image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the second interpolated image is a point in time when the period of the input image data is multiplied by k (m / n), that is, 1 time has elapsed since the first basic image was displayed.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the second interpolation image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 1, it is an integer. Therefore, at the display timing of the second interpolation image, the (k (m / n) +1), that is, the second basic image is displayed, and the first step is ended.

That is, when the conversion ratio is 2 (n / m = 2),
The kth image is a basic image,
The k + 1 th image is an interpolated image,
The k + 2 image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is ½ times the cycle of the input image data.

As a specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 2 (n / m = 2),
I-th image data (i is a positive integer);
I + 1-th image data is sequentially input as input image data in a certain cycle,
A k-th image (k is a positive integer);
The (k + 1) th image,
A display device driving method for sequentially displaying k + 2 images at intervals of 1/2 times the cycle of input image data,
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data;
The (k + 1) th image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a movement obtained by halving the movement from the i-th image data to the (i + 1) -th image data,
The k + 2th image is displayed according to the i + 1th image data.

As another specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 2 (n / m = 2),
I-th image data (i is a positive integer);
I + 1-th image data is sequentially input as input image data in a certain cycle,
A k-th image (k is a positive integer);
The (k + 1) th image,
A display device driving method for sequentially displaying k + 2 images at intervals of 1/2 times the cycle of input image data,
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data;
The k + 1 th image is displayed according to the i th image data,
The k + 2th image is displayed according to the i + 1th image data.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 2, it is also called double speed drive or simply double speed drive.
For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 120 Hz (
120 Hz drive). Then, the image is continuously displayed twice for one input image. At this time, when the interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Furthermore, when the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device,
It brings about a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect. This is related to the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to so-called dynamic capacitance, in which the capacitance of the liquid crystal element varies depending on the applied voltage. That is, by making the display frame rate larger than the input frame rate, it is possible to increase the frequency of the image data write operation, thereby reducing obstacles such as moving image tailing and afterimage caused by insufficient write voltage due to dynamic capacitance. be able to. Further, it is effective to combine the AC drive and 120 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 120 Hz and setting the AC drive frequency to an integral multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, 120 Hz, 240 Hz, etc.), It can be reduced to a level not perceived by human eyes.

When n = 3, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m) is 3 (n = 3, m = 1 in FIG. 84), the operation in the first step is as follows. First, when k = 1, in step 1, the display timing of the first interpolation image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the first interpolated image is the period of the input image data after the first basic image is displayed.
/ N) is the time when a period of 1/3 times has elapsed.

Next, in procedure 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the first interpolation image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 1/3, it is not an integer. Therefore, go to step 3.

In procedure 3, an image to be used as the first interpolation image is determined. Therefore, the coefficient 1/3 is set to x
Convert to + y / n form. In the case of the coefficient 1/3, x = 0 and y = 1. When the first interpolation image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the first interpolation image is the (x +
1) That is, an intermediate image obtained as an image corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement of the image from the first basic image to the (x + 2) th or second basic image by y / n times, that is, 1/3 times. First
When the interpolated image is the same as the basic image, the (x + 1) th, that is, the first basic image can be used.

By the procedure so far, the display timing of the first interpolation image and the image to be displayed as the first interpolation image can be determined. Next, in procedure 4, the target interpolation image is moved from the first interpolation image to the second interpolation image. That is, k is changed from 1 to 2, and the procedure returns to step 1.

When k = 2, in step 1, the display timing of the second interpolation image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the second interpolated image is a point in time when a period in which the cycle of the input image data is k (m / n) times, that is, 2/3 times has elapsed since the first basic image is displayed.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the second interpolation image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 2/3, it is not an integer. Therefore, go to step 3.

In procedure 3, an image to be used as the second interpolation image is determined. Therefore, the coefficient 2/3 is set to x
Convert to + y / n form. In the case of the coefficient 2/3, x = 0 and y = 2. When the second interpolation image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the second interpolation image is the (x +
1) That is, an intermediate image obtained as an image corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the motion of the image from the first basic image to the (x + 2) or second basic image by y / n times, that is, 2/3 times, is used. Second
When the interpolated image is the same as the basic image, the (x + 1) th, that is, the first basic image can be used.

By the procedure so far, the display timing of the second interpolation image and the image to be displayed as the second interpolation image can be determined. Next, in procedure 4, the target interpolation image is moved from the second interpolation image to the third interpolation image. That is, k is changed from 2 to 3, and the procedure returns to step 1.

When k = 3, in step 1, the display timing of the third interpolation image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the third interpolated image is the time when the period of the input image data cycle k (m / n) times, that is, 1 time has elapsed since the display of the first basic image.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the third interpolation image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 1, it is an integer. Therefore, at the display timing of the third interpolation image, the (k (m / n) +1), that is, the second basic image is displayed, and the first step is ended.

That is, when the conversion ratio is 3 (n / m = 3),
The kth image is a basic image,
The k + 1 th image is an interpolated image,
The k + 2 image is an interpolation image,
The k + 3 image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is 1/3 times the cycle of the input image data.

As a specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 3 (n / m = 3),
I-th image data (i is a positive integer);
I + 1-th image data is sequentially input as input image data in a certain cycle,
A k-th image (k is a positive integer);
The (k + 1) th image,
K + 2 image,
A display device driving method for sequentially displaying k + 3 images at intervals of 1/3 times the cycle of input image data,
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data;
The k + 1-th image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the i-th image data to the i + 1-th image data by 1/3.
The k + 2 image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the i-th image to the i + 1-th image by 2/3,
The k + 3 image is displayed according to the (i + 1) th image data.

As another specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 3 (n / m = 3),
I-th image data (i is a positive integer);
I + 1-th image data is sequentially input as input image data in a certain cycle,
A k-th image (k is a positive integer);
The (k + 1) th image,
K + 2 image,
A display device driving method for sequentially displaying k + 3 images at intervals of 1/3 times the cycle of input image data,
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data;
The k + 1 th image is displayed according to the i th image data,
The k + 2 image is displayed according to the i-th image data,
The k + 3 image is displayed according to the (i + 1) th image data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 3, there is an advantage that the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 3. Furthermore, when the conversion ratio is 3, there is an advantage that the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 3.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 3, it is also called triple speed driving. For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 180 Hz (180 Hz drive). Then, for one input image, the image is continuously displayed three times. At this time, when the interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Furthermore, the AC drive of the liquid crystal display device and 180 Hz
It is also effective to combine driving. That is, the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device is set to 180H.
z, and the frequency of AC driving is an integral multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 45 Hz, 9
By setting the frequency to 0 Hz, 180 Hz, 360 Hz, etc., flicker that appears due to AC driving can be reduced to a level that is not perceived by human eyes.

n = 3, m = 2, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m) is 3/2 (where n = 3 and m = 2 in FIG. 84).
In this case, the operation in the first step is as follows. First, when k = 1, procedure 1
Then, the display timing of the 1st interpolation image with respect to a 1st basic image is determined. The display timing of the first interpolation image is the period of the input image data after the first basic image is displayed.
This is the time when (m / n) times, ie, 2/3 times, has elapsed.

Next, in procedure 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the first interpolation image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 2/3, it is not an integer. Therefore, go to step 3.

In procedure 3, an image to be used as the first interpolation image is determined. Therefore, the coefficient 2/3 is set to x
Convert to + y / n form. In the case of the coefficient 2/3, x = 0 and y = 2. When the first interpolation image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the first interpolation image is the (x +
1) That is, an intermediate image obtained as an image corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the motion of the image from the first basic image to the (x + 2) or second basic image by y / n times, that is, 2/3 times, is used. First
When the interpolated image is the same as the basic image, the (x + 1) th, that is, the first basic image can be used.

By the procedure so far, the display timing of the first interpolation image and the image to be displayed as the first interpolation image can be determined. Next, in procedure 4, the target interpolation image is moved from the first interpolation image to the second interpolation image. That is, k is changed from 1 to 2, and the procedure returns to step 1.

When k = 2, in step 1, the display timing of the second interpolation image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the second interpolated image is a point in time when a period in which the period of the input image data is k (m / n) times, that is, 4/3 times has elapsed since the first basic image is displayed.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the second interpolation image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 4/3, it is not an integer. Therefore, go to step 3.

In procedure 3, an image to be used as the second interpolation image is determined. Therefore, the coefficient 4/3 is set to x
Convert to + y / n form. In the case of the coefficient 4/3, x = 1 and y = 1. When the second interpolation image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the second interpolation image is the (x +
1) An intermediate image obtained as an image corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement of an image from the second basic image to the (x + 2) or third basic image by y / n times, that is, 1/3 times. Second
When the interpolated image is the same as the basic image, the (x + 1) th, that is, the second basic image can be used.

By the procedure so far, the display timing of the second interpolation image and the image to be displayed as the second interpolation image can be determined. Next, in procedure 4, the target interpolation image is moved from the second interpolation image to the third interpolation image. That is, k is changed from 2 to 3, and the procedure returns to step 1.

When k = 3, in step 1, the display timing of the third interpolation image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the third interpolated image is the point in time when the period of the input image data period is multiplied by k (m / n), that is, twice after the first basic image is displayed.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the third interpolation image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 2, it is an integer. Therefore, at the display timing of the third interpolation image, the (k (m / n) +1), that is, the third basic image is displayed, and the first step is ended.

That is, when the conversion ratio is 3/2 (n / m = 3/2),
The kth image is a basic image,
The k + 1 th image is an interpolated image,
The k + 2 image is an interpolation image,
The k + 3 image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is 2/3 times the cycle of the input image data.

As a specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 3/2 (n / m = 3/2),
I-th image data (i is a positive integer);
The (i + 1) th image data;
I + 2th image data is sequentially input as input image data in a certain cycle,
A k-th image (k is a positive integer);
The (k + 1) th image,
K + 2 image,
A display device driving method for sequentially displaying k + 3 images at intervals of 2/3 times the cycle of input image data,
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data;
The k + 1-th image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the motion from the i-th image data to the i + 1-th image data by 2/3,
The k + 2 image has a movement of ｉ from the (i + 1) th image to the (i + 2) th image by 1/3.
Displayed according to the image data corresponding to the doubled movement,
The k + 3 image is displayed according to the i + 2 image data.

As another specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 3/2 (n / m = 3/2),
I-th image data (i is a positive integer);
The (i + 1) th image data;
I + 2th image data is sequentially input as input image data in a certain cycle,
A k-th image (k is a positive integer);
The (k + 1) th image,
K + 2 image,
A display device driving method for sequentially displaying k + 3 images at intervals of 2/3 times the cycle of input image data,
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data;
The k + 1 th image is displayed according to the i th image data,
The k + 2 image is displayed according to the (i + 1) th image data,
The k + 3 image is displayed according to the i + 2 image data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 3/2, there is an advantage that the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 3/2. Further, when the conversion ratio is 3/2, the conversion ratio is 3 /
There is an advantage that power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case of larger than 2.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 3/2, it is also called 3/2 speed drive or 1.5 times speed drive. For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 90
Hz (90 Hz drive). Then, for two input images, the images are continuously displayed three times. At this time, when the interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. In particular, compared to driving methods with a large driving frequency such as 120 Hz driving (double speed driving) and 180 Hz driving (triple speed driving), the operation frequency of the circuit for obtaining an intermediate image can be reduced by motion compensation, so that an inexpensive circuit can be used. Manufacturing cost and power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, if the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so
It brings about a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect against obstacles such as afterimages. Furthermore, it is also effective to combine AC driving and 90 Hz driving of the liquid crystal display device. That is, while the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device is 90 Hz, the frequency of AC drive is an integer multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 3
By setting the frequency to 0 Hz, 45 Hz, 90 Hz, 180 Hz, etc., flicker that appears due to AC driving can be reduced to a level that is not perceived by human eyes.

Although the details of the procedure for positive integers n and m other than the above are omitted, the conversion ratio can be set as an arbitrary rational number (n / m) by following the frame rate conversion procedure in the first step. it can. Of the combinations of positive integers n and m, the conversion ratio (n /
Combinations that can be reduced by m) can be handled in the same manner as the conversion ratio after reduction.

For example, when n = 4, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m) is 4 (location where n = 4, m = 1 in FIG. 84),
The kth image is a basic image,
The k + 1 th image is an interpolated image,
The k + 2 image is an interpolation image,
The k + 3 image is an interpolation image,
The k + 4th image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is ¼ times the cycle of the input image data.

More specifically, when the conversion ratio is 4 (n / m = 4),
I-th image data (i is a positive integer);
I + 1-th image data is sequentially input as input image data in a certain cycle,
A k-th image (k is a positive integer);
The (k + 1) th image,
K + 2 image,
K + 3th image;
A display device driving method for sequentially displaying k + 4 images at intervals of 1/4 times the cycle of input image data,
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data;
The k + 1-th image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying a movement from the i-th image data to the i + 1-th image data by ¼,
The k + 2 image is displayed in accordance with image data corresponding to a movement that is ½ times the movement from the i-th image data to the i + 1-th image data,
The k + 3 image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the i-th image data to the i + 1-th image data by 3/4,
The k + 4th image is displayed according to the i + 1th image data.

As another specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 4 (n / m = 4),
I-th image data (i is a positive integer);
I + 1-th image data is sequentially input as input image data in a certain cycle,
A k-th image (k is a positive integer);
The (k + 1) th image,
K + 2 image,
K + 3th image;
A display device driving method for sequentially displaying k + 4 images at intervals of 1/4 times the cycle of input image data,
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data;
The k + 1 th image is displayed according to the i th image data,
The k + 2 image is displayed according to the i-th image data,
The k + 3 image is displayed according to the i th image data,
The k + 4th image is displayed according to the i + 1th image data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 4, there is an advantage that the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 4. Further, when the conversion ratio is 4, there is an advantage that power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 4.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 4, it is also referred to as quadruple speed driving. For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 240 Hz (240 Hz drive). Then, four images are continuously displayed for one input image. At this time, when the interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. In particular, 120
Compared to driving methods with a low driving frequency such as Hz driving (double speed driving) and 180 Hz driving (triple speed driving), an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation with higher accuracy can be used as an interpolation image. The movement can be smoothed, and the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Further, it is effective to combine the AC drive and 240 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 240 Hz and setting the AC driving frequency to an integral multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 30 Hz, 40 Hz, 60 Hz, 120 Hz, etc.), It can be reduced to a level not perceived by human eyes.

Further, for example, n = 4, m = 3, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m) is 4/3 (n = n in FIG. 84).
4, m = 3)
The kth image is a basic image,
The k + 1 th image is an interpolated image,
The k + 2 image is an interpolation image,
The k + 3 image is an interpolation image,
The k + 4th image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is 3/4 times the cycle of the input image data.

More specifically, when the conversion ratio is 4/3 (n / m = 4/3),
I-th image data (i is a positive integer);
The (i + 1) th image data;
I + 2th image data;
I + 3th image data are sequentially input as input image data at a constant cycle,
A k-th image (k is a positive integer);
The (k + 1) th image,
K + 2 image,
K + 3th image;
A display device driving method for sequentially displaying k + 4 images at intervals of 3/4 times the cycle of input image data,
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data;
The k + 1-th image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the i-th image data to the i + 1-th image data by 3/4,
The k + 2 image halves the movement from the i + 1th image to the i + 2 image.
Displayed according to the image data corresponding to the doubled movement,
The k + 3 image is a quarter of the movement from the i + 2 image to the i + 3 image.
Displayed according to the image data corresponding to the doubled movement,
The k + 4 image is displayed according to the i + 3 image data.

As another specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 4/3 (n / m = 4/3),
I-th image data (i is a positive integer);
The (i + 1) th image data;
I + 2th image data;
I + 3th image data are sequentially input as input image data at a constant cycle,
A k-th image (k is a positive integer);
The (k + 1) th image,
K + 2 image,
K + 3th image;
A display device driving method for sequentially displaying k + 4 images at intervals of 3/4 times the cycle of input image data,
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data;
The k + 1 th image is displayed according to the i th image data,
The k + 2 image is displayed according to the (i + 1) th image data,
The k + 3 image is displayed according to the i + 2 image data,
The k + 4 image is displayed according to the i + 3 image data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 4/3, there is an advantage that the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 4/3. Further, when the conversion ratio is 4/3, the conversion ratio is 4 /
There is an advantage that power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case of larger than 3.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 4/3, it is also referred to as 4/3 times speed driving or 1.25 times speed driving. For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 8
0 Hz (80 Hz drive). Then, four images are continuously displayed for three input images. At this time, when the interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. In particular, compared to driving methods with a large driving frequency such as 120 Hz driving (double speed driving) and 180 Hz driving (triple speed driving), the operation frequency of the circuit for obtaining an intermediate image can be reduced by motion compensation, so that an inexpensive circuit can be used. Manufacturing cost and power consumption can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Further, it is effective to combine the AC drive and 80 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, while the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device is 80 Hz, the frequency of AC driving is an integer multiple or a fraction thereof (for example,
By setting the frequency to 40 Hz, 80 Hz, 160 Hz, 240 Hz, etc., flicker that appears due to AC driving can be reduced to a level that is not perceived by human eyes.

Further, for example, n = 5, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m) is 5 (n = 5 in FIG. 84).
in the case of m = 1)
The kth image is a basic image,
The k + 1 th image is an interpolated image,
The k + 2 image is an interpolation image,
The k + 3 image is an interpolation image,
The k + 4th image is an interpolation image,
The k + 5th image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is 1/5 times the cycle of the input image data.

More specifically, when the conversion ratio is 5 (n / m = 5),
I-th image data (i is a positive integer);
I + 1-th image data is sequentially input as input image data in a certain cycle,
A k-th image (k is a positive integer);
The (k + 1) th image,
K + 2 image,
K + 3th image;
K + 4th image;
A display device driving method for sequentially displaying k + 5 images at intervals of 1/5 times the cycle of input image data,
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data;
The k + 1 th image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a motion that is 1/5 times the motion from the i th image data to the i + 1 th image data,
The k + 2 image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a motion that is 2/5 times the motion from the i-th image data to the i + 1-th image data,
The k + 3 image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the i-th image data to the i + 1-th image data by 3/5,
The k + 4 image is displayed in accordance with image data corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the motion from the i-th image data to the i + 1-th image data by 4/5,
The k + 5th image is displayed according to the i + 1th image data.

As another specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 5 (n / m = 5),
I-th image data (i is a positive integer);
I + 1-th image data is sequentially input as input image data in a certain cycle,
A k-th image (k is a positive integer);
The (k + 1) th image,
K + 2 image,
K + 3th image;
K + 4th image;
A display device driving method for sequentially displaying k + 5 images at intervals of 1/5 times the cycle of input image data,
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data;
The k + 1 th image is displayed according to the i th image data,
The k + 2 image is displayed according to the i-th image data,
The k + 3 image is displayed according to the i th image data,
The k + 4 image is displayed according to the i-th image data,
The k + 5th image is displayed according to the i + 1th image data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 5, there is an advantage that the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 5. Furthermore, when the conversion ratio is 5, there is an advantage that the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 5.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 5, it is also referred to as 5 × speed driving. For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 300 Hz (300 Hz drive). Then, the image is continuously displayed five times for one input image. At this time, when the interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. In particular, 120
Compared to driving methods with a low driving frequency such as Hz driving (double speed driving) and 180 Hz driving (triple speed driving), an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation with higher accuracy can be used as an interpolation image. The movement can be smoothed, and the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Furthermore, it is also effective to combine AC driving and 300 Hz driving of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 300 Hz and setting the AC driving frequency to an integral multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 30 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 100 Hz, etc.), It can be reduced to a level not perceived by human eyes.

Further, for example, n = 5, m = 2, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m) is 5/2 (n = n in FIG. 84).
5, where m = 2)
The kth image is a basic image,
The k + 1 th image is an interpolated image,
The k + 2 image is an interpolation image,
The k + 3 image is an interpolation image,
The k + 4th image is an interpolation image,
The k + 5th image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is 1/5 times the cycle of the input image data.

More specifically, when the conversion ratio is 5/2 (n / m = 5/2),
I-th image data (i is a positive integer);
The (i + 1) th image data;
I + 2th image data is sequentially input as input image data in a certain cycle,
A k-th image (k is a positive integer);
The (k + 1) th image,
K + 2 image,
K + 3th image;
K + 4th image;
A display device driving method for sequentially displaying k + 5 images at intervals of 1/5 times the cycle of input image data,
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data;
The k + 1 th image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a motion that is 2/5 times the motion from the i th image data to the i + 1 th image data,
The k + 2 image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the motion from the i-th image data to the i + 1-th image data by 4/5,
The k + 3 image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a movement that is 1/5 times the movement from the i + 1th image data to the i + 2 image data,
The k + 4 image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the i + 1th image data to the i + 2 image data by 3/5,
The k + 5 image is displayed according to the i + 2 image data.

As another specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 5/2 (n / m = 5/2),
I-th image data (i is a positive integer);
The (i + 1) th image data;
I + 2th image data is sequentially input as input image data in a certain cycle,
A k-th image (k is a positive integer);
The (k + 1) th image,
K + 2 image,
K + 3th image;
K + 4th image;
A display device driving method for sequentially displaying k + 5 images at intervals of 1/5 times the cycle of input image data,
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data;
The k + 1 th image is displayed according to the i th image data,
The k + 2 image is displayed according to the i-th image data,
The k + 3th image is displayed according to the i + 1th image data,
The k + 4th image is displayed according to the (i + 1) th image data,
The k + 5 image is displayed according to the i + 2 image data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 5/2, there is an advantage that the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 5/2. Further, when the conversion ratio is 5/2, there is an advantage that power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 5.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 5, it is also called 5/2 speed driving or 2.5 times speed driving. For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 150H.
z (150 Hz drive). Then, for two input images, the images are continuously displayed five times. At this time, when the interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. In particular, compared to a driving method with a low driving frequency such as 120 Hz driving (double speed driving), an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation with higher accuracy can be used as an interpolated image. It is possible to significantly improve the quality of moving images. Furthermore, compared with a driving method having a high driving frequency such as 180 Hz driving (three times speed driving), the operation frequency of a circuit for obtaining an intermediate image can be reduced by motion compensation, so that an inexpensive circuit can be used, and manufacturing cost and power consumption can be reduced. Can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Furthermore, it is also effective to combine AC driving and 150 Hz driving of the liquid crystal display device. That is, the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device is set to 150 Hz.
And the frequency of AC driving is an integral multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 30 Hz, 50
Hz, 75 Hz, 150 Hz, etc.) can reduce flicker that appears due to AC driving to a level that is not perceived by human eyes.

Thus, the conversion ratio can be set as an arbitrary rational number (n / m) by variously setting the positive integers n and m. Detailed explanation is omitted, but in the range where n is 10 or less,
n = 1, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 1 (1 × speed driving, 60 Hz),
n = 2, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 2 (double speed drive, 120 Hz),
n = 3, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 3 (triple speed drive, 180 Hz),
n = 3, m = 2, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 3/2 (3/2 double speed drive, 90 Hz),
n = 4, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 4 (4 × speed driving, 240 Hz),
n = 4, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 4/3 (4/3 double speed drive, 80 Hz),
n = 5, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 5/1 (5 × speed driving, 300 Hz),
n = 5, m = 2, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 5/2 (5/2 double speed drive, 150 Hz),
n = 5, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 5/3 (5/3 double speed drive, 100 Hz),
n = 5, m = 4, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 5/4 (5/4 double speed drive, 75 Hz),
n = 6, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 6 (6 × speed driving, 360 Hz),
n = 6, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 6/5 (6/5 double speed drive, 72 Hz),
n = 7, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7 (7 × speed drive, 420 Hz),
n = 7, m = 2, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/2 (7/2 double speed drive, 210 Hz),
n = 7, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/3 (7/3 double speed drive, 140 Hz),
n = 7, m = 4, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/4 (7/4 double speed drive, 105 Hz),
n = 7, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/5 (7/5 double speed drive, 84 Hz),
n = 7, m = 6, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/6 (7/6 double speed drive, 70 Hz),
n = 8, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8 (8 × speed drive, 480 Hz),
n = 8, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8/3 (8/3 double speed drive, 160 Hz),
n = 8, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8/5 (8/5 double speed drive, 96 Hz),
n = 8, m = 7, ie conversion ratio (n / m) = 8/7 (8/7 double speed drive, 68.6 Hz)
,
n = 9, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9 (9 × speed drive, 540 Hz),
n = 9, m = 2, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/2 (9/2 double speed drive, 270 Hz),
n = 9, m = 4, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/4 (9/4 double speed drive, 135 Hz),
n = 9, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/5 (9/5 double speed drive, 108 Hz),
n = 9, m = 7, ie conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/7 (9/7 double speed drive, 77.1 Hz)
,
n = 9, m = 8, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/8 (9/8 double speed drive, 67.5 Hz)
,
n = 10, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10 (10 × speed driving, 600 Hz),
n = 10, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10/3 (10/3 double speed drive, 200H
z),
n = 10, m = 7, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10/7 (10/7 double speed drive, 85.7)
Hz),
n = 10, m = 9, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10/9 (10/9 double speed drive, 66.7)
Hz),
The above combinations are possible. The frequency notation is an example when the input frame rate is 60 Hz. For other input frame rates, the value obtained by integrating the respective conversion ratios with the input frame rate is the drive frequency.

In the case where n is an integer greater than 10, specific numbers of n and m are not mentioned, but the frame rate conversion procedure in the first step can be applied to various n and m. Is clear.

Note that the conversion ratio can be determined depending on how much of the displayed image includes an image that can be displayed without performing motion compensation in the input image data. Specifically, the smaller m is, the larger the ratio of images that can be displayed without performing motion compensation on the input image data. If the frequency of motion compensation is low, the frequency of operation of the circuit that performs motion compensation can be reduced, so that power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, motion compensation can accurately reflect images that contain errors (image motion is accurately reflected). The possibility that an intermediate image) is not created can be reduced, and the image quality can be improved. As such a conversion ratio, in the range where n is 10 or less, for example, 1, 2, 3, 3/2, 4,
5,5 / 2,6,7,7 / 2,8,9,9 / 2,10. When such a conversion ratio is used, particularly when an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation is used as an interpolated image, the image quality can be increased and the power consumption can be reduced. This is because when m is 2, the number of images that can be displayed without performing motion compensation on the input image data is relatively large (there is only ½ of the total number of input image data). ,
This is because the frequency of performing motion compensation decreases. Furthermore, when m is 1, the number of images that can be displayed without performing motion compensation on the input image data is large (equal to the total number of input image data), and motion compensation is not performed. is there. On the other hand, as m is larger, an intermediate image created by highly accurate motion compensation can be used, so that there is an advantage that the motion of the image can be made smoother.

When the display device is a liquid crystal display device, the conversion ratio can be determined according to the response time of the liquid crystal element. Here, the response time of the liquid crystal element is the time from when the voltage applied to the liquid crystal element is changed until the liquid crystal element responds. In the case where the response time of the liquid crystal element varies depending on the amount of change in voltage applied to the liquid crystal element, the average value of response times in a plurality of typical voltage changes can be obtained. Alternatively, the response time of the liquid crystal element is MPRT (Movin
g Picture Response Time).
The conversion ratio can be determined by frame rate conversion so that the image display cycle is close to the response time of the liquid crystal element. Specifically, the response time of the liquid crystal element is preferably a time from a value obtained by integrating the cycle of the input image data and the reciprocal of the conversion ratio to a value about half of this value. By doing so, it is possible to obtain an image display cycle that matches the response time of the liquid crystal element, so that the image quality can be improved. For example, when the response time of the liquid crystal element is 4 milliseconds or more and 8 milliseconds or less, double speed driving (120 Hz driving) can be performed. This is because the image display cycle of 120 Hz drive is about 8 milliseconds, and half of the image display cycle of 120 Hz drive is about 4 milliseconds. Similarly, for example, in the case where the response time of the liquid crystal element is 3 milliseconds or more and 6 milliseconds or less, the triple-speed driving (180 Hz driving) can be performed, and the response time of the liquid crystal element is 5
In the case of milliseconds to 11 milliseconds, 1.5 times speed driving (90 Hz driving) can be performed, and in the case where the response time of the liquid crystal element is 2 milliseconds to 4 milliseconds, quadruple speed driving (240 Hz driving) When the response time of the liquid crystal element is 6 milliseconds or more and 12 milliseconds or less, 1
. 25-times speed driving (80 Hz driving) can be performed. The same applies to other drive frequencies.

Note that the conversion ratio can also be determined by the trade-off between the quality of moving images, power consumption, and manufacturing cost. That is, increasing the conversion ratio can improve the quality of the moving image, while reducing the conversion ratio can reduce power consumption and manufacturing cost. That is, each conversion ratio in the range where n is 10 or less has the following advantages.

When the conversion ratio is 1, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 1, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 1. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about one time the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 2, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 2, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 2. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about ½ times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 3, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 3, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 3. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/3 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 3/2, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 3/2, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 3/2. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 2/3 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 4, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 4, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 4. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/4 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 4/3, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 4/3, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 4/3. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 3/4 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 5, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 5, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 5. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/5 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 5/2, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 5/2, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 5/2. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 2/5 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 5/3, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 5/3, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 5/3. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 3/5 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 5/4, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 5/4, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 5/4. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 4/5 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 6, the moving image quality can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 6, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 6. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/6 times the period of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 6/5, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 6/5, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 6/5. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 5/6 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 7, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 7, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 7. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/7 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 7/2, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 7/2, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 7/2. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 2/7 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 7/3, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 7/3, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 7/3. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 3/7 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 7/4, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 7/4, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 7/4. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 4/7 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 7/5, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 7/5, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 7/5. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 5/7 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 7/6, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 7/6, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 7/6. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 6/7 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 8, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 8, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 8. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/8 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 8/3, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 8/3, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 8/3. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 3/8 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 8/5, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 8/5, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 8/5. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 5/8 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 8/7, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 8/7, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 8/7. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 7/8 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 9, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 9, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 9. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/9 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 9/2, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 9/2, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 9/2. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 2/9 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 9/4, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 9/4, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 9/4. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 4/9 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 9/5, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 9/5, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 9/5. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 5/9 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 9/7, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 9/7, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 9/7. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 7/9 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 9/8, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 9/8, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 9/8. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 8/9 times the cycle of the input image data.

A conversion ratio of 10 can improve the quality of the video compared to a conversion ratio of less than 10,
The power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 10. Furthermore, m
Therefore, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/10 times the cycle of the input image data,
The image quality can be improved.

When the conversion ratio is 10/3, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 10/3, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 10/3. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 3/10 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 10/7, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 10/7, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 10/7. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 7/10 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 10/9, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 10/9, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 10/9. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 9/10 times the cycle of the input image data.

It is obvious that each conversion ratio in the range where n is larger than 10 has the same advantage.

Next, as a second step, an image according to the input image data or each image whose frame rate is converted to an arbitrary rational number (n / m) times in the first step (referred to as an original image). ), A method of creating a plurality of different images (sub-images) and presenting the plurality of sub-images continuously in time will be described. In this way, even though a plurality of images are actually presented, it is possible to make human eyes perceive that one original image is displayed.

Here, among the sub-images created from one original image, the sub-image displayed first is referred to as a first sub-image. Here, it is assumed that the timing for displaying the first sub-image is the same as the timing for displaying the original image determined in the first step. on the other hand,
The sub image displayed after that will be referred to as a second sub image. The timing for displaying the second sub-image can be arbitrarily determined regardless of the timing for displaying the original image determined in the first step. Note that the image to be actually displayed is an image created from the original image by the method in the second step. Various images can be used as the original image for creating the sub-image. The number of sub-images is not limited to two and may be larger than two. In the second step, the number of sub-images is expressed as J (J is an integer of 2 or more). At this time, the sub-image displayed at the same timing as the original image determined in the first step is called the first sub-image, and the sub-image displayed subsequently is displayed. Second sub-image, third sub-image through J-th
This is called a sub-image.

There are various methods for creating a plurality of sub-images from one original image. The main methods include the following methods. One is a method of using the original image as it is as a sub-image. One is a method of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images. One is a method of using an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as a sub-image.

Here, the method of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images can be further divided into a plurality of methods. The main methods are as follows. One is a method in which at least one sub-image is a black image (referred to as a black insertion method). One is
When the brightness of the original image is divided into a plurality of ranges and the brightness in the range is controlled, a method using only one sub-image among all the sub-images (referred to as a time-division gradation control method). ). One is a method in which one sub-image is a bright image in which the gamma value of the original image is changed and the other sub-image is a dark image in which the gamma value of the original image is changed (referred to as a gamma complement method). ).

Each of the methods listed above is briefly described. The method of using the original image as it is as the sub image uses the original image as it is as the first sub image. Further, the original image is used as it is as the second sub-image. When this method is used, a circuit for newly creating a sub-image is not operated or it is not necessary to use the circuit itself, so that power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced. In particular, in a liquid crystal display device, the first
In this step, it is preferable to use this method after performing frame rate conversion using an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as an interpolated image. This is because the intermediate image obtained by motion compensation is used as an interpolated image, and the same image is repeatedly displayed while smoothing the motion of the moving image, resulting in a lack of writing voltage due to the dynamic capacitance of the liquid crystal element. This is because obstacles such as tailing and afterimage can be reduced.

Next, in the method for distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images, a method for setting the brightness of the image and the length of the period during which the sub-image is displayed will be described in detail. J represents the number of sub-images and is an integer of 2 or more. Lowercase j is distinct from uppercase J. Let j be an integer from 1 to J.
In normal hold driving, the pixel brightness is L, the period of the original image data is T,
The brightness L _j of the pixels in the sub-image of the _j, the length T _j of the period in which the sub image is displayed in the first _j, and when taking a product for L _j and T _j, from which the j = 1 Total up to j = J (L
₁ T ₁ + L ₂ T ₂ +... + L _J T _J ) is preferably equal to the product of L and T (LT) (the brightness is unchanged). Furthermore, the sum (T ₁ + T ₂ +... + T _J ) of T _j from j = 1 to j = J is equal to T (the display cycle of the original image is maintained). preferable. Here, the fact that the brightness remains unchanged and the display cycle of the original image is maintained is referred to as a sub-image distribution condition.

Of the methods for distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images, the black insertion method is a method in which at least one sub-image is a black image. By doing so, since the display method can be made to be an impulse type in a pseudo manner, it is possible to prevent the quality of the moving image from being deteriorated due to the hold type display method. Here, it is preferable to follow the sub-image distribution condition in order to prevent the brightness of the display image from being reduced due to the insertion of the black image. However, if the brightness of the display image is acceptable (such as dark surroundings), or if the user is set to allow the brightness of the display image to be reduced, the sub image It is not necessary to follow the distribution conditions. For example, one sub image may be the same as the original image, and the other sub image may be a black image. In this case, power consumption can be reduced compared to when the sub image distribution condition is followed. Furthermore, in a liquid crystal display device, when one sub-image is set to increase the overall brightness of the original image without limiting the maximum brightness, the brightness of the backlight is increased. Thus, the sub-image distribution condition may be realized. In this case, since the sub image distribution condition can be satisfied without controlling the voltage value written to the pixel, the operation of the image processing circuit can be omitted and the power consumption can be reduced.

The black insertion method is characterized in that L _{j of} all pixels is set to 0 in any one sub-image. By doing so, since the display method can be made to be an impulse type in a pseudo manner, it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the quality of the moving image due to the hold type display method.

Of the methods for distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images, the time-division gradation control method divides the brightness of the original image into a plurality of ranges, and controls the brightness in the range. This is a method that uses only one of the sub-images. By doing so, the display method can be made to be a pseudo impulse type without lowering the brightness, so that the deterioration of the quality of the moving image due to the hold method being the display method can be prevented.

As a method of dividing the brightness of the original image into a plurality of ranges, the maximum brightness value (L _max )
There is a method of dividing by the number of sub-images. For example, in a display device in which the brightness from 0 to L _max can be adjusted in 256 steps (gradation 0 to gradation 255), when the number of sub-images is 2, gradation 0 to gradation 127 Is displayed, the brightness of one sub-image is adjusted in the range of gradation 0 to gradation 255, while the brightness of the other sub-image is set to gradation 0,
When displaying gradations 128 to 255, the brightness of one sub-image is set to gradation 255.
On the other hand, the brightness of the other sub-image is adjusted in the range of gradation 0 to gradation 255. By doing so, it can be perceived by the human eye as if the original image was displayed, and it can be made to be a pseudo impulse type. Can be prevented. Note that the number of sub-images may be greater than two. For example, when the number of sub-images is 3, the brightness level of the original image (gradation 0 to gradation 2
55) is divided into three. Depending on the number of brightness levels of the original image and the number of sub-images, the number of brightness levels may not be divisible by the number of sub-images, but they are included in the respective brightness ranges after division. Even if the number of brightness levels is not exactly the same, they may be appropriately distributed.

Note that the time-division gradation control method is also preferable because when the sub-image distribution condition is satisfied, the brightness is not reduced and the same image as the original image can be displayed.

Of the methods that distribute the brightness of the original image to multiple sub-images, the gamma interpolation method uses one sub-image as a bright image with the gamma characteristics of the original image changed and the other sub-image as the gamma of the original image. This is a method of obtaining a dark image with changed characteristics. By doing so, the display method can be made to be a pseudo impulse type without lowering the brightness, so that the deterioration of the quality of the moving image due to the hold method being the display method can be prevented. Here, the gamma characteristic is the degree of brightness with respect to the brightness level (gradation). Usually, the gamma characteristic is adjusted to be close to linear. This is because a smooth gradation can be obtained if the change in brightness is proportional to the gradation that is the brightness stage. In the gamma interpolation method, the gamma characteristic of one of the sub-images is shifted from the linearity, and is adjusted so that it is brighter than the linearity in the intermediate brightness (halftone) region (the halftone becomes a brighter image than the original). )
. Then, the gamma characteristic of the other sub-image is also shifted from the linearity, and is adjusted so as to be darker than the linear in the same halftone region (the halftone becomes an image darker than the original). Here, the amount by which one sub-image is lighter than linear and the amount by which the other sub-image is darker than linear are
It is preferable to make them approximately equal for all gradations. By doing so, it can be perceived by the human eye as if the original image was displayed, and deterioration in the quality of the moving image due to the hold type can be prevented. Note that the number of sub-images may be greater than two. For example, if the number of sub-images is 3, if the gamma characteristics of each of the three sub-images are adjusted so that the total amount from linear to bright and the total amount from linear to dark are approximately equal Good.

Note that the gamma complementing method is also preferable because it can display the same image as the original image without lowering brightness by satisfying the sub-image distribution condition. further,
In the gamma complement method, since the change in the brightness L _j of each sub-image with respect to the gradation follows the gamma curve, each sub-image can display the gradation smoothly by itself,
Finally, it has the advantage of improving the quality of the image perceived by the human eye.

The method of using an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as a sub image is a method in which one sub image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation from the preceding and succeeding images. By doing so, the motion of the image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved.

Next, the relationship between the timing for displaying the sub image and the method for creating the sub image will be described. The timing for displaying the first sub-image is the same as the timing for displaying the original image determined in the first step, and the timing for displaying the second sub-image is the same as the timing determined in the first step. Although it can be arbitrarily determined regardless of the timing of displaying the image, the sub image itself may be changed according to the timing of displaying the second sub image. In this way, even when the timing for displaying the second sub-image is changed variously, it can be perceived by the human eye as if the original image was displayed. Specifically, if the timing for displaying the second sub-image is advanced, the first sub-image is brightened and the second
The sub-image can be made darker. Furthermore, when the timing for displaying the second sub-image is delayed, the first sub-image can be made darker and the second sub-image can be made lighter. This is because the brightness perceived by human eyes varies depending on the length of the period during which an image is displayed. More specifically, the brightness perceived by the human eye becomes brighter as the image display period is longer and darker as the image display period is shorter. That is, by increasing the timing for displaying the second sub-image, the length of the period for displaying the first sub-image is shortened, and the length of the period for displaying the second sub-image is increased. As it is, the first sub-image is dark and the second sub-image is bright and perceived by human eyes. As a result, an image different from the original image is perceived by the human eye.
The sub-image can be brighter and the second sub-image can be darker. Similarly, the second
By delaying the timing for displaying the second sub-image, the length of the period for displaying the first sub-image becomes longer, and the length of the period for displaying the second sub-image becomes shorter. The sub-image can be darker and the second sub-image can be brighter.

Based on the above description, the processing procedure in the second step is shown below.
As procedure 1, a method for creating a plurality of sub-images from one original image is determined. More specifically, a method of creating a plurality of sub-images includes a method of using the original image as it is as a sub-image, a method of distributing the brightness of the original image to the plurality of sub-images, and an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as a sub-image. Can be selected from the methods used as
As procedure 2, the number J of sub-images is determined. J is an integer of 2 or more.
As procedure 3, the brightness L _j of the pixel in the j-th sub image and the length T _{j of the} period during which the j-th sub image is displayed are determined according to the method selected in procedure 1. According to the procedure 3, the length of the period during which each sub image is displayed and the brightness of each pixel included in each sub image are specifically determined.
As the procedure 4, the original image is processed according to the items determined in the procedures 1 to 3 and actually displayed.
In step 5, the target original image is moved to the next original image. And it returns to the procedure 1.

Note that the mechanism for executing the procedure in the second step may be implemented in the apparatus, or may be predetermined in the apparatus design stage. If a mechanism for executing the procedure in the second step is mounted on the apparatus, it is possible to switch the driving method so that the optimum operation according to the situation is performed. The situation here refers to the contents of the image data, the environment inside and outside the device (temperature, humidity, atmospheric pressure, light, sound, magnetic field, electric field, radiation dose,
Altitude, acceleration, moving speed, etc.), user settings, software version, etc. On the other hand, if the mechanism for executing the procedure in the second step is determined in advance at the device design stage, an optimum driving circuit for each driving method can be used, and the mechanism is determined. As a result, a reduction in manufacturing cost due to mass production effects can be expected.

Next, various driving methods determined by the procedure in the second step will be described in detail by specifically showing the values of n and m in the first step.

In the procedure 1 in the second step, when the method using the original image as it is as the sub image is selected, the driving method is as follows.

I-th image data (i is a positive integer);
I + 1-th image data are sequentially prepared at a constant period T,
The period T is divided into J (J is an integer of 2 or more) sub-image display periods,
The i-th image data is data that allows each of a plurality of pixels to have a unique brightness L;
The j-th sub image (j is an integer from 1 to J) is formed by juxtaposing a plurality of pixels each having a unique brightness L _j and is displayed for the j-th sub image display period T _j. Image
L, T, L _j , T _j , a display device driving method that satisfies a sub-image distribution condition,
In all j, the brightness L _j of each pixel included in the j-th sub-image is characterized in that L _j = L for each pixel.
Here, the original image data created in the first step can be used as the image data sequentially prepared at a fixed period T. That is, all the display patterns mentioned in the description of the first step can be combined with the driving method.

Then, when the number J of sub-images is determined as 2 in the procedure 2 in the second step and T ₁ = T ₂ = T / 2 is determined in the procedure 3, the driving method is shown in FIG. It will be like that.
In FIG. 85, the horizontal axis represents time, and the vertical axis represents various n and m used in the first step.

For example, in the first step, when n = 1, m = 1, that is, when the conversion ratio (n / m) is 1, the driving method as shown in the location of n = 1, m = 1 in FIG. Become. At this time, the display frame rate is twice the frame rate of the input image data (double speed driving). Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 120 Hz (120 Hz driving). Then, an image is continuously displayed twice for one input image data. Here, in the case of the double speed drive, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is smaller than the double speed, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the frame rate is larger than the double speed. Furthermore, in the procedure 1 of the second step,
By selecting a method that uses the original image as a sub-image as it is, it is possible to stop the operation of a circuit that creates an intermediate image by motion compensation, or to omit the circuit itself from the device. Can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Further, it is effective to combine the AC drive and 120 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, while the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device is 120 Hz, the AC drive frequency is an integer multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz).
, 120 Hz, 240 Hz, etc.), flicker that appears due to AC driving can be reduced to a level that is not perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about ½ times the cycle of the input image data.

Further, for example, in the first step, n = 2, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m
) Is 2, the driving method is as shown in the places where n = 2 and m = 1 in FIG. At this time, the display frame rate is four times (four times speed driving) the frame rate of the input image data. Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 240 Hz (240 Hz drive). Then, four images are continuously displayed for one input image data. At this time, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Here, in the case of the quadruple speed drive, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is smaller than the quadruple speed, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the frame rate is larger than the quadruple speed. Further, in the procedure 1 of the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as the sub-image is selected, so that the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation is stopped or the circuit itself is omitted from the apparatus. Therefore, power consumption and device manufacturing cost can be reduced. Furthermore, when the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device,
Since the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, it brings about a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect against obstacles such as trailing of moving images and afterimages. Further, it is effective to combine the AC drive and 240 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 240 Hz and setting the AC driving frequency to an integral multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, 120 Hz, 240 Hz, etc.), It can be reduced to a level not perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/4 times the cycle of the input image data.

Further, for example, in the first step, n = 3, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m
) Is 3, the driving method is as shown in FIG. 85 where n = 3 and m = 1. At this time, the display frame rate is 6 times (6 × speed driving) the frame rate of the input image data. Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 360 Hz (360 Hz drive). Then, six images are continuously displayed for one input image data. At this time, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Here, in the case of 6 × speed driving, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is lower than 6 × speed, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the frame rate is higher than 6 × speed. Further, in the procedure 1 of the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as the sub-image is selected, so that the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation is stopped or the circuit itself is omitted from the apparatus. Therefore, power consumption and device manufacturing cost can be reduced. Furthermore, when the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device,
Since the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, it brings about a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect against obstacles such as trailing of moving images and afterimages. It is also effective to combine AC driving and 360 Hz driving of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 360 Hz and setting the frequency of AC driving to an integer multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, 120 Hz, 180 Hz, etc.), flicker that appears due to AC driving is It can be reduced to a level not perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/6 times the period of the input image data.

Further, for example, in the first step, n = 3, m = 2, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m
) Is 3/2, the driving method is as shown at n = 3 and m = 2 in FIG.
At this time, the display frame rate is three times (three times speed driving) the frame rate of the input image data. Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 180 Hz (180 Hz drive). An image is displayed three times in succession for one input image data. At this time, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Where 3
In the double speed drive, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is smaller than the triple speed, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the frame rate is larger than the triple speed. Further, in the procedure 1 of the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as the sub-image is selected, so that the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation is stopped or the circuit itself is omitted from the apparatus. Therefore, power consumption and device manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Further, it is effective to combine the AC drive and 180 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 180 Hz and setting the AC driving frequency to an integral multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, 120 Hz, 180 Hz, etc.), It can be reduced to a level not perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/3 times the cycle of the input image data.

Further, for example, in the first step, n = 4, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m
) Is 4, the drive method is as shown in FIG. 85 where n = 4 and m = 1. At this time, the display frame rate is 8 times (8 times speed driving) the frame rate of the input image data. Specifically, for example, when the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 480 Hz (480 Hz drive). Then, an image is continuously displayed 8 times for one input image data. At this time, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Here, in the case of 8 × speed driving, the quality of moving images can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is lower than 8 × speed, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the frame rate is higher than 8 × speed. Further, in the procedure 1 of the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as the sub-image is selected, so that the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation is stopped or the circuit itself is omitted from the apparatus. Therefore, power consumption and device manufacturing cost can be reduced. Furthermore, when the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device,
Since the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, it brings about a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect against obstacles such as trailing of moving images and afterimages. Further, it is effective to combine the AC drive and 480 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 480 Hz and setting the AC driving frequency to an integral multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, 120 Hz, 240 Hz, etc.), It can be reduced to a level not perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/8 times the cycle of the input image data.

Further, for example, in the first step, n = 4, m = 3, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m
) Is 4/3, the driving method is as shown in FIG. 85 where n = 4 and m = 3.
At this time, the display frame rate is 8/3 times the frame rate of the input image data (8
/ 3 times speed driving). Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 160 Hz (160 Hz drive). Then, the image is continuously displayed eight times for the three input image data. At this time, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Here, in the case of 8/3 times speed driving, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is smaller than 8/3 times speed, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the frame rate is larger than 8/3 times speed. Further, in the procedure 1 of the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as the sub-image is selected, so that the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation is stopped or the circuit itself is omitted from the apparatus. Therefore, power consumption and device manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage.
Furthermore, it is also effective to combine AC driving and 160 Hz driving of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 160 Hz and setting the AC driving frequency to an integral multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 40 Hz, 80 Hz, 160 Hz, 320 Hz, etc.), It can be reduced to a level not perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 3/8 times the cycle of the input image data.

Further, for example, in the first step, n = 5, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m
) Is 5, the drive method is as shown in FIG. 85 where n = 5 and m = 1. At this time, the display frame rate is 10 times (10 times speed driving) the frame rate of the input image data. Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 600 Hz (600 Hz drive). Then, the image is continuously displayed ten times for one input image data. At this time, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. here,
In the case of 10 × speed driving, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is smaller than 10 × speed, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where it is larger than 10 × speed. Further, in the procedure 1 of the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as the sub-image is selected, so that the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation is stopped or the circuit itself is omitted from the apparatus. Therefore, power consumption and device manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. It is also effective to combine the AC drive and 600 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 600 Hz and setting the AC driving frequency to an integral multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, 100 Hz, 120 Hz, etc.), It can be reduced to a level not perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/10 times the cycle of the input image data.

Further, for example, in the first step, n = 5, m = 2, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m
) Is 5/2, the driving method is as shown in FIG. 85 where n = 5 and m = 2.
At this time, the display frame rate is 5 times (5 times speed driving) the frame rate of the input image data. Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 300 Hz (300 Hz drive). Then, the image is continuously displayed five times for one input image data. At this time, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Here, in the case of 5 × speed driving, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is lower than 5 × speed, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the frame rate is higher than 5 × speed. In addition, the second
In step 1 of step 1, the method of using the original image as it is as the sub-image is selected, so that the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the apparatus. Power consumption and device manufacturing costs can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Furthermore, it is also effective to combine AC driving and 300 Hz driving of the liquid crystal display device. That is, while the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device is 300 Hz, the AC driving frequency is an integer multiple or a fraction thereof (
For example, by setting the frequency to 30 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 100 Hz, etc., flicker that appears due to AC driving can be reduced to a level that is not perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/5 times the cycle of the input image data.

As described above, in the procedure 1 in the second step, a method of using the original image as it is as a sub-image is selected.
In the procedure 2 in the second step, the number of sub-images is determined to be 2,
In the procedure 3 in the second step, if it is determined that T1 = T2 = T / 2,
Since the display frame rate can be further doubled with respect to the frame rate conversion of the conversion ratio determined by the values of n and m in this step, the quality of the moving image can be further improved. Furthermore, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the display frame rate is lower than the display frame rate, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the display frame rate is higher than the display frame rate.
Further, in the procedure 1 of the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as the sub-image is selected, so that the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation is stopped or the circuit itself is omitted from the apparatus. Therefore, power consumption and device manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. further,
By increasing the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device and setting the AC driving frequency to an integral multiple or a fraction thereof, flicker that appears due to AC driving can be reduced to a level that is not perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, the response time of the liquid crystal element is the period of the input image data (
By applying to a liquid crystal display device that is about 1 / (twice the conversion ratio)), the image quality can be improved.

Although detailed description is omitted, it is clear that the same advantages can be obtained in cases other than the conversion ratio raised above. For example, in the range where n is 10 or less, in addition to the above,
n = 5, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 5/3 (10/3 double speed drive, 200 Hz)
,
n = 5, m = 4, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 5/4 (5/2 double speed drive, 150 Hz),
n = 6, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 6 (12 × speed drive, 720 Hz),
n = 6, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 6/5 (12/5 double speed drive, 144 Hz)
,
n = 7, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7 (14 × speed drive, 840 Hz),
n = 7, m = 2, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/2 (7-times speed drive, 420 Hz),
n = 7, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/3 (14/3 double speed drive, 280 Hz)
,
n = 7, m = 4, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/4 (7/2 double speed drive, 210 Hz),
n = 7, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/5 (14/5 double speed drive, 168 Hz)
,
n = 7, m = 6, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/6 (7/3 double speed drive, 140 Hz),
n = 8, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8 (16 × speed driving, 960 Hz),
n = 8, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8/3 (16/3 double speed drive, 320 Hz)
,
n = 8, m = 5, ie conversion ratio (n / m) = 8/5 (16/5 double speed drive, 192 Hz)
,
n = 8, m = 7, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8/7 (16/7 double speed drive, 137 Hz)
,
n = 9, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9 (18 × speed driving, 1080 Hz),
n = 9, m = 2, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/2 (9-times speed driving, 540 Hz),
n = 9, m = 4, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/4 (9/2 double speed drive, 270 Hz),
n = 9, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/5 (18/5 double speed drive, 216 Hz)
,
n = 9, m = 7, ie conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/7 (18/7 double speed drive, 154 Hz)
,
n = 9, m = 8, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/8 (9/4 double speed drive, 135 Hz),
n = 10, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10 (20 × speed drive, 1200 Hz),
n = 10, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10/3 (20/3 double speed drive, 400H
z),
n = 10, m = 7, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10/7 (20/7 double speed drive, 171H
z),
n = 10, m = 9, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10/9 (20/9 double speed drive, 133H
z),
The above combinations are possible. The frequency notation is an example when the input frame rate is 60 Hz. For other input frame rates, a value obtained by integrating twice the respective conversion ratios with the input frame rate is the drive frequency.

In the case where n is an integer greater than 10, specific numbers of n and m are not mentioned, but it is clear that the procedure in the second step can be applied to various n and m. .

When J = 2, it is particularly effective if the conversion ratio in the first step is greater than 2. This is because if the number of sub-images is relatively small in the second step, such as J = 2, the conversion ratio in the first step can be increased accordingly. Such a conversion ratio is 3, 4, 5, 5/2, 6, 7 in a range where n is 10 or less.
7/2, 7/3, 8, 8/3, 9, 9/2, 9/4, 10, 10/3.
When the display frame rate after the first step is such a value, an advantage of reducing the number of sub-images in the second step (reducing power consumption and manufacturing cost, etc.) by setting J = 3 or more. In addition, it is possible to achieve both the advantages (high quality of moving images, reduction of flicker, etc.) due to the large final display frame rate.

Here, in step 2, the number J of sub-images is determined to be 2, and in step 3, T ₁ =
Although the case where T ₂ = T / 2 has been described has been described, it is obvious that the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, in the procedure 3 in the second step, when T ₁ <T ₂ is determined, the first sub-image can be made brighter and the second sub-image can be made darker. In addition, the second
If it is determined that T ₁ > T ₂ in the procedure 3 in step S1, the first sub-image can be made darker and the second sub-image can be made lighter. In this way, the original image can be properly perceived by the human eye, and at the same time, the display can be pseudo-impulse driven, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved. However, when the method of using the original image as it is as the sub image is selected in the procedure 1 as in the above driving method, it may be displayed as it is without changing the brightness of the sub image. This is because in this case, since the images used as the sub images are the same, the original image can be displayed properly regardless of the display timing of the sub images.

Further, in the procedure 2, it is obvious that the number J of sub-images may be determined to be other than 2 instead of 2. In this case, the display frame rate can be further increased to J times the frame rate conversion of the conversion ratio determined by the values of n and m in the first step, so that the quality of the moving image is further improved. Is possible. Furthermore, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the display frame rate is lower than the display frame rate, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the display frame rate is higher than the display frame rate. Further, in the procedure 1 of the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as the sub-image is selected, so that the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation is stopped or the circuit itself is omitted from the apparatus. Therefore, power consumption and device manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Furthermore, by increasing the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device and setting the AC driving frequency to an integral multiple or a fraction thereof, flickers that appear due to AC driving can be reduced to a level that is not perceived by human eyes. it can. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about (1 / (J times the conversion ratio)) times the cycle of the input image data.

For example, when J = 3, the quality of the moving image can be improved more than when the number of sub-images is smaller than 3, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the number of sub-images is larger than 3. Have advantages. Further, the response time of the liquid crystal element is (1 of the cycle of the input image data.
By applying to a liquid crystal display device that is approximately / (3 times the conversion ratio)) times, the image quality can be improved.

Furthermore, for example, when J = 4, the quality of the moving image can be improved particularly when the number of sub-images is smaller than 4, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost are reduced as compared with the case where the number of sub-images is larger than 4. It has the advantage of being able to. Furthermore, by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1 / (4 times the conversion ratio) of the cycle of the input image data, the image quality can be improved.

Furthermore, for example, when J = 5, the quality of the moving image can be improved particularly when the number of sub-images is smaller than 5, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost are reduced as compared with the case where the number of sub-images is larger than 5. It has the advantage of being able to. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 1 / (5 times the conversion ratio) times the cycle of the input image data.

Furthermore, even if J is other than those listed above, it has similar advantages.

When J = 3 or more, the conversion ratio in the first step can take various values. In particular, when the conversion ratio in the first step is relatively small (2 or less), J = 3
The above is effective. This is because if the display frame rate after the first step is relatively small, J can be increased by that amount in the second step. Such a conversion ratio is 1, 2, 3/2, 4/3, in the range where n is 10 or less.
5/3, 5/4, 6/5, 7/4, 7/5, 7/6, 8/7, 9/5, 9/7, 9/8,
10/7, 10/9. Of these, the conversion ratio is 1, 2, 3/2, 4/3, 5 /
The cases of 3, 5/4 are illustrated in FIG. As described above, when the display frame rate after the first step is a relatively small value, by setting J = 3 or more, the advantage of the small display frame rate in the first step (the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced). Reduction) and the advantages (high quality of moving images, reduction of flicker, etc.) due to a large final display frame rate can be achieved at the same time.

Next, another example of the driving method determined by the procedure in the second step will be described.

In the procedure 1 in the second step, when the black insertion method is selected among the methods of distributing the brightness of the original image to the plurality of sub-images, the driving method is as follows.

I-th image data (i is a positive integer);
I + 1-th image data are sequentially prepared at a constant period T,
The period T is divided into J (J is an integer of 2 or more) sub-image display periods,
The i-th image data is data that allows each of a plurality of pixels to have a unique brightness L;
The j-th sub image (j is an integer from 1 to J) is formed by juxtaposing a plurality of pixels each having a unique brightness L _j and is displayed for the j-th sub image display period T _j. Image
L, T, L _j , T _j , a display device driving method that satisfies a sub-image distribution condition,
In at least one j, the brightness L _{j of} all the pixels included in the j-th sub-image is expressed as L _j
= 0.
Here, the original image data created in the first step can be used as the image data sequentially prepared at a fixed period T. That is, all the display patterns mentioned in the description of the first step can be combined with the driving method.

It should be noted that the above driving method can be implemented in combination with respect to various n and m used in the first step.

Then, when the number J of sub-images is determined as 2 in the procedure 2 in the second step and T ₁ = T ₂ = T / 2 is determined in the procedure 3, the driving method is shown in FIG. It will be like that.
Since the features and advantages of the driving method (display timings at various n and m) shown in FIG. 85 have already been described, detailed description thereof will be omitted here, but in procedure 1 in the second step, the brightness of the original image It is clear that the same advantage is obtained when the black insertion method is selected among the methods for distributing the image to a plurality of sub-images. For example, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Furthermore, when the display frame rate is high, the quality of the moving image can be improved, and when the display frame rate is low, power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Furthermore, flicker that appears due to AC drive can be reduced to the extent that it is not perceived by the human eye.

Among the methods for distributing the brightness of the original image to the plurality of sub-images in the procedure 1 of the second step, a characteristic advantage of selecting the black insertion method is that an intermediate image is created by motion compensation. Since the operation of the circuit can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the device,
The power consumption and the manufacturing cost of the device can be reduced. Furthermore, since the impulse-type display method can be made pseudo regardless of the gradation value included in the image data, the quality of the moving image can be improved.

Here, in step 2, the number J of sub-images is determined to be 2, and in step 3, T ₁ =
Although the case where T ₂ = T / 2 has been described has been described, it is obvious that the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, in the procedure 3 in the second step, when T ₁ <T ₂ is determined, the first sub-image can be made brighter and the second sub-image can be made darker. In addition, the second
If it is determined that T ₁ > T ₂ in the procedure 3 in step S1, the first sub-image can be made darker and the second sub-image can be made lighter. In this way, the original image can be properly perceived by the human eye, and at the same time, the display can be pseudo-impulse driven, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved. However, when the black insertion method is selected in the method of distributing the brightness of the original image to the plurality of sub-images in the procedure 1 as in the above driving method, the brightness of the sub-image is not changed. Alternatively, it may be displayed as it is. because,
In this case, if the brightness of the sub-image is not changed, the entire brightness of the original image is only darkened and displayed. That is, by actively using this method for controlling the brightness of the display device, the brightness can be controlled while improving the quality of the moving image.

Further, in the procedure 2, it is obvious that the number J of sub-images may be determined to be other than 2 instead of 2. Since the advantages in that case have already been described, detailed description is omitted here. Of the methods for distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images in step 1 in the second step, the black insertion method is used. Obviously, the selected case has similar advantages. For example, the response time of the liquid crystal element is 1 / (J times the conversion ratio) of the cycle of the input image data
) The image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device of about double.

Next, another example of the driving method determined by the procedure in the second step will be described.

In the procedure 1 in the second step, when the time-division gradation control method is selected from among the methods for distributing the brightness of the original image to the plurality of sub-images, the driving method is as follows.

I-th image data (i is a positive integer);
I + 1-th image data are sequentially prepared at a constant period T,
The period T is divided into J (J is an integer of 2 or more) sub-image display periods,
The i-th image data is data that allows each of a plurality of pixels to have a unique brightness L;
The inherent brightness L has a maximum value L _max ,
The j-th sub image (j is an integer from 1 to J) is formed by juxtaposing a plurality of pixels each having a unique brightness L _j and is displayed for the j-th sub image display period T _j. Image
L, T, L _j , T _j , a display device driving method that satisfies a sub-image distribution condition,
In displaying the inherent brightness L, from (j−1) × L _max / J to J × L _max
The adjustment of the brightness in the brightness range of / J is performed by adjusting the brightness in only one sub-image display period among the J sub-image display periods.
Here, the original image data created in the first step can be used as the image data sequentially prepared at a fixed period T. That is, all the display patterns mentioned in the description of the first step can be combined with the driving method.

It should be noted that the above driving method can be implemented in combination with respect to various n and m used in the first step.

Then, when the number J of sub-images is determined as 2 in the procedure 2 in the second step and T ₁ = T ₂ = T / 2 is determined in the procedure 3, the driving method is shown in FIG. It will be like that.
The characteristics and advantages of the driving method (display timings at various n and m) shown in FIG. It is clear that the same advantage is obtained when the time-division gradation control method is selected among the methods for distributing the image to a plurality of sub-images. For example, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Furthermore, when the display frame rate is high, the quality of the moving image can be improved, and when the display frame rate is low, power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Furthermore, flicker that appears due to AC drive can be reduced to the extent that it is not perceived by the human eye.

Among the methods of distributing the brightness of the original image to the plurality of sub-images in the procedure 1 of the second step, the characteristic advantage of selecting the time-division gradation control method is that the intermediate image is obtained by motion compensation. Since the operation of the circuit for generating the circuit can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the apparatus, the power consumption and the manufacturing cost of the apparatus can be reduced. further,
Since a pseudo impulse display method can be used, the quality of moving images can be improved and the brightness of the display device does not decrease, so that power consumption can be further reduced.

Here, in step 2, the number J of sub-images is determined to be 2, and in step 3, T ₁ =
Although the case where T ₂ = T / 2 has been described has been described, it is obvious that the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, in the procedure 3 in the second step, when T ₁ <T ₂ is determined, the first sub-image can be made brighter and the second sub-image can be made darker. In addition, the second
If it is determined that T ₁ > T ₂ in the procedure 3 in step S1, the first sub-image can be made darker and the second sub-image can be made lighter. In this way, the original image can be properly perceived by the human eye, and at the same time, the display can be pseudo-impulse driven, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved. In this way, the original image can be properly perceived by the human eye, and at the same time, the display can be pseudo-impulse driven, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved.

Further, in the procedure 2, it is obvious that the number J of sub-images may be determined to be other than 2 instead of 2. Since the advantages in that case have already been described, detailed description is omitted here, but among the methods of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images in step 1 in the second step, time-division gradation Obviously, when the control method is selected, it has similar advantages. For example, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1 / (J times the conversion ratio) of the cycle of the input image data.

Next, another example of the driving method determined by the procedure in the second step will be described.

In the procedure 1 in the second step, when the gamma complement method is selected among the methods for distributing the brightness of the original image to the plurality of sub-images, the driving method is as follows.

I-th image data (i is a positive integer);
I + 1-th image data are sequentially prepared at a constant period T,
The period T is divided into J (J is an integer of 2 or more) sub-image display periods,
The i-th image data is data that allows each of a plurality of pixels to have a unique brightness L;
The j-th sub image (j is an integer from 1 to J) is formed by juxtaposing a plurality of pixels each having a unique brightness L _j and is displayed for the j-th sub image display period T _j. Image
L, T, L _j , T _j , a display device driving method that satisfies a sub-image distribution condition,
In each sub-image, the brightness change characteristic with respect to the gradation is shifted from linear, and the total amount of brightness shifted from linear to brighter and the total amount of brightness shifted from linear to darker are , It is characterized by being approximately equal in all gradations.
Here, the original image data created in the first step can be used as the image data sequentially prepared at a fixed period T. That is, all the display patterns mentioned in the description of the first step can be combined with the driving method.

It should be noted that the above driving method can be implemented in combination with respect to various n and m used in the first step.

Then, when the number J of sub-images is determined as 2 in the procedure 2 in the second step and T ₁ = T ₂ = T / 2 is determined in the procedure 3, the driving method is shown in FIG. It will be like that.
Since the features and advantages of the driving method (display timings at various n and m) shown in FIG. 85 have already been described, detailed description thereof will be omitted here, but in procedure 1 in the second step, the brightness of the original image It is clear that the same advantage is obtained when the gamma complement method is selected among the methods for distributing the image to a plurality of sub-images. For example, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Furthermore, when the display frame rate is high, the quality of the moving image can be improved, and when the display frame rate is low, power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Furthermore, flicker that appears due to AC drive can be reduced to the extent that it is not perceived by the human eye.

In the procedure 1 of the second step, among the methods for distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images, a characteristic advantage of selecting the gamma complement method is that an intermediate image is created by motion compensation. Since the operation of the circuit can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the apparatus, the power consumption and the manufacturing cost of the apparatus can be reduced. Furthermore, since the impulse-type display method can be made pseudo regardless of the gradation value included in the image data, the quality of the moving image can be improved. Further, the sub-image may be obtained by directly gamma-converting the image data. In this case, there is an advantage that the gamma value can be controlled variously depending on the magnitude of the motion of the moving image. Further, the image data may not be directly gamma-converted, and the sub-image with the changed gamma value may be obtained by changing the reference voltage of the digital-analog converter circuit (DAC). In this case, since the image data is not directly gamma-converted, a circuit for performing gamma conversion can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the apparatus, so that power consumption and manufacturing cost of the apparatus can be reduced. . Further, in the gamma complement method, since the change in the brightness L _j of each sub-image with respect to the gradation follows the gamma curve, each sub-image can display the gradation smoothly by itself, and finally the human The image quality perceived by the eyes is also improved.

Here, in step 2, the number J of sub-images is determined to be 2, and in step 3, T ₁ =
Although the case where T ₂ = T / 2 has been described has been described, it is obvious that the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, in the procedure 3 in the second step, when T ₁ <T ₂ is determined, the first sub-image can be made brighter and the second sub-image can be made darker. In addition, the second
If it is determined that T ₁ > T ₂ in the procedure 3 in step S1, the first sub-image can be made darker and the second sub-image can be made lighter. In this way, the original image can be properly perceived by the human eye, and at the same time, the display can be pseudo-impulse driven, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved. As in the above driving method, the procedure 1
In the method of distributing the brightness of the original image to the plurality of sub-images, when the gamma method is selected, the gamma value may be changed when the brightness of the sub-image is changed. That is, the gamma value may be determined according to the display timing of the second sub-image. In this way, a circuit that changes the brightness of the entire image can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the apparatus, so that power consumption and manufacturing cost of the apparatus can be reduced.

Further, in the procedure 2, it is obvious that the number J of sub-images may be determined to be other than 2 instead of 2. Since the advantages in that case have already been described, detailed description is omitted here, but among the methods of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images in step 1 in the second step, time-division gradation Obviously, when the control method is selected, it has similar advantages. For example, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1 / (J times the conversion ratio) of the cycle of the input image data.

Next, another example of the driving method determined by the procedure in the second step will be described in detail.

In the procedure 1 in the second step, a method of using the intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as a sub-image is selected,
In the procedure 2 in the second step, the number of sub-images is determined to be 2,
If it is determined in the procedure 3 in the second step that T1 = T2 = T / 2, the second
The driving method determined by the procedure in this step is as follows.

I-th image data (i is a positive integer);
I + 1-th image data are sequentially prepared at a constant period T,
A k-th image (k is a positive integer);
The (k + 1) th image,
A display device driving method for sequentially displaying k + 2 images at intervals of 1/2 times the period of original image data,
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data;
The (k + 1) th image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a movement obtained by halving the movement from the i-th image data to the (i + 1) -th image data,
The k + 2th image is displayed according to the i + 1th image data.
Here, the original image data created in the first step can be used as the image data sequentially prepared at a fixed period T. That is, all the display patterns mentioned in the description of the first step can be combined with the driving method.

It should be noted that the above driving method can be implemented in combination with respect to various n and m used in the first step.

In the procedure 1 in the second step, the characteristic advantage of selecting the method using the intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as a sub-image is that the intermediate image obtained by motion compensation in the procedure in the first step is selected. When the interpolated image is used, the method for obtaining the intermediate image used in the first step can be used as it is in the second step. That is, a circuit for obtaining an intermediate image by motion compensation can be used not only in the first step but also in the second step, so that the circuit can be used effectively and the processing efficiency can be improved. In addition, since the movement of the image can be further smoothed, the quality of the moving image can be further improved.

Here, in step 2, the number J of sub-images is determined to be 2, and in step 3, T ₁ =
Although the case where T ₂ = T / 2 has been described has been described, it is obvious that the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, in the procedure 3 in the second step, when T ₁ <T ₂ is determined, the first sub-image can be made brighter and the second sub-image can be made darker. In addition, the second
If it is determined that T ₁ > T ₂ in the procedure 3 in step S1, the first sub-image can be made darker and the second sub-image can be made lighter. In this way, the original image can be properly perceived by the human eye, and at the same time, the display can be pseudo-impulse driven, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved. In this way, the original image can be properly perceived by the human eye, and at the same time, the display can be pseudo-impulse driven, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved. As in the above driving method, in step 2,
When a method using an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as a sub-image is selected, the brightness of the sub-image need not be changed. This is because the image in the intermediate state is completed as an image by itself, so that even if the display timing of the second sub-image changes, the image perceived by human eyes does not change. In this case, a circuit that changes the brightness of the entire image can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the apparatus, so that power consumption and manufacturing cost of the apparatus can be reduced.

Further, in the procedure 2, it is obvious that the number J of sub-images may be determined to be other than 2 instead of 2. Since the advantages in that case have already been described, detailed description will be omitted here, but the same applies when the method using the intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as the sub image is selected in step 1 in the second step. Obviously, it has many advantages. For example, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1 / (J times the conversion ratio) of the cycle of the input image data.

Next, a specific example of a frame rate conversion method when the input frame rate and the display frame rate are different will be described with reference to FIG. In the method shown in FIGS. 87A to 87C, it is assumed that a circular area on the image is an area whose position changes depending on the frame, and a triangular area on the image is an area whose position hardly changes depending on the frame. Yes. However,
This is an example for explanation, and the displayed image is not limited to this. The methods of FIGS. 87A to 87C can be applied to various images.

FIG. 87A shows a case where the display frame rate is twice the input frame rate (conversion ratio is 2). When the conversion ratio is 2, there is an advantage that the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 2. Further, when the conversion ratio is 2, there is an advantage that power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 2. FIG. 87 (
A) schematically shows the temporal change of the displayed image with the horizontal axis as time. Here, the image of interest is referred to as a p-th image (p is a positive integer). The image displayed next to the image of interest is the (p + 1) th image,
For the sake of convenience, how far away from the image of interest the image that is displayed before the image of interest is displayed, such as the (p-1) -th image. I will do it. The image 180701 is the pth image, the image 180702 is the (p + 1) th image, the image 180703 is the (p + 2) th image, the image 180704 is the (p + 3) th image, the image1
It is assumed that 80705 is the (p + 4) th image. The period Tin represents the cycle of the input image data. Note that FIG. 87A illustrates the case where the conversion ratio is 2, and thus the period Tin
Is twice as long as the period from when the p-th image is displayed until the (p + 1) -th image is displayed.

Here, the (p + 1) -th image 180702 is changed from the p-th image 180701 to the (p + 2) -th image.
It may be an image created so as to be in an intermediate state between the p-th image 180701 and the (p + 2) -th image 180703 by detecting the amount of change in the image up to the image 180703. In FIG. 87A, the state of the image in the intermediate state is represented by a region (a circular region) whose position is changed by the frame and a region (a triangular region) whose position is not substantially changed by the frame. That is, the position of the circular area in the (p + 1) th image 180702 is an intermediate position between the position in the pth image 180701 and the position in the (p + 2) image 180703. That is, the (p + 1) th image 180702 is obtained by performing motion compensation and interpolating image data. Thus, smooth display can be performed by performing motion compensation on an object having motion on an image and interpolating image data.

Further, the (p + 1) -th image 180702 includes the p-th image 180701 and the (p + 2) -th image.
The image may be an image in which the brightness of the image is controlled according to a certain rule. For example, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), the fixed rule is L when the representative luminance of the p-th image 180701 is L and the representative luminance of the (p + 1) -th image 180702 is Lc. Lc may have a relationship of L> Lc. Preferably
There may be a relationship of 0.1L <Lc <0.8L. More desirably, 0.2L <L
There may be a relationship of c <0.5L. Or conversely, there may be a relationship of L <Lc between L and Lc. Desirably, there may be a relationship of 0.1Lc <L <0.8Lc.
More desirably, there may be a relationship of 0.2Lc <L <0.5Lc. By doing so, the display can be made pseudo-impulse type, so that an afterimage of the eye can be suppressed.

Note that typical luminance of an image will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

In this way, there are two different causes for moving image blur (that is, the movement of the image is not smooth,
And the afterimage of the eye) can be solved at the same time to greatly reduce motion blur.

Further, for the (p + 3) -th image 180704, the (p + 2) -th image 180703 is also used.
It may also be created from the (p + 4) th image 180705 using a similar method. That is, the (p + 3) -th image 180704 is changed from the (p + 2) -th image 180703 to the (p + 2) -th image 180704.
By detecting the amount of change in the image up to +4) image 180705, the (p + 2) th image 1
The image may be an image created so as to be in an intermediate state between the 80703 and the (p + 4) th image 180705, and the image brightness may be controlled according to a certain rule.

FIG. 87B shows a case where the display frame rate is three times the input frame rate (conversion ratio is 3). FIG. 87 (B) schematically shows the temporal change of the displayed image with the horizontal axis as time. An image 180711 is a p-th image, an image 1807
12 is a (p + 1) th image, and image 180713 is a (p + 2) th image, image 180714.
Is the (p + 3) th image, image 180715 is the (p + 4) th image, image 180716 is the (p + 5) th image, and image 180717 is the (p + 6) th image. The period Tin represents the cycle of the input image data. Note that since FIG. 87B illustrates a case where the conversion ratio is 3, the period Tin is three times the period from when the p-th image is displayed until the (p + 1) -th image is displayed. It becomes length.

Here, the (p + 1) -th image 180712 and the (p + 2) -th image 180713 detect the amount of change in the image from the p-th image 180711 to the (p + 3) -th image 180714, and thereby the p-th image 180711. It may also be an image created so as to be in an intermediate state between the (p + 3) -th image 180714. In FIG. 87B, the state of the image in the intermediate state is represented by an area whose position changes depending on the frame (circular area) and an area whose position hardly changes depending on the frame (triangular area). That is, the position of the circular area in the (p + 1) th image 180712 and the (p + 2) image 180713 is set to a position intermediate between the position in the pth image 180711 and the position in the (p + 3) image 180714. Specifically, when the amount of movement of the circular area detected from the p-th image 180711 and the (p + 3) image 180714 is X, the position of the circular area in the (p + 1) -th image 180712 is It may be a position displaced about (1/3) X from the position in the p-th image 180711. Furthermore, the (p + 2) -th image 1807
The position of the circular area in 13 is (2/3) from the position in the p-th image 180711.
) The position may be displaced by about X. That is, the (p + 1) th image 180712 and the (p + 2) image 180713 are obtained by performing motion compensation and interpolating image data. Thus, smooth display can be performed by performing motion compensation on an object having motion on an image and interpolating image data.

Furthermore, the (p + 1) -th image 180712 and the (p + 2) -th image 180713 are created so as to be in an intermediate state between the p-th image 180711 and the (p + 3) -th image 180714, and the brightness of the image is constant. The image may be controlled according to the rules. The certain rule is, for example, as shown in FIG. 87B, the representative luminance of the p-th image 180711 is L,
The typical luminance of the (p + 1) -th image 180712 is Lc1, and the (p + 2) -th image 180713.
When Lc2 is a representative luminance, L> Lc1 or L in L, Lc1, and Lc2
There may be a relationship of> Lc2 or Lc1 = Lc2. Desirably, 0.1 L <Lc
There may be a relationship of 1 = Lc2 <0.8L. More preferably, 0.2L <Lc =
There may be a relationship of Lc2 <0.5L. Or, conversely, in L, Lc1, and Lc2, there may be a relationship of L <Lc1 or L <Lc2 or Lc1 = Lc2. Desirably, there may be a relationship of 0.1Lc1 = 0.1Lc2 <L <0.8Lc1 = 0.8Lc2. More preferably, 0.2Lc1 = 0.2Lc2 <L <0.5Lc1 = 0.5
There may be a relationship of Lc2. By doing so, the display can be made pseudo-impulse type, so that an afterimage of the eye can be suppressed. Or you may make it the image which changes a brightness | luminance appear alternately. By doing so, the cycle in which the luminance changes can be shortened, and flicker can be reduced.

In this way, there are two different causes for moving image blur (that is, the movement of the image is not smooth,
And the afterimage of the eye) can be solved at the same time to greatly reduce motion blur.

Further, the (p + 4) image 180715 and the (p + 5) image 180716 may also be created from the (p + 3) image 180714 and the (p + 6) image 180717 using the same method. That is, the (p + 4) -th image 180715 and the (p + 5) -th image 180716 are detected by detecting the amount of change in the image from the (p + 3) -th image 180714 to the (p + 6) -th image 180717 (p + 3). Image 18071
The image may be an image created so as to be in an intermediate state between the fourth and (p + 6) th images 180717, and the image brightness may be controlled according to a certain rule.

Note that with the method shown in FIG. 87B, since the display frame rate is large, the movement of the image can follow the movement of the eyes well, and the movement of the image can be displayed smoothly. Can be greatly reduced.

In FIG. 87C, the display frame rate is 1.5 times the input frame rate (conversion ratio 1.5).
). FIG. 87C schematically shows the temporal change of the displayed image with the horizontal axis as time. Image 180721 is the pth image, image 1
80722 is the (p + 1) -th image, image 180723 is the (p + 2) -th image, and image 180
Suppose that 724 is the (p + 3) th image. Although not actually displayed, the image 180725 is input image data, and the (p + 1) th image 180722 and the (p
+2) image 180723 may be used to create the image. The period Tin represents the cycle of the input image data. Note that FIG. 87C illustrates the case where the conversion ratio is 1.5. Therefore, the period Tin is one period from when the p-th image is displayed until the (p + 1) -th image is displayed. .5 times longer.

Here, the (p + 1) -th image 180722 and the (p + 2) -th image 180723 are transmitted from the p-th image 180721 through the image 180725 to the (p + 3) -th image 180724.
The image may be an image created so as to be in an intermediate state between the p-th image 180721 and the (p + 3) -th image 180724 by detecting the change amount of the image up to. In FIG. 87C, the state of the image in the intermediate state is represented by a region (a circular region) whose position changes depending on the frame and a region (a triangular region) whose position hardly changes depending on the frame.
That is, the position of the circular area in the (p + 1) -th image 180722 and the (p + 2) -th image 180723 is an intermediate position between the position in the p-th image 180721 and the position in the (p + 3) -th image 180724. That is, the (p + 1) th image 180
The 722 and the (p + 2) -th image 180723 are obtained by performing motion compensation and interpolating image data. Thus, smooth display can be performed by performing motion compensation on an object having motion on an image and interpolating image data.

Further, the (p + 1) -th image 180722 and the (p + 2) -th image 180723 are created so as to be in an intermediate state between the p-th image 180721 and the (p + 3) -th image 180724, and the brightness of the image is constant. The image may be controlled according to the rules. The certain rule is, for example, as shown in FIG. 87C, the representative luminance of the p-th image 180721 is L,
The typical luminance of the (p + 1) -th image 180722 is Lc1, and the (p + 2) -th image 180723.
When Lc2 is a representative luminance, L> Lc1 or L in L, Lc1, and Lc2
There may be a relationship of> Lc2 or Lc1 = Lc2. Desirably, 0.1 L <Lc
There may be a relationship of 1 = Lc2 <0.8L. More preferably, 0.2L <Lc =
There may be a relationship of Lc2 <0.5L. Or, conversely, in L, Lc1, and Lc2, there may be a relationship of L <Lc1 or L <Lc2 or Lc1 = Lc2. Desirably, there may be a relationship of 0.1Lc1 = 0.1Lc2 <L <0.8Lc1 = 0.8Lc2. More preferably, 0.2Lc1 = 0.2Lc2 <L <0.5Lc1 = 0.5
There may be a relationship of Lc2. By doing so, the display can be made pseudo-impulse type, so that an afterimage of the eye can be suppressed. Or you may make it the image which changes a brightness | luminance appear alternately. By doing so, the cycle in which the luminance changes can be shortened, and flicker can be reduced.

In this way, there are two different causes for moving image blur (that is, the movement of the image is not smooth,
And the afterimage of the eye) can be solved at the same time to greatly reduce motion blur.

Note that when the method in FIG. 87C is used, the display frame rate is low, so that the time for writing a signal to the display device can be extended. Therefore, the clock frequency of the display device can be reduced, so that power consumption can be reduced. In addition, since the processing speed for performing motion compensation can be reduced, power consumption can be reduced.

Next, typical luminance of an image will be described with reference to FIG. 88 (A) to (D
The diagram shown in () schematically represents the temporal change of the displayed image with the horizontal axis as time. FIG. 88E illustrates an example of a method for measuring the luminance of an image in a certain region.

As a method of measuring the luminance of an image, there is a method of measuring the luminance individually for each pixel constituting the image. When this method is used, it is possible to measure the brightness strictly to the details of the image.

However, since the method of measuring the luminance individually for each pixel constituting the image is very labor intensive, another method may be used. As another method for measuring the luminance of the image, there is a method of paying attention to a certain area in the image and measuring the average luminance of the area. By this method, the brightness of the image can be easily measured. In the present embodiment, the luminance obtained by the method of measuring the average luminance of a certain area in the image is referred to as the representative luminance of the image for convenience.

Then, in order to obtain the representative luminance of the image, a description will be given below of which region in the image is focused.

FIG. 88A illustrates an example of a method in which the luminance of a region (a triangular region) where the position does not substantially change with respect to the change of the image is set as the representative luminance of the image. The period Tin is the cycle of the input image data, the image 180801 is the pth image, the image 180802 is the (p + 1) th image, and the image 18
0803 is the (p + 2) -th image, the first region 180804 is the luminance measurement region in the p-th image 180801, the second region 180805 is the luminance measurement region in the (p + 1) -th image 180802, and the third region 180806 is the first region. The luminance measurement areas in the (p + 2) image 180803 are respectively shown. Here, the first to third regions may be substantially the same as the spatial position in the apparatus. That is, by measuring the representative luminance of the image in the first to third regions, it is possible to obtain the temporal change in the representative luminance of the image.

By measuring the representative luminance of the image, it can be determined whether or not the display is pseudo-impulse type. For example, the luminance measured in the first region 180804 is L,
When the luminance measured in the second region 180805 is Lc, if Lc <L, the display can be said to be a pseudo impulse type. In such a case, it can be said that the quality of the moving image is improved.

In the luminance measurement region, the image quality can be improved when the typical amount of change in luminance (relative luminance) of the image with respect to time changes is in the following range. As the relative luminance, for example, the larger one for each of the first region 180804 and the second region 180805, the second region 180805 and the third region 180806, and the first region 180804 and the third region 180806, respectively. It can be the ratio of the smaller luminance to the luminance. That is, when the change amount of the typical luminance of the image with respect to the change of time is 0, the relative luminance is 100%. If the relative luminance is 80% or less, the quality of the moving image can be improved. In particular, if the relative luminance is 50% or less, the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Furthermore, if the relative luminance is 10% or more, power consumption can be reduced and flicker can be suppressed. In particular, the relative luminance is 2
If it is 0% or more, power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced. That is,
If the relative luminance is 10% or more and 80% or less, the quality of moving images can be improved, and power consumption and flicker can be reduced. Furthermore, if the relative luminance is 20% or more and 50% or less, the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved, and the power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced.

FIG. 88B shows an example of a method of measuring the luminance of the tile-divided region and setting the average value as the representative luminance of the image. The period Tin is the period of the input image data, and the image 1808
11 is the p-th image, image 180812 is the (p + 1) -th image, and image 180813 is the (p + 1) -th image.
+2) image, the first region 180814 is the luminance measurement region in the p-th image 180811, the second region 180815 is the luminance measurement region in the (p + 1) -th image 180812, and the third region 180816 is the (p + 2) -th image. The luminance measurement areas in the image 180813 are respectively shown. Here, the first to third regions may be substantially the same as the spatial position in the apparatus. That is, by measuring the representative luminance of the image in the first to third regions, it is possible to obtain the temporal change in the representative luminance of the image.

By measuring the representative luminance of the image, it can be determined whether or not the display is pseudo-impulse type. For example, if Lc is an average value in all areas of luminance measured in the first area 180814 and Lc is an average value in all areas of luminance measured in the second area 180815, then Lc <L. In other words, it can be said that the display is a pseudo impulse type. In such a case, it can be said that the quality of the moving image is improved.

In the luminance measurement region, the image quality can be improved when the typical amount of change in luminance (relative luminance) of the image with respect to time changes is in the following range. As the relative luminance, for example, the larger one of the first region 180814 and the second region 180815, the second region 180815 and the third region 180816, and the first region 180814 and the third region 180816, respectively. It can be the ratio of the smaller luminance to the luminance. That is, when the change amount of the typical luminance of the image with respect to the change of time is 0, the relative luminance is 100%. If the relative luminance is 80% or less, the quality of the moving image can be improved. In particular, if the relative luminance is 50% or less, the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Furthermore, if the relative luminance is 10% or more, power consumption can be reduced and flicker can be suppressed. In particular, the relative luminance is 2
If it is 0% or more, power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced. That is,
If the relative luminance is 10% or more and 80% or less, the quality of moving images can be improved, and power consumption and flicker can be reduced. Furthermore, if the relative luminance is 20% or more and 50% or less, the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved, and the power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced.

FIG. 88C illustrates an example of a method in which the luminance of the central region of the image is measured and the average value is used as the representative luminance of the image. The period Tin is the period of the input image data, the image 180821 is the pth image, the image 180822 is the (p + 1) th image, the image 180823 is the (p + 2) image, and the first region 180824 is the luminance in the pth image 180821. The measurement area, the second area 180825 represents the luminance measurement area in the (p + 1) -th image 180822, and the third area 180826 represents the luminance measurement area in the (p + 2) -th image 180823, respectively.

By measuring the representative luminance of the image, it can be determined whether or not the display is pseudo-impulse type. For example, the luminance measured in the first region 180824 is L,
When the luminance measured in the second region 180825 is Lc, if Lc <L, the display can be said to be a pseudo impulse type. In such a case, it can be said that the quality of the moving image is improved.

In the luminance measurement region, the image quality can be improved when the typical amount of change in luminance (relative luminance) of the image with respect to time changes is in the following range. As the relative luminance, for example, the larger one for each of the first region 180824 and the second region 180825, the second region 180825 and the third region 180826, and the first region 180824 and the third region 180826, respectively. It can be the ratio of the smaller luminance to the luminance. That is, when the change amount of the typical luminance of the image with respect to the change of time is 0, the relative luminance is 100%. If the relative luminance is 80% or less, the quality of the moving image can be improved. In particular, if the relative luminance is 50% or less, the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Furthermore, if the relative luminance is 10% or more, power consumption can be reduced and flicker can be suppressed. In particular, the relative luminance is 2
If it is 0% or more, power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced. That is,
If the relative luminance is 10% or more and 80% or less, the quality of moving images can be improved, and power consumption and flicker can be reduced. Furthermore, if the relative luminance is 20% or more and 50% or less, the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved, and the power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced.

FIG. 88D illustrates an example of a method in which the luminance of a plurality of points sampled from the entire image is measured and the average value is used as the representative luminance of the image. The period Tin is the cycle of the input image data,
An image 180831 is a pth image, an image 180832 is a (p + 1) th image, an image 1808
33 is the (p + 2) -th image, the first region 180834 is the luminance measurement region in the p-th image 180831, the second region 180835 is the luminance measurement region in the (p + 1) -th image 180832, and the third region 180836 is the first region. The luminance measurement regions in the (p + 2) image 180833 are respectively shown.

By measuring the representative luminance of the image, it can be determined whether or not the display is pseudo-impulse type. For example, if Lc is an average value in all regions of luminance measured in the first region 180834 and Lc is an average value in all regions of luminance measured in the second region 180835, Lc <L. In other words, it can be said that the display is a pseudo impulse type. In such a case, it can be said that the quality of the moving image is improved.

In the luminance measurement region, the image quality can be improved when the typical amount of change in luminance (relative luminance) of the image with respect to time changes is in the following range. As the relative luminance, for example, the larger one for each of the first region 180834 and the second region 180835, the second region 180835 and the third region 180836, and the first region 180834 and the third region 180836. It can be the ratio of the smaller luminance to the luminance. That is, when the change amount of the typical luminance of the image with respect to the change of time is 0, the relative luminance is 100%. If the relative luminance is 80% or less, the quality of the moving image can be improved. In particular, if the relative luminance is 50% or less, the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Furthermore, if the relative luminance is 10% or more, power consumption can be reduced and flicker can be suppressed. In particular, the relative luminance is 2
If it is 0% or more, power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced. That is,
If the relative luminance is 10% or more and 80% or less, the quality of moving images can be improved, and power consumption and flicker can be reduced. Furthermore, if the relative luminance is 20% or more and 50% or less, the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved, and the power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced.

FIG. 88E is a diagram showing a measurement method in the luminance measurement region in the diagrams shown in FIGS. 88A to 88D. A region 180841 is a luminance measurement region of interest, and a point 180842 is a luminance measurement point in the region 180841. A luminance measuring instrument with high temporal resolution may have a small measurement target range. Therefore, when the area 180841 is large, the entire area is not measured, but the area 180841 is pointed as shown in FIG. 88 (E). The brightness of the region 180841 may be obtained by measuring at a plurality of points without unevenness in the shape, and calculating the average value.

When the image has a combination of the three primary colors R, G, and B, the measured luminance is R, G
, B may be combined, R and G combined, G and B combined, B and R combined, and each of R, G, B It may be brightness.

Next, a method of detecting the movement of the image included in the input image data and creating an intermediate state image,
A method for controlling the driving method according to the movement of the image included in the input image data will be described.

With reference to FIG. 89, an example of a method of detecting an image motion included in input image data and creating an intermediate state image will be described. FIG. 89A shows the case where the display frame rate is twice the input frame rate (conversion ratio is 2). FIG. 89A schematically shows a method of detecting the motion of an image with the horizontal axis as time. The period Tin is the cycle of the input image data, the image 180901 is the pth image, and the image 180902 is the (p + 1) th
And image 180903 represent the (p + 2) -th image, respectively. In the image, a first region 180904, a second region 180905, and a third region 180906 are provided as time-independent regions.

First, in the (p + 2) -th image 180903, the image is divided into a plurality of tile-shaped areas, and attention is paid to the image data in the third area 180906, which is one of the areas.

Next, in the p-th image 180901, attention is focused on a range larger than the third region 180906 centered on the third region 180906. Here, a range larger than the third region 180906 centering on the third region 180906 is a data search range. The data search range is 180907 for the range in the horizontal direction (X direction) and 1809 for the range in the vertical direction (Y direction).
08. Note that the horizontal range 180907 and the vertical range 180908 of the data search range may be ranges in which the horizontal range and the vertical range of the third region 180906 are respectively expanded by about 15 pixels.

Then, an area having image data most similar to the image data in the third area 180906 is searched within the data search range. As a search method, a least square method or the like can be used. As a result of the search, the first region 18090 is the region having the most similar image data.
Suppose that 4 is derived.

Next, a vector 180909 is derived as an amount representing a difference in position between the derived first region 180904 and the third region 180906. The vector 180909 is referred to as a motion vector.

In the (p + 1) th image 180902, the vector obtained from the motion vector 180909, the image data in the third region 180906 in the (p + 2) image 180903, and the first region in the pth image 180901 are displayed. A second region 180905 is formed based on the image data in 180904.

Here, a vector obtained from the motion vector 180909 is referred to as a displacement vector 180910. The displacement vector 180910 has a role of determining a position where the second region 180905 is formed. The second region 180905 is formed at a position separated from the third region 180906 by a displacement vector 180910. The displacement vector 180910 may be an amount obtained by multiplying the motion vector 180909 by a coefficient (1/2).

The image data in the second area 180905 in the (p + 1) -th image 180902 is the image data in the third area 180906 in the (p + 2) -th image 180903, and the pth
The image data in the first area 180904 in the image 180901 may be determined. For example, the second region 1809 in the (p + 1) th image 180902
The image data in 05 is the third region 18090 in the (p + 2) -th image 180903.
6 and the average value of the image data in the first region 180904 in the p-th image 180901.

In this way, the second region 180905 in the (p + 1) th image 180902 corresponding to the third region 180906 in the (p + 2) th image 180903 can be formed. The above processing is also performed on other regions in the (p + 2) -th image 180903, so that the (p + 1) -th image 180902 is in an intermediate state between the (p + 2) -th image 180903 and the p-th image 180901. Can be formed.

FIG. 89B shows the case where the display frame rate is three times the input frame rate (conversion ratio is 3). FIG. 89B schematically shows a method of detecting the motion of an image with the horizontal axis as time. The period Tin is the cycle of the input image data, and the image 1809
11 is the p-th image, image 180912 is the (p + 1) -th image, and image 180913 is the (p-th) image.
The (+2) image and the image 180914 represent the (p + 3) th image, respectively. Also,
The first area 180915 and the second area 1809 are areas that do not depend on time in the image.
16, a third area 180917 and a fourth area 180918 are provided.

First, in the (p + 3) -th image 180914, the image is divided into a plurality of tile-shaped areas, and attention is paid to the image data in the fourth area 180918 which is one of the areas.

Next, in the p-th image 180911, attention is focused on a range larger than the fourth region 180918 centered on the fourth region 180918. Here, a range larger than the fourth area 180918 around the fourth area 180918 is a data search range. The data search range is 180919 in the horizontal direction (X direction) and 1809 in the vertical direction (Y direction).
20 The horizontal range 180919 and the vertical range 180920 of the data search range may be ranges obtained by enlarging the horizontal range and the vertical range of the fourth region 180918 by about 15 pixels, respectively.

Then, an area having image data most similar to the image data in the fourth area 180918 is searched within the data search range. As a search method, a least square method or the like can be used. As a result of the search, the first region 18091 is the region having the most similar image data.
Suppose that 5 is derived.

Next, a vector is derived as an amount representing a difference in position between the derived first region 180915 and the fourth region 180918. Note that this vector is referred to as motion vector 180921.
I will call it.

Then, in the (p + 1) th image 180912 and the (p + 2) th image 180913, the first vector and the second vector obtained from the motion vector 180921,
Based on the image data in the fourth area 180918 in the (p + 3) -th image 180914 and the image data in the first area 180915 in the p-th image 180911, the second area 180916 and the third area 180913 are Form.

Here, the first vector obtained from the motion vector 180921 is the first displacement vector 18.
It will be called 0922. The second vector is referred to as a second displacement vector 180923. The first displacement vector 180922 has a role of determining a position where the second region 180916 is formed. The second region 180916 is formed at a position separated from the fourth region 180918 by the first displacement vector 180922. Note that the first displacement vector 180922 may be an amount obtained by multiplying the motion vector 180921 by (1/3). In addition, the second displacement vector 180923 has a role of determining a position where the third region 180917 is formed. The third region 1800917 is formed at a position separated from the fourth region 180918 by the second displacement vector 180923. The second displacement vector 180923
May be an amount obtained by multiplying the motion vector 180921 by (2/3).

The image data in the second area 180916 in the (p + 1) -th image 180912 includes the image data in the fourth area 180918 in the (p + 3) -th image 180914, and the p-th image data.
It may be determined by the image data in the first region 180915 in the image 180911. For example, the second region 1809 in the (p + 1) th image 180912
16 is the fourth area 18091 in the (p + 3) -th image 180914.
8 and the average value of the image data in the first region 180915 in the p-th image 180911.

The image data in the third area 180913 in the (p + 2) -th image 180913 includes the image data in the fourth area 180918 in the (p + 3) -th image 180914 and the p-th image.
It may be determined by the image data in the first region 180915 in the image 180911. For example, the third region 1809 in the (p + 2) -th image 180913
The image data in 17 is the fourth area 18091 in the (p + 3) -th image 180914.
8 and the average value of the image data in the first region 180915 in the p-th image 180911.

In this way, the second region 180916 in the (p + 1) th image 180902 corresponding to the fourth region 180918 in the (p + 3) th image 180914, and the (
A third region 180917 in the image 180913 of p + 2) can be formed.
The above processing is also performed on other regions in the (p + 3) -th image 180914, so that an intermediate state between the (p + 3) -th image 180914 and the p-th image 180911 is obtained.
A (p + 1) th image 180912 and a (p + 2) th image 180913 can be formed.

Next, an example of a circuit that detects the movement of an image included in input image data and creates an image in an intermediate state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90A illustrates a connection relationship between a peripheral driver circuit including a source driver and a gate driver for displaying an image in a display region, and a control circuit that controls the peripheral driver circuit. FIG. 90B is a diagram illustrating an example of a detailed circuit configuration of the control circuit. FIG. 90C is a diagram illustrating an example of a detailed circuit configuration of an image processing circuit included in the control circuit. FIG. 90D is a diagram showing another example of a detailed circuit configuration of the image processing circuit included in the control circuit.

As shown in FIG. 90A, the device in this embodiment may include a control circuit 181101, a source driver 181012, a gate driver 181013, and a display region 181014.

Note that the control circuit 181011, the source driver 181012, and the gate driver 181
013 may be formed on the same substrate as the substrate on which the display region 181014 is formed.

Note that the control circuit 181011, the source driver 181012, and the gate driver 181
013 is partly formed on the same substrate as the substrate on which the display region 181014 is formed, and other circuits are formed on a substrate different from the substrate on which the display region 181014 is formed. It may be. For example, the source driver 181012 and the gate driver 181013 may be formed over the same substrate as the substrate over which the display region 181014 is formed, and the control circuit 181101 may be formed as an external IC over a different substrate. Similarly, the gate driver 181013 may be formed over the same substrate as the substrate over which the display region 181014 is formed, and other circuits may be formed as external ICs over different substrates. Similarly, part of the source driver 181012, the gate driver 181013, and the control circuit 181101 is formed over the same substrate as the substrate over which the display region 181014 is formed, and the other circuits are formed as external ICs over different substrates. May be.

The control circuit 181101 includes an external image signal 181000, a horizontal synchronization signal 181001,
The vertical synchronization signal 181002 is input, the image signal 181003, the source start pulse 181004, the source clock 181005, and the gate start pulse 18100.
6 and the gate clock 181007 may be output.

The source driver 181012, the image signal 181003 and the source start pulse 181
004 and the source clock 181005 may be input, and a voltage or current in accordance with the image signal 181003 may be output to the display area 181014.

The gate driver 181013 may have a configuration in which a gate start pulse 181006 and a gate clock 181007 are input, and a signal that specifies a timing for writing a signal output from the source driver 181012 in the display region 181014 is output.

When the frequency of the external image signal 181000 and the frequency of the image signal 181003 are different, the signals for controlling the timing for driving the source driver 181012 and the gate driver 181013 are also input to the horizontal synchronization signal 181001 and the vertical synchronization signal 1810.
It will have a frequency different from 02. Therefore, in addition to the processing of the image signal 181003, it is necessary to process a signal for controlling the timing for driving the source driver 181012 and the gate driver 181013. The control circuit 181101 may be a circuit having a function for that purpose. For example, when the frequency of the image signal 181003 is twice the frequency of the external image signal 181000, the control circuit 181011 may
An image signal included in 1000 is interpolated to generate an image signal 181003 having a double frequency, and a signal for timing control is also controlled to be a double frequency.

The control circuit 181101 includes an image processing circuit 181015 as shown in FIG.
And a timing generation circuit 181016.

The image processing circuit 181015 includes an external image signal 181000 and a frequency control signal 18100.
8 may be input and the image signal 181003 may be output.

The timing generation circuit 181016 includes a horizontal synchronization signal 181001 and a vertical synchronization signal 181.
002, a source start pulse 181004, and a source clock 1810
05, a gate start pulse 181006, a gate clock 181007, and a frequency control signal 181008 may be output. Note that the timing generation circuit 181016 may include a memory or a register that holds data for designating the state of the frequency control signal 181008. In addition, the timing generation circuit 181016 may be configured to receive a signal that specifies the state of the frequency control signal 181008 from the outside.

As shown in FIG. 90C, the image processing circuit 181015 includes a motion detection circuit 181020, a first memory 181021, a second memory 181022, a third memory 181023, a luminance control circuit 181024, and a high-speed processing. And a circuit 181025.

The motion detection circuit 181020 may be configured to receive a plurality of image data, detect a motion of the image, and output image data that is an intermediate state of the plurality of image data.

The first memory 181021 receives the external image signal 181000 and holds the external image signal 181000 for a certain period, while the motion detection circuit 181020 and the second memory 1810 are held.
22 may be configured to output the external image signal 181000.

The second memory 181022 receives the image data output from the first memory 181021, and outputs the image data to the motion detection circuit 181020 and the high-speed processing circuit 181025 while holding the image data for a certain period. There may be.

The third memory 181023 may be configured to receive the image data output from the motion detection circuit 181020 and output the image data to the luminance control circuit 181024 while holding the image data for a certain period.

The high-speed processing circuit 181025 includes image data output from the second memory 181022,
The image data output from the luminance control circuit 181024 and the frequency control signal 181008 may be input, and the image data may be output as the image signal 181003.

When the frequency of the external image signal 181000 and the frequency of the image signal 181003 are different, the image signal included in the external image signal 181000 may be interpolated by the image processing circuit 181015 to generate the image signal 181003. Input external image signal 18100
0 is once held in the first memory 181021. At that time, the second memory 18102
2 holds image data input in the previous frame. Motion detection circuit 18
1020 appropriately reads the image data held in the first memory 181021 and the second memory 181022, detects a motion vector from the difference between the two image data,
Intermediate state image data may be generated. The generated intermediate state image data is held by the third memory 181023.

When the motion detection circuit 181020 is generating intermediate state image data, the high speed processing circuit 1
81025 converts the image data held in the second memory 181022 into the image signal 18.
1003 is output. Thereafter, the image data held in the third memory 181023 is output as the image signal 181003 through the luminance control circuit 181024. At this time, the frequency at which the second memory 181022 and the third memory 181023 are updated is the same as the frequency of the external image signal 181000, but the frequency of the image signal 181003 output through the high-speed processing circuit 181025 is the same as that of the external image signal 181000. It may be different from the frequency. Specifically, for example, the frequency of the image signal 181003 is the external image signal 181000.
1.5 times, 2 times, and 3 times the frequency. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various frequencies can be used. Note that the frequency of the image signal 181003 may be specified by the frequency control signal 181008.

The configuration of the image processing circuit 181015 shown in FIG. 90D is obtained by adding a fourth memory 181026 to the configuration of the image processing circuit 181015 shown in FIG. In this way, the image data output from the first memory 181021 and the second memory 181022
In addition to the image data output from, the image data output from the fourth memory 181026 is also output to the motion detection circuit 181020, so that the motion of the image can be accurately detected.

If the input image data already contains a motion vector for data compression or the like, for example, MPEG (Moving Picture Expert Gr
In the case of image data based on the (up) standard, an intermediate state image may be generated as an interpolated image using the image data. At this time, a part for generating a motion vector included in the motion detection circuit 181020 is not necessary. In addition, since the encoding and decoding processes related to the image signal 181003 are simplified, power consumption can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (may be a part) described in each drawing of this embodiment are applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (may be a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.
(Embodiment 11)

In this embodiment, an example of an electronic device will be described.

FIG. 47 shows a display panel module in which a display panel 900101 and a circuit board 900111 are combined. A display panel 900101 includes a pixel portion 900102, a scan line driver circuit 900103, and a signal line driver circuit 900104. On the circuit board 900111, for example, a control circuit 900112 and a signal dividing circuit 900113 are formed. The display panel 900101 and the circuit board 900111 are connected by a connection wiring 900114. An FPC or the like can be used for the connection wiring.

In the display panel 900101, a pixel portion 900102 and a part of peripheral driver circuits (a driver circuit having a low operating frequency among the plurality of driver circuits) are formed over a substrate using a transistor, and a part of the peripheral driver circuits (a plurality of peripheral driver circuits) A driver circuit having a high operating frequency) is formed on an IC chip, and the IC chip is formed on a display panel 9001 by COG (Chip On Glass) or the like.
You may implement in 01. Thus, the area of the circuit board 900111 can be reduced, and a small display device can be obtained. Alternatively, the IC chip is TAB (Tape Out).
o Bonding) or a printed circuit board, the display panel 900101 may be mounted. Thus, the area of the display panel 900101 can be reduced, so that a display device with a small frame size can be obtained.

For example, in order to reduce power consumption, a pixel portion is formed using a transistor on a glass substrate, all peripheral drive circuits are formed on an IC chip, and the IC chip is mounted on a display panel by COG or TAB. May be.

A television receiver can be completed by the display panel module shown in FIG. FIG. 48 is a block diagram illustrating a main configuration of a television receiver. Tuner 900201
Receives video and audio signals. The video signal includes a video signal amplifying circuit 900202, a video signal processing circuit 900203 for converting a signal output from the video signal amplifying circuit 900202 into a color signal corresponding to each color of red, green, and blue, and a driving circuit for the video signal. Is processed by a control circuit 900212 for conversion to the input specification of Control circuit 900212
Outputs signals to the scanning line side and the signal line side, respectively. In the case of digital driving, a signal dividing circuit 900213 may be provided on the signal line side, and an input digital signal may be divided into m pieces (m is a positive integer) and supplied.

Of the signals received by the tuner 900201, the audio signal is the audio signal amplifier circuit 900205.
The output is supplied to the speaker 900207 via the audio signal processing circuit 900206. The control circuit 900208 receives the receiving station (receiving frequency) and volume control information from the input unit 90.
0209 is received and a signal is transmitted to the tuner 900201 or the audio signal processing circuit 900206.

49 (a) and 49 (b) show a television receiver in which a display panel module different from that shown in FIG. 48 is incorporated.
Shown in A). In FIG. 49A, a display screen 9003 housed in a housing 900301.
02 is formed of a display panel module. Note that the speaker 900303, the operation switch 900304, the input means 900305, the sensor 900306 (force, displacement, position, speed,
Acceleration, angular velocity, rotation speed, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemistry, sound, time, hardness, electric field,
A function including a function of measuring current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, odor, or infrared light), a microphone 930307, and the like may be provided as appropriate.

FIG. 49B illustrates a television receiver that can carry only a display wirelessly.
A housing 900312 houses a battery and a signal receiver. The battery includes a display portion 900313, a speaker portion 900317, and a sensor 900319 (force, displacement, position, speed, acceleration, angular velocity, rotation speed, distance, light, liquid , Magnetic, temperature, chemistry, sound, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, smell, or infrared)) and the macrophone 900320 are driven. Battery is charger 90
In 0310, repeated charging is possible. The charger 900310 can transmit and receive a video signal, and can transmit the video signal to a signal receiver of the display. The device shown in FIG. 49B is controlled by an operation key 900316. Alternatively, FIG.
The device shown in (B) operates the operation key 900316 to thereby form a charger 90031.
It is possible to send a signal to zero. That is, it may be a video / audio bidirectional communication device. Alternatively, in the device illustrated in FIG. 49B, by operating the operation key 900316, a signal is transmitted to the charger 900310, and a signal that can be transmitted by the charger 900310 is further received by another electronic device. Communication control of electronic devices is also possible. That is, a general-purpose remote control device may be used. Note that input means 900318 and the like may be provided as appropriate. Note that the contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing of this embodiment are displayed on the display portion 900313
Can be applied to.

FIG. 50A illustrates a module in which a display panel 900401 and a printed wiring board 900402 are combined. A display panel 900401 includes a pixel portion 900403 provided with a plurality of pixels, a first scan line driver circuit 900404, and a second scan line driver circuit 90040.
5 and a signal line driver circuit 900406 for supplying a video signal to a selected pixel.

A printed wiring board 900402 includes a controller 900407, a central processing unit (CPU
) 940408, memory 900409, power supply circuit 900410, audio processing circuit 90041
1 and a transmission / reception circuit 900412 and the like. The printed wiring board 900402 and the display panel 900401 are connected by a flexible wiring board (FPC) 900413. The flexible wiring board (FPC) 9000041 may be provided with a storage capacitor, a buffer circuit, and the like to prevent generation of noise in the power supply voltage or signal and increase in signal rise time. Note that the controller 9000040, the sound processing circuit 9000041, the memory 9000040, the central processing unit (CPU) 900408, the power supply circuit 900410,
The display panel 900401 can be mounted using a COG (Chip On Glass) method. The scale of the printed wiring board 900402 can be reduced by the COG method.

Interface (I / F) unit 900414 provided on the printed circuit board 900402
Various control signals are input and output via the. An antenna port 900415 for transmitting and receiving signals to and from the antenna is provided on the printed wiring board 900402.

FIG. 50B shows a block diagram of the module shown in FIG. This module includes a VRAM 900416, a DRAM 9000041, a flash memory 900418, and the like as the memory 900409. The VRAM 900416 stores image data to be displayed on the panel, the DRAM 900417 stores image data or audio data, and the flash memory stores various programs.

The power supply circuit 900410 supplies power for operating the display panel 900401, the controller 900407, the central processing unit (CPU) 9000040, the sound processing circuit 9000041, the memory 9000040, and the transmission / reception circuit 9000041. However, depending on the panel specifications, the power supply circuit 900410 may be provided with a current source.

A central processing unit (CPU) 9000040 includes a control signal generation circuit 900420 and a decoder 90.
0421, a register 900422, an arithmetic circuit 900423, a RAM 900394, an interface (I / F) unit 900419 for a central processing unit (CPU) 9000040, and the like. Central processing unit (CPU) via interface (I / F) unit 900419
Various signals input to 9000040 are temporarily stored in the register 9000042 and then input to the arithmetic circuit 9000042, the decoder 9000042, and the like. The arithmetic circuit 900423 performs an operation based on the input signal and designates a place to send various commands. On the other hand, the decoder 9
The signal input to 00421 is decoded and input to the control signal generation circuit 900420. The control signal generation circuit 900420 generates a signal including various instructions based on the input signal, and a location designated in the arithmetic circuit 9000042, specifically, a memory 9000040,
The data is sent to the transmission / reception circuit 900412, the audio processing circuit 900411, the controller 900407, and the like.

The memory 9000040, the transmission / reception circuit 9000041, the sound processing circuit 9000041, and the controller 900407 operate according to received commands. The operation will be briefly described below.

A signal input from the input unit 9000042 is input to an interface (I / F) unit 90041.
Central processing unit (CPU) 9004 mounted on a printed wiring board 900402 via 4
Sent to 08. The control signal generation circuit 900420 converts the image data stored in the VRAM 900416 into a predetermined format according to the signal sent from the input device 9000042 such as a pointing device or a keyboard, and sends it to the controller 900407.

The controller 900407 is a central processing unit (CPU) 9004 in accordance with the specifications of the panel.
Data processing is performed on a signal including image data sent from 08, and a display panel 90040 is processed.
1 is supplied. Based on the power supply voltage input from the power supply circuit 900410 or various signals input from the central processing unit (CPU) 9000040, the controller 900407
A sync signal, a Vsync signal, a clock signal CLK, an AC voltage (AC Cont), and a switching signal L / R are generated and supplied to the display panel 900401.

In the transmission / reception circuit 9000041, a signal transmitted / received as a radio wave in the antenna 9000042 is processed. Specifically, an isolator, a band pass filter, a VCO (Volt)
age Controlled Oscillator), LPF (Low Pass)
A high frequency circuit such as a filter), a coupler, or a balun may be included. Transmission / reception circuit 90
Of the signals transmitted and received in 0412, a signal including audio information is sent to the central processing unit (CPU).
) Is sent to the audio processing circuit 900411 according to the command from 900408.

A signal including audio information sent in accordance with an instruction from the central processing unit (CPU) 9000040 is demodulated into an audio signal by an audio processing circuit 9000041 and sent to a speaker 9000042. The audio signal sent from the microphone 9000042 is modulated in the audio processing circuit 9000041 and is transmitted and received in accordance with a command from the central processing unit (CPU) 9000040.
Sent to 00412.

Controller 9000040, central processing unit (CPU) 9000040, power supply circuit 90041
0, the audio processing circuit 900411 and the memory 9000040 can be mounted as a package of this embodiment.

Of course, the present embodiment is not limited to a television receiver, and is used for various applications as a display medium with a particularly large area such as a monitor of a personal computer, an information display board at a railway station or airport, and an advertisement display board in a street. Can be applied.

Next, a configuration example of a mobile phone will be described with reference to FIG.

The display panel 900501 is incorporated in a housing 900530 so as to be detachable. The shape or dimension of the housing 900530 can be changed as appropriate in accordance with the size of the display panel 900501. A housing 900530 to which the display panel 900501 is fixed is fitted into the printed circuit board 900531 and assembled as a module.

The display panel 900501 is connected to the printed circuit board 900531 through the FPC 900531. A printed circuit board 900531 includes a speaker 900532 and a microphone 900.
533, a signal processing circuit 900 including a transmission / reception circuit 900534, a CPU, a controller, and the like.
535 and sensor 900541 (force, displacement, position, velocity, acceleration, angular velocity, rotation speed, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemistry, voice, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, Including a function of measuring humidity, gradient, vibration, odor or infrared). Such a module is combined with the input means 900566 and the battery 900577 and stored in the housing 9000053. The pixel portion of the display panel 900501 is a housing 9000053.
It arrange | positions so that it can visually recognize from the opening window formed in.

In the display panel 900501, a pixel portion and some peripheral driver circuits (a driver circuit having a low operating frequency among a plurality of driver circuits) are formed over a substrate using transistors, and some peripheral driver circuits (a plurality of driver circuits) are formed. The driving circuit having a high operating frequency is formed on the IC chip, and the IC
The chip may be mounted on the display panel 900501 by COG (Chip On Glass). Alternatively, the IC chip may be connected to the glass substrate using TAB (Tape Auto Bonding) or a printed circuit board. With such a structure, the power consumption of the display device can be reduced, and the usage time by one charge of the mobile phone can be extended. Cost reduction of the mobile phone can be achieved.

The mobile phone shown in FIG. 51 has a function of displaying various information (still images, moving images, text images, and the like). It has a function of displaying a calendar, date or time on the display unit. It has a function of operating or editing information displayed on the display unit. It has a function of controlling processing by various software (programs). Has a wireless communication function. It has a function of making a call with another mobile phone, a fixed phone, or a voice communication device using a wireless communication function. It has a function of connecting to various computer networks using a wireless communication function. It has a function of transmitting or receiving various data using a wireless communication function. The vibrator operates in response to an incoming call, data reception, or alarm. It has a function to generate a sound in response to an incoming call, reception of data, or an alarm. Note that the function of the mobile phone shown in FIG. 51 is not limited to this,
It can have various functions.

A cellular phone shown in FIG. 52 includes operation switches 9000060 and a microphone 90065.
A main body (A) 900601, a display panel (A) 900068, a display panel (B) 900609, a speaker 9000060, a sensor 900611 (force, displacement, position,
Speed, acceleration, angular velocity, rotation speed, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemistry, voice, time, hardness,
(B) 900602 provided with input means 900612 and the like (including a function for measuring electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, odor or infrared) and hinge 900610 Connected as possible. The display panel (A) 900608 and the display panel (B) 900609 are housed in a housing 900603 of the main body (B) 900602 together with the circuit board 9000060. Display panel (A) 9000060 and display panel (B
) The pixel portion of 900609 is arranged so that it can be seen from the opening window formed in the housing 900603.

The display panel (A) 900608 and the display panel (B) 900609
Specifications such as the number of pixels can be set as appropriate in accordance with the 0600 function. For example, the display panel (A) 900608 can be combined as a main screen and the display panel (B) 900609 can be combined as a sub-screen.

The mobile phone according to the present embodiment can be transformed into various modes depending on the function or application. For example, a mobile phone with a camera may be provided by incorporating an image sensor at the hinge 900610. Even when the operation switches 9000060, the display panel (A) 900068, and the display panel (B) 900609 are housed in one housing, the above-described effects can be obtained. Even if the configuration of the present embodiment is applied to an information display terminal having a plurality of display units, the same effect can be obtained.

The mobile phone shown in FIG. 52 has a function of displaying various information (still images, moving images, text images, and the like). It has a function of displaying a calendar, date or time on the display unit. It has a function of operating or editing information displayed on the display unit. It has a function of controlling processing by various software (programs). Has a wireless communication function. It has a function of making a call with another mobile phone, a fixed phone, or a voice communication device using a wireless communication function. It has a function of connecting to various computer networks using a wireless communication function. It has a function of transmitting or receiving various data using a wireless communication function. The vibrator operates in response to an incoming call, data reception, or alarm. It has a function to generate a sound in response to an incoming call, reception of data, or an alarm. Note that the function of the mobile phone shown in FIG. 52 is not limited to this,
It can have various functions.

The contents (or part of them) described in each drawing of this embodiment can be applied to various electronic devices. Specifically, it can be applied to a display portion of an electronic device. Such electronic devices include video cameras, digital cameras, goggles-type displays, navigation systems, sound playback devices (car audio, audio components, etc.), computers, game devices, portable information terminals (mobile computers, mobile phones, portable games) Machine or e-book)
, An image reproducing apparatus provided with a recording medium (specifically, Digital Versatile D
for example, a device provided with a display capable of reproducing a recording medium such as an isc (DVD) and displaying the image.

FIG. 53A shows a display, which includes a housing 900711, a support base 900712, and a display portion 9.
00713, input means 900714, sensor 900715 (force, displacement, position, velocity, acceleration, angular velocity, rotation speed, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemistry, voice, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, Including functions for measuring radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, odor or infrared), microphone 900716, speaker 900717, operation key 900718
LED lamp 900719 and the like. The display illustrated in FIG. 53A has a function of displaying various information (still images, moving images, text images, and the like) on the display portion. Note that FIG.
The function of the display shown in A) is not limited to this, and can have various functions.

FIG. 53B shows a camera, which includes a main body 900731, a display portion 900732, and an image receiving portion 9007.
33, operation key 900734, external connection port 9000073, shutter 900736,
Input means 9000073, sensor 9000073 (force, displacement, position, velocity, acceleration, angular velocity,
(Including functions for measuring rotation speed, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemistry, sound, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, odor or infrared) , Microphone 9000073, speaker 900740, LED lamp 900741 and the like. The camera illustrated in FIG. 53B has a function of capturing a still image. Has a function to shoot movies. It has a function of automatically correcting captured images (still images, moving images). It has a function of storing captured images in a recording medium (externally or built in a digital camera). It has a function of displaying a photographed image on the display unit. Note that the function of the camera illustrated in FIG. 53B is not limited to this, and the camera can have a variety of functions.

FIG. 53C illustrates a computer, which includes a main body 900751, a housing 900752, and a display portion 90.
0753, keyboard 900754, external connection port 900755, pointing device 900756, input means 900777, sensor 900788 (force, displacement, position, velocity, acceleration, angular velocity, rotation speed, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemistry, voice, Including functions for measuring time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, odor or infrared), microphone 9000075, speaker 900760, LED lamp 9
00761, reader / writer 900762, and the like. The computer illustrated in FIG. 53C has a function of displaying various information (such as a still image, a moving image, and a text image) on the display portion. It has a function of controlling processing by various software (programs). It has a communication function such as wireless communication or wired communication. It has a function of connecting to various computer networks using a communication function. It has a function of transmitting or receiving various data using a communication function. Note that the function of the computer illustrated in FIG. 53C is not limited thereto, and the computer can have various functions.

FIG. 54A illustrates a mobile computer, which includes a main body 901411, a display portion 901412,
Switch 901413, operation key 901414, infrared port 901415, input means 9
01416, sensor 901417 (force, displacement, position, velocity, acceleration, angular velocity, rotation speed, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemistry, voice, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation,
Including a function of measuring flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, odor or infrared), a microphone 901418, a speaker 901419, an LED lamp 901420, and the like. 54 (
The mobile computer shown in A) has a function of displaying various types of information (still images, moving images, text images, etc.) on the display unit. The display unit has a touch panel function. The display unit has a function of displaying a calendar, date or time. It has a function of controlling processing by various software (programs). Has a wireless communication function. It has a function of connecting to various computer networks using a wireless communication function. It has a function of transmitting or receiving various data using a wireless communication function. Note that the function of the mobile computer illustrated in FIG. 54A is not limited to this, and the mobile computer can have various functions.

FIG. 54B illustrates a portable image playback device (eg, a DVD playback device) provided with a recording medium, which includes a main body 901431, a housing 901432, a display portion A901433, and a display portion B9014.
34, recording medium reading unit 901435 (DVD or the like), operation keys 901436, speaker unit 901437, input means 901438, sensor 901439 (force, displacement, position, speed,
Acceleration, angular velocity, rotation speed, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemistry, sound, time, hardness, electric field,
Including a function of measuring current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, smell or infrared), a microphone 901440, an LED lamp 901441, and the like. The display portion A 901433 can mainly display image information, and the display portion B 901434 can mainly display character information.

FIG. 54C illustrates a goggle type display, which includes a main body 901451 and a display portion 901452.
, Earphone 901453, support portion 901454, input means 901455, sensor 9014
56 (force, displacement, position, velocity, acceleration, angular velocity, rotation speed, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemistry, voice, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient , Including a function of measuring vibration, smell or infrared), microphone 901457, speaker 9
01458 and the like. The goggle type display shown in FIG. 54C has a function of displaying an externally acquired image (a still image, a moving image, a text image, or the like) on the display portion. Note that FIG.
The function of the goggle type display shown in FIG. 4C is not limited to this, and can have various functions.

FIG. 55A illustrates a portable game machine, which includes a housing 901511, a display portion 901512, a speaker portion 901513, operation keys 901514, a storage medium insertion portion 901515, and input means 901.
516, sensor 901517 (force, displacement, position, velocity, acceleration, angular velocity, rotation speed, distance,
Including a function for measuring light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemistry, sound, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, odor or infrared), microphone 9
01518, LED lamp 901519, and the like. The portable game machine shown in FIG.
It has a function of reading a program or data recorded on a recording medium and displaying it on a display unit. It has a function of sharing information by performing wireless communication with other portable game machines. Note that FIG.
The functions of the portable game machine shown in (A) are not limited to these, and can have various functions.

FIG. 55B shows a digital camera with a television receiving function, which includes a main body 901531 and a display portion 9.
01532, operation key 901533, speaker 901534, shutter 901535,
Image receiving unit 901536, antenna 901537, input unit 901538, sensor (force, displacement, position, velocity, acceleration, angular velocity, rotation speed, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemistry, sound, time, hardness, electric field, current, Including a function of measuring voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, odor, or infrared light) 901539, a microphone 901540, an LED lamp 901541, and the like. The digital camera with a television receiver shown in FIG. 55B has a function of shooting a still image. Has a function to shoot movies. It has a function to automatically correct a photographed image. It has a function of acquiring various information from the antenna. It has a function of storing captured images or information acquired from an antenna. It has a function of displaying a captured image or information acquired from an antenna on a display unit. Note that the function of the digital camera with a television receiver illustrated in FIG. 53H is not limited to this, and the digital camera can have a variety of functions.

FIG. 56 shows a portable game machine, which includes a housing 901611, a first display portion 901612, a second display portion 901613, a speaker portion 901614, operation keys 901615, and a recording medium insertion portion 901.
616, input means 901617, sensor 901618 (force, displacement, position, speed, acceleration,
Includes the ability to measure angular velocity, number of revolutions, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemistry, sound, time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, power, radiation, flow rate, humidity, gradient, vibration, odor or infrared 1), a microphone 901619, an LED lamp 901620, and the like. The portable game machine shown in FIG. 56 has a function of reading a program or data recorded on a recording medium and displaying it on a display unit. It has a function of sharing information by performing wireless communication with other portable game machines. Note that the function of the portable game machine shown in FIG. 56 is not limited to this, and the portable game machine can have various functions.

53 (A) to (C), FIGS. 54 (A) to (C), FIGS. 55 (A) to (C), and FIG.
As shown in FIG. 6, the electronic apparatus has a display unit for displaying some information. The electronic device can obtain a display with improved viewing angle characteristics.

Next, application examples of the semiconductor device will be described.

FIG. 73 illustrates an example in which a semiconductor device is provided so as to be integrated with a building. FIG. 73 shows the housing 9
And a remote control device 900812 as an operation unit, a speaker unit 9000081, and the like. The semiconductor device is integrated with the building as a wall-hanging type, and can be installed without requiring a large installation space.

FIG. 74 shows another example in which a semiconductor device is provided integrally with a building in the building. The display panel 900901 is integrally attached to the unit bath 900902, so that the bather can view the display panel 900901. The display panel 900901 has a function of displaying information when operated by a bather. It has a function that can be used as an advertising or entertainment means.

Note that the semiconductor device can be installed not only on the side wall of the unit bus 900902 shown in FIG. For example, a part of the mirror surface or the bathtub itself may be integrated. At this time, the shape of the display panel 900901 may be adapted to the shape of the mirror surface or the bathtub.

FIG. 77 shows another example in which the semiconductor device is provided so as to be integrated with a building. Display panel 9
01002 is attached in a curved manner according to the curved surface of the columnar body 901001. Here, the columnar body 901001 is described as a utility pole.

A display panel 901002 illustrated in FIG. 77 is provided at a position higher than the human viewpoint. By installing the display panel 901002 on a building that is repeatedly forested outdoors such as an electric pole, an advertisement can be made to an unspecified number of viewers. Here, the display panel 901002
Since it is easy to display the same image and to switch the image instantly by control from the outside, extremely efficient information display and advertising effect can be expected. Display panel 9
By providing a self-luminous display element at 01002, it can be said that it is useful as a display medium with high visibility even at night. By installing it on the utility pole, it is easy to secure the power supply means of the display panel 901002. In the event of an emergency such as a disaster, it can also be a means of quickly and accurately communicating information to the victims.

Note that as the display panel 901002, for example, a display panel which displays an image by providing a switching element such as an organic transistor on a film-like substrate and driving the display element can be used.

Note that in this embodiment, a wall, a columnar body, and a unit bus are taken as examples of buildings, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and semiconductor devices can be installed in various buildings.

Next, an example in which the semiconductor device is provided integrally with the moving body is described.

FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example in which a semiconductor device is provided integrally with an automobile. The display panel 901102 is attached integrally with the vehicle body 901101 of the automobile, and can display the operation of the vehicle body or information input from inside and outside the vehicle body on demand. Note that a navigation function may be provided.

Note that the semiconductor device can be installed not only in the vehicle body 901101 shown in FIG. 78 but also in various places. For example, glass windows, doors, handles, shift levers, seats,
It may be integrated with a room mirror or the like. At this time, the shape of the display panel 901102 may be adapted to the shape of the object to be installed.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example in which a semiconductor device is provided integrally with a train car.

FIG. 79A is a diagram showing an example in which a display panel 901202 is provided on the glass of a door 901201 of a train car. Compared to conventional paper advertisements, there is an advantage that labor costs required for advertisement switching are not incurred. Since the display panel 901202 can instantaneously switch the image displayed on the display unit in response to an external signal, for example, the display panel image is switched every time period when the customer base of the passengers on the train changes. More effective advertising effect can be expected.

FIG. 79B shows a glass window 901203 in addition to the glass of the door 901201 of the train car.
FIG. 10 illustrates an example in which a display panel 901202 is provided on a ceiling 901204. As described above, since the semiconductor device can be easily installed in a place where it has been difficult to install in the past, an effective advertising effect can be obtained. Since the semiconductor device can instantaneously switch the image displayed on the display unit by an external signal, the cost and time at the time of advertisement switching can be reduced, and more flexible advertisement operation and information transmission can be achieved. It becomes possible.

Note that the semiconductor device can be installed not only in the door 901201, the glass window 901203, and the ceiling 901204 shown in FIG. 79 but also in various places. For example, straps,
It may be integrated with a seat, a railing, a floor or the like. At this time, the shape of the display panel 901202 may be matched with the shape of the display panel.

FIG. 80 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a semiconductor device is provided integrally with a passenger airplane.

FIG. 80A shows a display panel 901302 on a ceiling 901301 above the seat of a passenger airplane.
It is the figure shown about the shape at the time of use when providing. The display panel 901302 is integrally attached via a ceiling 901301 and a hinge part 901303, and the hinge part 9
The passenger can view the display panel 901302 by the expansion and contraction of 01303. A display panel 901302 has a function of displaying information when operated by a passenger. It has a function that can be used as an advertising or entertainment means. As shown in FIG. 80 (b), the hinge portion is bent to remove the ceiling 9
By storing it in 01301, it is possible to consider safety during takeoff and landing. In addition, by turning on the display element of the display panel in an emergency, it can be used as an information transmission means and a guide light.

Note that the semiconductor device can be installed not only in the ceiling 901301 illustrated in FIG. 80 but also in various places. For example, it may be integrated with a seat seat, a seat table, an armrest, a window and the like. A large display panel that can be viewed simultaneously by a large number of people may be installed on the wall of the aircraft. At this time, the shape of the display panel 901302 may be adapted to the shape of the object to be installed.

In the present embodiment, the moving body is exemplified as a train car body, an automobile body, and an airplane body, but is not limited to this. A motorcycle, an automobile (including an automobile, a bus, etc.),
It can be installed on various things such as trains (including monorails, railways, etc.) and ships. Since the semiconductor device can instantly switch the display of the display panel in the moving body by an external signal, installing the semiconductor device in the moving body targets a large number of unspecified customers. It can be used for applications such as advertisement display boards and information display boards in the event of a disaster.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (may be a part) described in each drawing of this embodiment are applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (may be a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.

100 gradation signal 101 gradation data conversion unit 102 drive unit 103 display unit 104 gradation data storage unit 105 sub gradation signal 106 combination data 107 control signal 201 first combination data 202 second combination data 301 source driver 302 gate Driver 303 Wiring 304 Wiring 305 Pixel 313 Wiring 400 Subpixel A
401 Switch 402 Capacitance element 403 Liquid crystal element 410 Sub-pixel B
411 Switch 412 Capacitance element 413 Liquid crystal element 501 Sub gradation signal A
502 Sub gradation signal B
505 Pixel 603 Liquid crystal element 1201 First combination data 1202 Second combination data 1501 Shift register 1601 First combination data 1602 Second combination data 1603 Third combination data 1800 Display portion 1801 Region 1802 Region 2000 Display portion 2001 Gate Driver 2002 Source driver 2201 Shift register 2202 Level shifter 2203 Sampling circuit 2301 Shift register 2302 Level shifter 2303 Buffer circuit 2600 Layer 2601 Substrate 2602 Substrate 2603 Layer 2604 Layer 2605 Electrode 2606 Electrode 2607 Protrusion 2608 Protrusion 2650 Insulating layer 2651 Insulating layer 2801 Electrode 2803 Electrode 2804 Electrode 5701 A / D conversion circuit 5702 Digital signal 5801 D / A conversion circuit 5802 Analog signal 5901 Substrate 5902 Insulating film 5903 Conductive layer 5904 Insulating film 5905 Semiconductor layer 5906 Semiconductor layer 5907 Conductive layer 5908 Insulating film 5909 Conductive layer 5910 Aligned film 5912 Aligned film 5913 Conductive layer 5914 Light shielding film 5915 Color filter 5916 Substrate 5917 Spacer 5918 Liquid crystal molecule 5921 Scan line 5922 Video signal line 5923 Capacitance line 5924 TFT
5925 Pixel electrode 5926 Pixel capacity 6001 Substrate 6002 Insulating film 6003 Conductive layer 6004 Insulating film 6005 Semiconductor layer 6006 Semiconductor layer 6007 Conductive layer 6008 Insulating film 6009 Conductive film 6010 Aligned film 6012 Aligned film 6013 Conductive layer 6014 Light shielding film 6015 Color filter 6016 Substrate 6017 Spacer 6018 liquid crystal molecule 6019 alignment control protrusion 6021 scanning line 6023 capacitor line 6026 pixel capacitor 6101 substrate 6102 insulating film 6103 conductive layer 6104 insulating film 6105 semiconductor layer 6106 semiconductor layer 6107 conductive layer 6108 insulating film 6109 conductive layer 6110 alignment film 6112 alignment film 6113 conductive layer 6114 light shielding film 6115 color filter 6116 substrate 6117 spacer 6118 liquid crystal molecule 6119 part 6121 scanning line 6123 capacitance line 6 126 pixel capacitor 6201 substrate 6202 insulating film 6203 conductive layer 6204 insulating film 6205 semiconductor layer 6206 semiconductor layer 6207 conductive layer 6208 insulating film 6209 conductive layer 6210 alignment film 6212 alignment film 6214 light shielding film 6215 color filter 6216 substrate 6217 spacer 6218 liquid crystal molecule 6221 scanning Line 6222 Video signal line 6223 Common electrode 6224 TFT
6225 Pixel electrode 6301 Substrate 6302 Insulating film 6303 Conductive layer 6304 Insulating film 6305 Semiconductor layer 6306 Semiconductor layer 6307 Conductive layer 6308 Insulating film 6309 Conductive layer 6310 Alignment film 6312 Alignment film 6313 Conductive layer 6314 Light shielding film 6315 Color filter 6316 Substrate 6317 Spacer 6318 Liquid crystal Molecule 6319 Insulating film 6321 Scan line 6322 Video signal line 6323 Common electrode 6324 TFT
6325 Pixel electrode 7501 Display portion 7502 Scan line 7503 Signal line 7504 Pixel 7504A Sub-pixel A
7504B Sub-pixel B
7701 Light transmission amount of sub-pixel A 7702 Light transmission amount of sub-pixel B 7703 Total value of light transmission amount in one pixel 2606a Electrode 2801a Electrode 2801b Electrode 2801d Electrode 2801a Electrode 2802b Electrode 2802c Electrode 2802d Electrode 2803a Electrode 2803b Electrode 2803c Electrode 2803d Electrode 2804a Electrode 2804b Electrode 2804c Electrode 2804d Electrode 50100 Substrate 50101 Pixel portion 50105 Substrate 50106 Signal line driver circuit 50200 FPC
50501 insulating film 50502 semiconductor film 50503 insulating film 50504 conductive film 50505 insulating film 50506 conductive film 50507 insulating film 50508 conductive film 50509 insulating film 50510 liquid crystal layer 50511 insulating film 50512 conductive film 50513 insulating film 50514 insulating film 50515 substrate 50516 anisotropic material 50517 Conductive layer 50518 conductive film 50519 transistor 50520 transistor 50521 transistor 50525 driver circuit region 50526 pixel region 50530 IC chip 50531 spacer 50551 protrusion 50601 driver IC
51801 Insulating film 52001 Insulating film 52201 Insulating film 60105 Transistor 60106 Wiring 60107 Wiring 60108 Transistor 60111 Wiring 60112 Counter electrode 60113 Capacitor 60115 Pixel electrode 60116 Bulkhead 60117 Organic conductor film 60118 Organic thin film 60119 Substrate 6022A Video signal line 6022B Video signal line 6024A TFT
6024B TFT
6025A Pixel electrode 6025B Pixel electrode 6122A Video signal line 6122B Video signal line 6124A TFT
6124B TFT
6125A Pixel electrode 6125B Pixel electrode 50105a Scan line driver circuit 50105b Scan line driver circuit 50502a Semiconductor film 50502b Semiconductor film 50508a Conductive film 50508b Conductive film 50602a Driver IC
50602b Driver IC
30102 Delay circuit 30103 Correction circuit 30104 Output image signal 30105 Encoder 30106 Memory 30107 Decoder 30108 LUT
30109 LUT
30110 Adder 30111 Subtracter 30112 Multiplier 30113 Adder 30201 Transistor 30202 Auxiliary capacitor 30203 Display element 30204 Video signal line 30205 Scan line 30206 Common line 30211 Transistor 30212 Auxiliary capacitor 30213 Display element 30214 Video signal line 30215 Scan line 30216 Common line 30217 Common Line 30301 Diffuser plate 30302 Cold cathode tube 30311 Diffuser plate 30312 Light source 30401 Broken line 30402 Solid line 30501 Broken line 30502 Solid line 30101a Input image signal 30101b Input image signal 180100 Display device 180101 Pixel unit 180102 Pixel 180103 Signal line driver circuit 180104 Scan line driver circuit 180701 Image 180702 Image 180703 Image 180704 180705 image 180711 image 180712 image 180713 image 180714 image 180715 image 180716 image 180717 image 180721 image 180722 image 180723 image 180724 image 180725 image 180801 image 180802 image 180803 image 180804 area 180805 area 180806 area 180811 image 180812 area 180813 image 180814 area 180821 image 180822 image 180823 image 180824 area 180825 area 180826 area 180831 image 180832 image 180833 image 180834 area 180835 area 180836 area 180841 area 180842 point 180901 image 80902 image 180903 image 180904 region 180905 region 180906 region 180907 range 180908 range 180909 motion vector 180910 displacement vector 180911 image 180912 image 180913 image 180914 image 180915 region 180916 region 180919 1718 180918 region 180919 vector 1801892 range 1809202 External image signal 181001 Horizontal synchronization signal 181002 Vertical synchronization signal 181003 Image signal 181004 Source start pulse 181005 Source clock 181006 Gate start pulse 181007 Gate clock 181008 Frequency control signal 181101 Control circuit 181012 Source driver 181013 Gate driver 181014 Display area 181015 Image processing circuit 181016 Timing generation circuit 181020 Detection circuit 181021 First memory 181022 Second memory 181023 Third memory 181024 Brightness control circuit 181025 High-speed processing circuit 181026 Memory 900101 Display panel 900102 Pixel Unit 900103 Scanning line driver circuit 900104 Signal line driver circuit 900111 Circuit board 900112 Control circuit 900113 Signal dividing circuit 900114 Connection wiring 900201 Tuner 900202 Video signal amplifier circuit 900203 Video signal processor circuit 900205 Audio signal amplifier circuit 900206 Audio signal processor circuit 900207 Speaker 900208 Control Circuit 9002 9 Input unit 900212 Control circuit 900213 Signal division circuit 900301 Case 900302 Display screen 900303 Speaker 900304 Operation switch 900305 Input unit 900306 Sensor 9000030 Microphone 900310 Charger 900312 Case 900313 Display unit 900316 Operation key 900317 Speaker unit 900318 Input unit 900319 Sensor 900320 Macro Phone 900401 Display panel 900402 Printed wiring board 900403 Pixel portion 900404 Scanning line driver circuit 900405 Scanning line driver circuit 900406 Signal line driver circuit 9000040 Controller 9000040 Central processing unit (CPU)
9004009 Memory 900410 Power supply circuit 900411 Audio processing circuit 900412 Transmission / reception circuit 900413 Flexible printed circuit board (FPC)
900414 Interface (I / F) section 900415 Antenna port 900416 VRAM
900417 DRAM
900418 Flash memory 900419 Interface (I / F) section 900420 Control signal generation circuit 900411 Decoder 900422 Register 900423 Arithmetic circuit 900424 RAM
9000042 Input means 9000042 Microphone 9000042 Speaker 9000042 Antenna 9000050 Display panel 900533 FPC
900530 Housing 900531 Printed circuit board 900532 Speaker 900533 Microphone 900534 Transmission / reception circuit 90000535 Signal processing circuit 90000536 Input means 90000537 Battery 90000539 Case 900541 Sensor 900600 Mobile phone 90000601 Main body (A)
900602 body (B)
90063 Housing 9000060 Operation switches 9000060 Microphone 900706 Speaker 9000060 Circuit board 9000060 Display panel (A)
900609 Display panel (B)
900610 Hinge 900611 Sensor 900612 Input unit 900711 Case 900712 Support base 900713 Display unit 900714 Input unit 900715 Sensor 9000071 Microphone 900717 Speaker 900718 Operation key 900719 LED lamp 900731 Main body 900732 Display unit 900733 Image receiving unit 900734 Input key 900735 External connection port 900736 Means 900738 Sensor 9000073 Microphone 900740 Speaker 900741 LED lamp 9000075 Main body 900752 Case 900753 Display unit 900754 Keyboard 9000075 External connection port 9000075 Pointing device 9000075 Input means 900758 Sensor 900759 Eclophone 900760 Speaker 9000761 LED lamp 9000076 Reader / writer 900810 Housing 90081 Display unit 900812 Remote control unit 90000813 Speaker unit 900901 Display panel 900902 Unit bus 901001 Column body 901002 Display panel 901101 Car body 901102 Display panel 901201 Door 901202 Display panel 901203 Glass panel 901203 Ceiling 901302 Display panel 901303 Hinge unit 901411 Main unit 901414 Display unit 901413 Switch 901414 Operation key 901415 Infrared port 901416 Input unit 901417 Microphone 901419 Speaker 901420 LED lamp 901431 Main unit 90 432 housing 901,433 display section A
901434 Display unit B
901435 Recording medium reading unit 901436 Operation key 901437 Speaker unit 901438 Input unit 901439 Sensor 901440 Microphone 901441 LED lamp 901451 Main body 901455 Display unit 901453 Earphone 901454 Support unit 901455 Input unit 901456 Sensor 901457 Microphone 901415 Speaker unit 901415 Operation key 901515 Storage medium insertion unit 901516 Input unit 901517 Sensor 901518 Microphone 901519 LED lamp 901531 Main body 901532 Display unit 901533 Operation key 901534 Speaker 901535 Shutter 901536 Image receiving unit 901537 Antenna 901 538 Input means 901539 Sensor 901540 Microphone 901541 LED lamp 901611 Case 901612 Display unit 901613 Display unit 901614 Speaker unit 901615 Operation key 901616 Recording medium insertion part 901618 Sensor 901619 Microphone 901620 LED lamp

Claims (4)

A method of driving a liquid crystal display device having a pixel composed of a plurality of sub-pixels,
The gray levels of the pixels are the same in the first frame period and the second frame period,
A gray scale signal of the plurality of sub-pixels in the first frame period is different from a gray scale signal of the plurality of sub-pixels in the second frame period. Driving method. A method of driving a liquid crystal display device having a pixel composed of a first sub-pixel and a second sub-pixel,
The gray levels of the pixels are the same in the first frame period and the second frame period,
Driving a liquid crystal display device, wherein a gradation signal of the first sub-pixel in the first frame period and a gradation signal of the first sub-pixel in the second frame period are different Method. A method of driving a liquid crystal display device having a pixel composed of a first sub-pixel and a second sub-pixel,
The gray levels of the pixels are the same in the first frame period and the second frame period,
The gradation signal of the first sub-pixel in the first frame period is different from the gradation signal of the first sub-pixel in the second frame period,
Driving a liquid crystal display device, wherein a gradation signal of the second sub-pixel in the first frame period is different from a gradation signal of the second sub-pixel in the second frame period Method.   4. The method for driving a liquid crystal display device according to claim 1, wherein the lengths of the first subframe period and the second subframe period are equal. 5.

Images